Aron-E P35030200

TECHNICAL CATALOGUE
November
2010
TECHNICAL
CATALOGUE
A R O N 2 0 10
Plant
CH. I DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
1
Via Natta, 1 (Z.I. Mancasale)
2
42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy)
Tel. +39 0522 5058 CH. II PRESSURE CONTROL
Fax +39 0522 505856
www.aron.it - sales@brevinifluidpower.com
General terms and conditions of sale:
see website www.aron.it
CH. III FLOW CONTROL
3
CH. IV MODULAR VALVES
4
CH. V CARTRIDGE VALVES
ACCORDING TO DIN
5
CH. VI IN LINE VALVES
(SEE BREVINI FLUID POWER CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE)
6
CH. VII SUBPLATES
7
CH. VIII PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
8
CH. IX ELECTRONICS
9
CH. X SYSTEMS
10
CH. XI STACKABLE VALVES
11
CH. XII DC / AC STANDARD COILS
"UL RECOGNIZED" COILS 12
Incorrect use of the products described in this catalogue may cause harm to personnel and equipment. The technical information given for each
product in this catalogue may be subject to variation, and the manufacturer reserves the right to make constructional modifications without giving
prior notice. Each product presented, its data, features and technical specifications must therefore be examined and checked by members of
the user's staff (possessing suitable technical knowledge) taking into consideration the intended use of product. The user must, in particular,
assess the operating conditions of each product in relation to the application that he intends to use it for, analysing the data, features and technical
specifications in view of the proposed applications, and ensuring that, in use in the product, all of the conditions relating to the safety of personnel
and equipment, also in the event of breakdown, are respected.
File: 00TA_E Index • I 01/2010/e

AD.5.RI... AM.3.UP1...
INDEX CH. I PAGE 44 CH. IV PAGE 8
ADC.3.E... AM.3.VI...
A CH. I PAGE 5 CH. IV PAGE 9

A.66.. ADH.5... AM.3.VM...
CH. IV PAGE 19 CH. I PAGE 48 CH. IV PAGE 9

A.88.. ADH.7... AM.3.VR...
CH. IV PAGE 33 CH. I PAGE 52 CH. IV PAGE 13

AD.2.E... ADH.8... AM.3.VS...
CH. I PAGE 4 CH. I PAGE 57 CH. IV PAGE 15

AD.3.D... ADL.06.6... AM.3.XMP...
CH. I PAGE 17 CH. I PAGE 64 CH. VIII PAGE 26

AD.3.E... ADL.10.6 AM.5.CP...
CH. I PAGE 11 CH. I PAGE 66 CH. IV PAGE 26

ADP.5.E... AM.5.H...
AD.3.E...J* CH. I PAGE 36 CH. VIII PAGE 17
CH. I PAGE 12
ADP.5.V... AM.5.QF...
AD.3.I... CH. I PAGE 39 CH. IV PAGE 31
CH. I PAGE 41
ADPH.5... AM.5.RGT...
AD.3.L... CH. I PAGE 45 CH. IV PAGE 34
CH. I PAGE 14
AM.2.QF... AM.5.SH...
AD.3.M... CH. IV PAGE 5 CH. IV PAGE 30
CH. I PAGE 17
AM.2.UD... AM.5.UD...
AD.3.O... CH. IV PAGE 2 CH. IV PAGE 22
CH. I PAGE 16
AM.2.UP... AM.5.UP...
AD.3.P... CH. IV PAGE 3 CH. IV PAGE 23
CH. I PAGE 16
AM.2.VM... AM.5.VI...
AD.3.RI... CH. IV PAGE 4 CH. IV PAGE 24
CH. I PAGE 43
AM.3.ABU... AM.5.VM...
AD.3.V... CH. III PAGE 4 CH. IV PAGE 24
CH. I PAGE 13
AM.3.CP... AM.5.VR...
AD.3.XD... CH. IV PAGE 11 CH. IV PAGE 27
CH. I PAGE 24
AM.3.H... AM.5.VS...
AD.3.XS... CH. VIII PAGE 16 CH. IV PAGE 29
CH. I PAGE 24
AM.3.QF... AM.7.QF...
AD.5.D... CH. IV PAGE 17 CH. IV PAGE 37
CH. I PAGE 33
AM.3.RD... AM.7.UP...
AD.5.E... CH. IV PAGE 12 CH. IV PAGE 36
CH. I PAGE 31
AM.3.RGT... AM.66...
AD.5.E...J* CH. IV PAGE 20 CH. IV PAGE 18
CH. I PAGE 32
AM.3.SD... AM.88...
AD.5.E...Q5 CH. IV PAGE 12 CH. IV PAGE 32
CH. I PAGE 32
AM.3.SH... B
AD.5.I... CH. IV PAGE 16 BA.130.. / BA.10...
CH. I PAGE 42
AM.3.UD...
CH. X PAGE 2
AD.5.L... CH. IV PAGE 7 BC.06.25/27...
CH. I PAGE 34
AM.3.UP...
CH. VII PAGE 14
AD.5.O... CH. IV PAGE 8 BC.06.30/32...
CH. I PAGE 33 CH. VII PAGE 15
File: 00TA_E Index • II 13/2010/e

BC.06.40... BC.5.41/*... BS.3.10/11...
CH. VII PAGE 15 CH. VII PAGE 25 CH. VII PAGE 8

BC.06.41/*... BC.5.50... BS.3.12/13...

BC.06.XPQ3... BC.5.51... BS.3.14/15...

BC.06.XQ3... BM.2... BS.3.16/17...

BC.10.06... BM.2.50... BS.3.2...

BC.2.50.AB... BM.2.60... BS.3.20/21...

BC.2.50.PT... BM.2.70... BS.3.W...

BC.2.51... BM.3... BS.5.**...

BC.3.07... BM.3.50... BS.5.12...

BC.3.08... BM.3.52... BS.5.13...

BC.3.09... BM.3.60... BS.5.14...

BC.3.107... BM.3.70... BS.5.15...

BC.3.25/27... BM.3.72... BS.5.16...

BC.3.30/32... BM.5... BS.5.17...

BC.3.40... BM.5.50... BS.5.29...

BC.3.41/*... BM.5.60... BS.5.3...

BC.3.50... BM.5.70... BS.5.30/31...

BC.3.51... BM.5.80... BS.5.RGA...
CH. VII PAGE 12 CH. VII PAGE 29 CH. X PAGE 5

BC.5.07... BS.2.**... BS.5.RIA...
CH. VII PAGE 27 CH. VII PAGE 2 CH. X PAGE 5

BC.5.107... BS.2.12... BS.VMP.10...

BC.5.30/32... BS.2.14... BS.VMP.16...
CH. VII PAGE 26 CH. VII PAGE 2 CH. II PAGE 11

BC.5.36/28... BS.2.16... BS.VMP.20...

BC.5.3A... BS.2.20... BS.VMP.25...

BC.5.40... BS.3.**... BS.VMP.25/1...
File: 00TA_E Index • III 13/2010/e

BSC.5.69... CMP.16/25... / CMP.E.16/25... KEC.16.UE... / KEC.16.UN...
CH. X PAGE 4 CH. V PAGE 11 CH. V PAGE 10

BSH.5.13... CONNECTORS STANDARD KEC.25.CQ...
CH. I PAGE 51 CH. I PAGE 19 CH. V PAGE 6

CSP.16/25... KEC.25.ME...
BSH.5.17...
CH. V PAGE 11 CH. V PAGE 10
CH. I PAGE 51
CUP.16/25... / CUP.E.16/25... KEC.25.MP...
BSH.5.31...
CH. V PAGE 11
CH. I PAGE 51 CH. V PAGE 10
CX.3... KEC.25.PC...
BSH.7.12...
CH. XI PAGE 11 CH. V PAGE 7
CH. I PAGE 55
CXQ.3... KEC.25.RC...
BSH.7.13...
CH. XI PAGE 14 CH. V PAGE 7
CH. I PAGE 55
KEC.25.RI...
BSH.7.14... F
FE.3... FELS.3... / FU.3... CH. V PAGE 6
CH. I PAGE 55
KEC.25.SH...
BSH.7.15... CH. XI PAG. 23-24
FE02.3... / FE10.3... CH. V PAGE 8
CH. I PAGE 56 KEC.25.SL...
BSH.7.16... CH. XI PAG. 19, 20
FE10LS.3... CH. V PAGE 10
CH. I PAGE 56 KEC.25.SP...
BSH.7.17... CH. XI PAG. 21
FE10.P... CH. V PAGE 8
CH. I PAGE 56 KEC.25.UE...
BSH.8.13*... CH. XI PAG. 22
FI.3... CH. V PAGE 10
CH. I PAGE 60 KEC.25.UN...
BSH.8.13... CH. XI PAG. 10
CH. V PAGE 10
CH. I PAGE 60 J KEL...
BSH.8.15... JC.3.D...
CH. V PAGE 3
CH. I PAGE 60 CH. IX PAGE 27 KEL.16/25...
BSH.8.17... JC.5.D...
CH. V PAGE 5
CH. I PAGE 60 CH. IX PAGE 29 KRA.16/25...
JC.F.D...
CH. V PAGE 12
CH. IX PAGE 31
C
C*P... K L
CH. V PAGE 9 LVDT
CD.3.E... KEC.**.**..
CH. I PAGE 21
CH. XI PAGE 5
CH. V PAGE 3 LE VARIANT
CDC.3.E... KEC.**.M*/U*/SL...
CH. I PAGE 20
CH. V PAGE 9
CH. XI PAGE 2
CDL.04.6... KEC.16.CQ... CH. XI PAGE 9
CH. I PAGE 61
CH. V PAGE 6 M
CDL.06.6... KEC.16.ME... / KEC.16.MP...
P
CH. I PAGE 63
CH. V PAGE 10 PVR.3...
CDL.10.6 KEC.16.PC...
CH. II PAGE 2
CH. V PAGE 7 PVR.5...
CH. I PAGE 65
CEP.S... KEC.16.RC...
CH. II PAGE 4
CH. V PAGE 7 PVR.U.3...
CH. IX PAGE 2
CM02.3.P... KEC.16.RI...
CH. II PAGE 2
CH. V PAGE 6 PVR.U.5...
CH. XI PAGE 16
CM.3.M... KEC.16.SH... / KEC.16.SP...
CH. II PAGE 4
CH. V PAGE 8
CH. XI PAGE 17 PVS.3...
KEC.16.SL...
CH. II PAGE 2
CH. V PAGE 10
File: 00TA_E Index • IV 13/2010/e

XDC.3.A... / XDC.3.C...
PVS.5...
CH. VIII PAGE 8
CH. II PAGE 4 XDP.3.A... / XDP.3.C...
PVS.U.3...
CH. VIII PAGE 4
CH. II PAGE 2 XDP.5.A... / XDP.5.C...
PVS.U.5...
CH. VIII PAGE 6
CH. II PAGE 4 XECV.3...
Q CH. VIII PAGE 10
XEPV.3...
QC.3.2...
CH. VIII PAGE 13
CH. III PAGE 2 XP.3...
QC.3.3...
CH. VIII PAGE 24
CH. III PAGE 3 XQ.3...
CH. VIII PAGE 18

R XQP.3...
REM.D.RA... CH. VIII PAGE 20
XQP.5...
CH. IX PAGE 4
REM.S.RA... CH. VIII PAGE 22
CH. IX PAGE 7
SE.3.AN21...
CH. IX PAGE 11
SE.3.AN21RS...
CH. IX PAGE 13
SE3.LN3...04
CH. IX PAGE 15
SE.MNC...
CH. IX PAGE 19
STUDS - MODULAR VALVES
CETOP 2 CH. IV PAGE 6

SVP...
CH. IX PAGE 23
V.M.L / V.S.L / V.U.L...
CH. II PAGE 6
V.M.P / V.S.P / V.U.P...
CH. II PAGE 6
XD.3.A... / XD.3.C...
CH. VIII PAGE 2
File: 00TA_E Index • V 13/2010/e

DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
TECHNICAL
CATALOGUE
1 ABBREVIATIONS
AP HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION
AS PHASE LAG (DEGREES)
BP LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
CH INTERNAL ACROSS FLATS
DA AMPLITUDE DECAY (DB)
DP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (BAR)
F FORCE (N)
I% INPUT CURRENT (A)
M MANOMETER CONNECTION
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR)
PARBAK PARBAK RING
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION
PR REDUCED PRESSURE (BAR)
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
QP PUMP FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
SR SERIES CONNECTION
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE
Incorrect use of the products described in this
catalogue may cause harm to personnel and
equipment. The technical information given
for each product in this catalogue may be
subject to variation, and the manufacturer
reserves the right to make constructional
modifications without giving prior notice. Each
product presented, its data, features and
technical specifications must therefore be
examined and checked by members of the
user's staff (possessing suitable technical
knowledge) taking into consideration the
intended use of product.
The user must, in particular, assess the

operating conditions of each product in relation
to the application that he intends to use it for,
analysing the data, features and technical
specifications in view of the proposed
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the
product, all of the conditions relating to the
safety of personnel and equipment, also in the
event of breakdown, are respected.

File: 01TA_E
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
"D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 18
CETOP 2/NG04 "K12" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 18
AUTOMATIC RECIPROCATING
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 VALVES
"LE" VARIANTS FOR ADC3/AD3
L.V.D.T.
CH. I PAGE 20
CH. I PAGE 21 1
ATEX 94/9/CE
DIRECTIVE
AD.3.I... CH. I PAGE 41

CETOP 2/NG04 AD.5.I... CH. I PAGE 42
CH. I PAGE 2 AD.3.RI... CH. I PAGE 43
AD.2.E... AD.5.RI... CH. I PAGE 44
CH. I PAGE 4
"A09" DC COILS
CH. I PAGE 4
PILOTED VALVES
AND SUBPLATE MOUNTING
ATEX 94/9/CE DIRECTIVE
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 22
AD.3.X*...
CH. I PAGE 24
CETOP 5/NG10
ADPH.5...
CH. I PAGE 45
ADH.5...
CH. I PAGE 48
ADC.3... BSH.5... CH. I PAGE 51
CH. I PAGE 5 ADH.7...
"A09" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 52
CETOP 5/NG10
CH. I PAGE 7 BSH.7... CH. I PAGE 55
CAP. I PAG.28
ADH.8...
AD.5.E...
CETOP 3 CAP. I PAG.31
CH. I PAGE 57
BSH.8... CH. I PAGE 60
AD.5.E...J* AND AD.5.E...Q5
CH. I PAGE 32
AD.5.O... AND AD.5.D...
CH. I PAGE 33
FLOW DIVERSION VALVES
AD.5.L...
CH. I PAGE 34
"K16" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 35
CETOP 3/NG06 CETOP 5/NG10

CH. I PAGE 8 High performances
AD.3.E...
CH. I PAGE 11
AD.3.E...J* CDL.04.6... "OEM MACHINERY"
CH. I PAGE 12 CH. I PAGE 61
AD.3.V... CDL.06.6... "OEM MACHINERY"
CH. I PAGE 13 CH. I PAGE 63
AD.3.L... ADL.06.6... "OEM MACHINERY"
CAP. I PAG.14 CH. I PAGE 64
CETOP 3/NG06 OTHER OPERATORS ADP.5.E... CDL.10.6... "OEM MACHINERY"
CH. I PAGE 15 CH. I PAGE 36 CH. I PAGE 65
AD.3.P... AND AD.3.O... "D19" DC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 38 ADL.10.6... "OEM MACHINERY"
CH. I PAGE 16 ADP.5.V... CH. I PAGE 66
AD.3.M... AND AD.3.D... CH. I PAGE 39 "A09" AND "D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 67
CH. I PAGE 17 "D19" DC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 40 "40W" AND "A16" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 68
File: 01TA_E I• 1 09/2000/e

DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES CETOP 2/NG4
The ARON directional control valves NG4 are designed for subplate mounting with an
interface in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 02 - 01 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP R 35 H
4.2-4-02), and are the smallest on the market in their category whilst still featuring excellent
1 performance.
The use of solenoids with wet armatures ensures quiet operation, means that dynamic seals
are no longer required and important levels of counter-pressure are accepted on the return
line. The solenoid's tube is screwed at valve body directly, while a locking ring nut seal the coil
in right position.
The cast body with a great care in the design and production of the ducts of the 5 chambers
CETOP 2/NG04 have made it possible to improve the spools allowing relatively high flow rate with low pressure
AD.2.E... CH. I PAGE 4 drops (Δp).
"A09" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 4 The spool rest positions are obtained by means of springs which centre it when there is no
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 electrical impulse. The solenoids are constructed to DIN 40050 standards and are supplied
by means of DIN 43650 ISO 4400 standard connectors which, suitably assembled, ensure a
protection class of IP 65.
The solenoid coils are normally arranged for DIN 43650 ISO 4400 type connectors (standard
version). On request, could be available the following coil connection variants: AMP Junior
connections; flying leads connections, with or without integrated diode; Deutsch connections
with bidirectional integrated diode.
The supply may be in either DC or AC form (with the use of a connector and rectifier) in most
common voltage.
The valves are designed for use with DIN 51524 standard hydraulic mineral oils and it is
recommended that filters should be fitted to ensure a maximum contamination level of class
10 in accordance with NAS 1638, ß25≥75..
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2 Spool Connections
20
18 3 type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
16 01 4 4 6 6
14 4 02 6 6 7 7 5
12 5 03 4 4 7 7
Δp (bar)
10
04 1 1 2 2 3
6
8
05 6 6 4 4
7 66 5 5 5 7
6
06 5 5 7 5
4
15 4 4 4 4
2
16 5 5 6 6
0 20* 5 5 6 6
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Curve No.
Q (l/min)
* = with energized spool
The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop curves for spools during normal usage.
The fluid used is a mineral based oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C; the tests have been
carried out at a fluid temperature of 40°C. For higher flow rates than those in the diagram the
losses will be those expressed by the following formula:
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a specific flow rate Q which can be obtained from
the diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses for the flow rate Q1 that is used.
ORDERING CODE
AD Directional valve
2 CETOP 2/NG4
E Electrical operator
** Spool (tables next page)
* Mounting (table 1 next page)
* Voltage (table 2 next page)
** Variants (table 3 next page)
3 Serial No.
File: AD2E003_E I• 2 15/2010/e

TAB. 1 MOUNTING TAB.3 - VARIANTS STANDARD SPOOLS

VARIANT CODE TWO SOLENOIDS, SPRINGCENTRED "C" MOUNTING
1
STANDARD
C No variant 00 Spool Covering Transient position

Viton V1 Type
Pilot light X1
D Rectifier R1
01 +
Emergency button E1
02 -
E Rotary emergency button P1 (*)
Solenoid valve without connectors S1
03 +
F Cable gland "PG 11" C1
Viton + Pilot light VX
04* -
SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING) Viton + Rectifier VR
Pilot light + Rectifier XR
G 05 +
AMP Junior connection AJ
Solenoid with flying leads (250 mm) FL
66 +
H Solenoid with flying leads (130 mm)
and integrated diode LD
Deutsch connection with bidir. diode CX 06 +
I Coil 8W (only 24V) 8W
L Other variants relate to a special design ONE SOLENOID, SIDE A "E" MOUNTING
Spool Covering Transient position
M (*) P1 Emergency tightening torque max. Type
6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22
01 +
• Mounting type D is only for 02 -

TAB.2 - A09 (27 W) COIL solenoid valves with detent
• In case of mounting D with 03 +
DC VOLTAGE
L 12V detent, the supply to solenoid must
115Vac/50Hz be longer than 100 ms. 04* -
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
N 48V* with rectifier 05 +
P 110V* • The AMP Junior coil and with the
230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz flying leads (with or without diode) 66 +
X 205V* with rectifier coils are available in 12V or 24V
W Without DC coils DC voltage only. 06 +
Voltage codes are not stamped on the
• The Deutsch coil with
plate, their are readable on the coils. 15 -
bidirectional diode is available in
* Special voltage 12V DC voltage only.
16 +
LIMITS OF USE (MOUNTING C-E-F)

ONE SOLENOID, SIDE B "F" MOUNTING
Spool Spool Covering Transient position
Curves No
Type Type
01 1
02 3 01 +
03 1
04 4 02 -
05 1
66 1 03 +
06 1
15 1(7*) 04* -
16 2(6*)
20 5 05 +
(6*) = 16 spool used as 2 or 3 way, 66 +

follow the curve n°4
(7*) = with 8W coil 06 +
The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature and a voltage
10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature of 40°C. The fluid used was a 15 -
mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 C°. The values in the diagram refers to
tests carried out with the oil flow in two directions simultaneously (e.g. from P to A and 16 +
at the same time B to T). In case of valve 4/2 or 4/3 used with flow in one direction
only, the limits of use could have variations which may even be negative.
Medium switching times Energizing: 20 ms TWO SOLENOIDS "D" MOUNTING
De-energizing: 40 ms Spool Covering Transient position
Tests have been carried out by spool normally closed with flow of 10 l/min at 125 bar Type
and a 100% supply, warm standard coil and without any electronic components. These
values are indicative and depend on the following parameters: the hydraulic circuit, the 20* +
fluid used and the variation of pressure, flow and temperature.
NOTE: Limits of use are available for C, E, F mounting. * SPOOLS WITH PRICE INCREASING
File: AD2E003_E I• 3 15/2010/e

AD.2.E... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL SOLENOID OPERATED VALVES CETOP 2/NG4
Max. pressure ports P/A/B 250 bar
Max pressure port T (dynamic) 250 bar
Max flow 20 l/min
1 Max excitation frequency

Duty cycle
Fluid viscosity
3 Hz
100% ED
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
Max contamination level class 10 in accordance with
NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight with one DC solenoid 0,88 Kg
Weight with two DC solenoids 1,1 Kg
E = Manual override
Screws with material specifications

min. 8.8 recommended - UNI 5931
Tightening torque of screws
M5x35 = 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm.
Support plane
specifications
DC COILS A09
Type of protection • The AMP Junior coil and with the
(in relation to connector used) IP 65 flying leads (with or without diode)
Number of cycle 18.000/h coils are available in 12V or 24V
Supply tolerance ±10% DC voltage only.
Duty cycle 100% ED • The Deutsch coil with
Insulation class wire H bidirectional diode is available in
Weight 0,215 Kg 12V DC voltage only.
VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C

AMP JUNIOR (AJ) (V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±7%
12V 123°C 27 5.3
24V 123°C 27 21.3
48V* 123°C 27 85.3
102V* 123°C 27 392
110V* 123°C 27 448
205V* 123°C 27 1577
* Special voltages ETA09/AD2-CDL04-C3V - 04/2001/e
DEUTSCH COIL WITH FLYING LEADS (FL) E1 MANUAL P1(*) ROTARY

BIDIR. DIODE (CX) LEADS WITH DIODO (LD) EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
DT04 - 2P
(*) P1 Emergency tightening torque max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22
File: AD2E003_E I• 4 15/2010/e

ADC.3... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES CETOP 3
SOLENOID OPERATED WITH REDUCED OVERALL SIZE
The ARON NG6 directional control valves are designed for subplate mounting with an
4.2-4-03).
The use of solenoids with wet armatures allows an extremely safe construction completely
dispensing with the need for dynamic seal. The solenoid tube is screwed directly onto the valve
casting whilst the coil is kept in position by a ring nut.
1
The operation of the directional valve is electrical. The centring is achieved by means of
ADC.3.E... calibrated length springs which, once the impulse is over, immediately reposition the spool in
the neutral position. To improve the valve performance, different springs are used for each
"A09" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 7 spool.
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19
The solenoids, constructed with a protection class of IP65 in accordance with BS 5490
standards, are available in direct current form and different voltage. The electrical controls are
equipped with an emergency manual control inserted in the tube.
The ADC.3 valve uses shorter solenoids than the standard AD.3.E to reduce the overall
dimensions.
The solenoid coils are normally arranged for DIN 43650 ISO 4400 type connectors (standard
version). On request, could be available the following coil connection variants: AMP Junior
connections; flying leads connections, with or without integrated diode; Deutsch connections
with bidirectional integrated diode.
The recommended fluids are hydraulic mineral based oils in accordance with DIN 51524 and
it is recommended that filters should be fitted to ensure a maximum contamination level of
class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638, ß25≥75.
Max. pressure ports P/A/B/T 250 bar

Max flow 30 l/min
Max excitation frequency 3 Hz
Duty cycle 100% ED
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Max contamination level class 10 in accordance
with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight with one DC solenoid 1,25 Kg
Weight with two DC solenoids 1,5 Kg
PRESSURE DROPS
1
2
3
Spool Connections
4
type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
Δp (bar)
5
01 4 4 4 4
6
02 6 6 6 6 6
03 4 4 6 6
04 3 3 2 2 5
15E-16E 6 3 1 5
15F-16F 3 6 5 1
Q (l/min) Curve No.
The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop curves for spools during normal usage.
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 C°; the tests have been carried
out at a fluid temperature of 40 C°. For higher flow rates than those in the diagram, the losses
will be those expressed by the following formula:
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
File: ADC3001_E I• 5 14/2010/e

ADC.3... SOLENOID OPERATED WITH REDUCED OVERALL SIZE CETOP 3/NG6
ORDERING CODE TAB.1 - MOUNTING STANDARD SPOOL * SPOOLS WITH PRICE INCREASING
STANDARD TWO SOLENOIDS, SPRING CENTRED "C" MOUNTING

1 ADC
3
Directional valve
CETOP 3/NG6
C Spool
type
Covering Transient position
E 01 +
F 02 -
** Spool (tables at the side)
SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING) 03 +
* Mounting (table 1) G 04* -
* Voltage (table 2) H
ONE SOLENOID, SIDE A "E" MOUNTING
** Variants (table 3) Spool Covering Transient position
type
1 Serial No.
01 +
02 -
TAB.2 - A09 (27 W) COIL
03 +
DC VOLTAGE
L 12V 04* -
115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
N 48V* with rectifier 15 -
P 110V*
230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz 16 +
X 205V* with rectifier
W Without DC coils
plate, their are readable on the coils. Spool Covering Transient position
type
* Special voltage
01 +
TAB.3 - VARIANTS 02 -
No variant 00
03 +
Viton V1
Pilot light X1
04* -
Rectifier R1
15 -
Cable gland"PG 11" C1
16 +
Viton + Rectifier VR
Emergency button E1
Rotary emergency button P1 (*)
Rotary emergency button (180°) P5 (*)
Variant with lever for emergency button LE • The AMP Junior coil and with the
AMP Junior connection AJ flying leads (with or without diode)
Coil with flying leads (250 mm) FL coils are available in 12V or 24V DC
Coil with flying leads (130 mm) with diode LD voltage only.
Deutsch connection with bidirectional diode CX • The Deutsch coil with bidirectional
Other variants relate to a special design diode is available in 12V DC voltage only.
(*) P1 and P5 Emergency tightening torque max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22

1 The tests have been carried out with solenoids operating
Spool n° temperature and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a
type curve fluid temperature of 50 C°. The fluid used was a mineral oil with
2 a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 degrees C. The values in the
01 2
diagram refer to tests carried out with the oil flow in two
02 1
directions simultaneously (e.g. from P to A and at the same
P (bar)
03 3
3 time B to T).
04 3
4 15-16 1(4*) In the cases where valves 4/2 and 4/3 are used with the flow
in one direction only, the limits of use could have variations
(4*) = 15 and 16 spools which may even be negative (See curve No 4 and Spool No
used as 2 or 3 way, follow 15-16). The tests were carried out with a counter-pressure
the curve n°4 of 2 bar at T port.
Q (l/min)
File: ADC3001_E I• 6 14/2010/e

ADC.3... SOLENOID OPERATED WITH REDUCED OVERALL SIZE CETOP 3/NG6
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override
Support plane
specifications
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x30
with material specifications min. 8.8
Tightening torque 5 ÷ 6 Nm / 0.5 ÷ 0.6 Kgm
A09 DC COILS
VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C AMP JUNIOR DEUTSCH COIL +
(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±7% (AJ) BIDIR. DIODE (CX)
DT04 - 2P
12V 123°C 27 5.3
24V 123°C 27 21.3
48V* 123°C 27 85.3
102V* 123°C 27 392
110V* 123°C 27 448
205V* 123°C 27 1577
* SPECIAL VOLTAGES
ETA09 - 04/2001/e
E1 MANUAL P1(*) ROTARY P5(*) ROTARY FLYING LEADS (FL)

EMERGENCY EMERGENCYE EMERGENCY 180° LEADS + DIODE (LD)
File: ADC3001_E I• 7 14/2010/e

INTRODUCTION
1 interface in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP R 35 H

4.2-4-03), and can be used in all fields on account of their high flow rate and pressure
capacities combined with compact overall dimensions.
The use of solenoids with wet armatures allows a very practical, safe construction completely
dispensing with dynamic seals; the solenoid tube is screwed directly onto the valve chest
CETOP 3/NG06
whilst the coil is kept in position by means of a lock nut.
STANDARD SPOOLS CH. I PAGE 10
The special, precise construction of the ports and the improvement of the spools enables
AD.3.E... CH. I PAGE 11
relatively high flow rates to be accommodated with a minimal pressure drop (Δp).
AD.3.E...J* CH. I PAGE 12 The operation of the directional valves may be electrical, pneumatic, oleodynamic, mechani-
AD.3.V... CH. I PAGE 13 cal or lever.
AD.3.L... CH. I PAGE 14 The centre position is obtained by means of calibrated length springs which reposition the
OTHER OPERATOR CH. I PAGE 15 spool in the centre or end of travel position once the action of the impulse is over.
AD.3.P... CH. I PAGE 16 The solenoids are constructed with a protection class of IP66 to DIN 40050 standards and are
AD.3.O... CH. I PAGE 16 available in either AC or DC form in different voltage and frequencies.
AD.3.M... CH. I PAGE 17 The new type DC coil "D15", of cause their high performance, allows to increasing the limits
of use respect to last series.
AD.3.D... CH. I PAGE 17
All types of electrical control are available, on request, with different types of manual
"D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 18 emergency controls.
"B14" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 18
The solenoid coils are normally arranged for DIN 43650 ISO 4400 type connectors; is available
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 on request these variant coils: with AMP Junior connections, with AMP junior and integrated
"LE" VARIANTS CH. I PAGE 20 diode, with Deutsch DT04-2P connections or solenoid with flying leads. Connectors with built
L.V.D.T. CH. I PAGE 21 in rectifiers or pilot lights are also available.
10 in accordance with NAS 1638, ß25≥75.
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2 The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop
3 curves for spools during normal usage. The fluid
used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s
4
at 40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid
5 temperature of 40°C. For higher flow rates than
those in the diagram, the losses will be those
Δp (bar)
6
expressed by the following formula:
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a
specific flow rate Q which can be obtained from
the diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses for
the flow rate Q1 that is used.
Q (l/min)
Spool Connections Spool Connections

type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
01 5 5 5 5 11 4 6
02 6 6 6 6 5 22 4 6
03 5 5 6 6 12 5 6
04 1 1 1 1 4 13 5 6 6
44 1 1 1 1 2 14 2 1 1 1 2
05 5 5 5 5 28 1 2 1 1 2
06 5 5 6 5 19 4 4 6 6
66 5 5 5 6 16 5 5 4 4
07 4 6 17 - 21 1 3
08 6 6 18 5 5
09 5 5 20 4 4 4 4
10 5 5 5 5 15 4 4 5 5
Curve No. Curve No.
File: AD3E$$3_E I• 8 15/2010/e

ORDERING CODE TAB.2 - VOLTAGE TAB.1-MOUNTING

STANDARD
AC SOLENOID B14
AD
3
Directional valve
CETOP 3/NG6
A
B
24V/50-60 Hz
48V/50-60 Hz
C 1
J 115V/50Hz - 120V/60Hz D
Y 230V/50Hz - 240V/60Hz
E Type of operator K AC without coils
For other operator see Other voltages available on request. E
next pages
DC COIL D15 (30W) F
L 12V
** Spool see page I•10 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING)
V 28V* with rectifier
* Mounting type (table 1) N 48V* G
Z 102V* 230Vac/50Hz
* Voltage (table 2) P 110V* 240Vac/60Hz
H
** Variants (table 3) W DC without coils

Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate, their are I
readable on the coils.
(*) Special voltage L

* Serial No.
3 = DC voltage ("D15" coil) • AMP Junior coils (with or without diode)
M
3 = AC voltage ("B14" solenoid) and coils with flying leads and coils type
Deutsch, are available in 12V or 24V DC
voltage only. • Mounting type D is only for
valves with detent
• The pastic type coil (BR variant) is avail-
able in 12V, 24V, 28V or 110V DC voltage • In case of mounting D with detent
only. a maximum supply time of 2 sec is
needed (only for AC coils).
TAB.3 - VARIANTS
VARIANT CODE ♦ PAGE
No variant 00
Viton V1
Emergency control lever for directional control valves type ADC3 and AD3E LE I•20
Emergency button E1 I•18
Rotary emergency button P1 I•18
Rotary emergency button (180°) P5 I•18
Pilot light X1 I•19
Rectifier R1 I•19
Preset for microswitch (E/F/G/H mounting only) (see below note ◊) M1 ♦ I•11- I•14
Marine version (AD.3.P..) H1 ♦
Cable gland "PG 11" C1 I•19
Emergency button+ Viton EV
Emergency button+ Pilot light EX
Emergency button+ Viton + Pilot light A1
Emergency button+ Rectifier ER
Viton + Rectifier + Emergency button A2
Pilot light + Rectifier XR I•19
Pilot light + Rectifier + Emergency button A3
Pilot light + Rectifier + Emergency button+ Viton A4
Preset for microswitch + Viton MV ♦
5 micron clearance Q1 ♦
Spool movement speed control (only VDC) with ø 0.3 mm orifice J3 ♦ I•12
AMP Junior coil - for12V or 24V DC voltage only AJ I•18
AMP Junior coil and integrated diode - for12V or 24V DC voltage only AD I•18
Coil with flying leads (175 mm) - for12V or 24V DC voltage only SL I•18
D15 plastic type coil - for12V, 24V, 28V or 110V DC voltage only BR
Deutsch DT04-2P coil - for12V or 24V DC voltage only CZ I•18
IP67 type of connector CN I•19
Other variants relate to a special design
◊ = Maximum counter-pressure on T port: 8 bar
♦ = Variant codes stamped on the plate
File: AD3E$$3_E I• 9 16/2010/e

TWO SOLENOIDS, SPRING CENTRED "C" MOUNTING DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
Spool
type
STANDARD SPOOLS CETOP 3/NG6
01 +
NOTE
02 - (*) Spool with price increasing
1 03 + • With spools 15 / 16 / 17 only mounting E / F are possible

• 16 / 19 / 20 / 21 spool not planned for AD3E variant J*
04* -
• For lever operated the spools used are different.
44* - Available spools for this kind of valve are: 01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 66 / 07
22 / 13 / 15 / 16 / 17
05 +
66 + ONE SOLENOID, SIDE B "F" MOUNTING

06 + type
07* + 01 +
08* + 02 -
09* + 03 +
10* + 04* -
22* + 44* -
11* + 05 +
12* + 66 +
13* + 06 +
14* - 08* +
28* - 09* +
10* +
22* +
Spool Covering Transient position 12* +
type
13* +
01 +
07* +
02 -
15 -
03 +
16 +
04* -
17 +
44* -
14* -
05 +
28* -
66 +
06 +
08* +
TWO SOLENOIDS "D" MOUNTING
10* + Spool Covering Transient position
type
12* +
19* -
15 -
20* +
16 +
21* +
17 +
14* -
28* -
File: TCRS003_E I • 10 05/2000/e

AD.3.E... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES SOLENOID OPERATED CETOP 3/NG6
Max. pressure port P/A/B 350 bar CALIBRATED
Max. pressure port T (for DC) see note (*) 250 bar DIAPHRAGMS (**)
Max. pressure port T (for AC) see note (*) 160 bar
Max. flow
Max. excitation frequency
Duty cycle
60 l/min
3 Hz
100% ED
ø (mm)
blind
0.5
Code
M52.05.0023/4
M52.05.0023/1
1
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s 0.6 M52.05.0023/6
Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C 0.7 M52.05.0023/8
Ambient temperature - 25°C ÷ 60°C 0.8 M52.05.0023
A max. counter-pressure of 8 bar at T is permit- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance 1.0 M52.05.0023/2
ted for the variant with a microswitch (M1). with NAS 1638 with filter ß25 ≥75 1.2 M52.05.0023/3
Weight with one DC solenoid 1,65 Kg 1.5 M52.05.0023/7
(*) DC: Dynamic pressure allowed for Weight with two DC solenoids 2 Kg 2.0 M52.05.0023/10
2 millions of cycles. Weight with one AC solenoid 1,31 Kg 2.2 M52.05.0023/9
AC: Dynamic pressure allowed for Weight with two AC solenoids 1,72 Kg 2.5 M52.05.0023/5
350.000 of cycles. For dynamic pressure of
100 bar are allowed 1 milion cycles.
(**) For high differential pressure please
OVERALL DIMENSIONS contact our technical department.
E = Manual override
M1 = Microswitch
Calibrated diaphragm

Support plane
specifications Tightening torque 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm

The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature
of 40°C. The fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The values in the diagram refers to tests carried out with the
oil flow in two directions simultaneously T = 2 bar (e.g.. from P to A and the same time B to T). In the case where valves 4/2 and 4/3 were used
with the flow in one direction only, the limits of use could have variations which may even be negative. Rest times: the values are indicative and
depend on following parameters: hydraulic circuit, fluid used and variations in hydraulic scales (pressure P, flow Q, temperature T).
Direct current: Energizing 30 ÷ 50 ms. Alternating current: Energizing 8 ÷ 30 ms.

De-energizing 10 ÷ 30 ms. De-energizing 15 ÷ 55 ms.
DIRECT CURRENT SOLENOIDS (DC) ALTERNATING CURRENT SOLENOIDS (AC)

1 Spool Solenoids
3 4 5 2 6
type DC AC 320
9
17 12 11
8 01 1 9 280 16
15
02 1 9 10
7 240
03 8 10 13
3 04 6 15 200
P (bar)
16
4 44 1 9 160 14
6 17
5
05 3 16 11
120
06 - 66 5 13 13
80 12
11 - 22 4 17
14 - 28 2 12 40
2-7 15 7 14
1
0
16 1 11 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Q (l/min) Curves
File: AD3E003_E I • 11 11/2010/e

AD.3.E...J* VALVES WITH SPOOL MOVEMENT SPEED CONTROL VARIANT J*
Valves type AD3.E... variant J* with spool movement speed control Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar
Max. pressure port T (*) 250 bar
These ON-OFF type valves are used a lower spool movement speed Max. flow 30 l/min
1 than usual for conventional solenoid valves is required to prevent

impacts which could adversely affect the smooth running of the
system. The system consist of reducing the transfer section for the fluid
Duty cycle
Fluid viscosity
2 Hz
100% ED
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
from one solenoid to the other by means of calibrated orifices. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
• This version can only be used with a direct current (DC) and also Weight with one DC solenoid 1,65 Kg
involves a reduction in the limits of use so that we suggest to Weight with two solenoids DC solenoids 2 Kg
always test the valve in your application
(*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of
• To order AD.3.J* version valves, specify the orifices code. cycles.
• The operation is linked to a minimum counter-pressure on T line

(1 bar min.) CALIBRATED
ORIFICES AVAILABLE
• The switching time referred to the spool travel detected by a LVDT
ø (mm) M4x4 Code
transducer can vary for the NG6 valve from a minimum of 100 to a
maximum of 300 ms depending on 5 fundamental variables: 0.3 M89.10.0028 J3
0.4 M89.10.0029 J4
1) Diameter of the calibrated orifices (see table) 0.5 M89.10.0006 J5
0.6 M89.10.0030 J6
2) Hydraulic power for clearance referring to flow and pressure values
through valve
3) Spool type
4) Oil viscosity and temperature
5) Counter-pressure at T line
• Possible mountings: C / E / F / G / H
• 16 / 19 / 20 / 21 spools not planned for AD3E variant J*
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override
Fixing screws UNI 5931M5x40 Support plane

specifications
Tightening torque 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm
File: AD3EJ$3_E I • 12 04/2000/e

AD.3.V... CETOP 3/NG6
WITH PROXIMITY SENSOR L.V.D.T.
The single solenoid directional Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 350 bar
valves type AD.3.V are used in ap- Max. operating pressure
plications where the monitoring of port T dynamic (see note*) 250 bar
the position of the spool inside the
valve is requested to manage the
machine safety cycles in according
Max. flow
Duty cycle
60 l/min
3 Hz
100% ED
1
with the accident prevention legisla- Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
AD.3.V... tion. These directional valves are Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
"D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 18 equipped with an horizontal posi- Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
tioned inductive sensor on the op- Type of protection
posite side of the solenoid, which is (in relation to connector used) IP 66
L.V.D.T. CH. I PAGE 21 capable of providing the first move- Weight 1,7 Kg
ment of the valve when the passage
of a minimum flow is allowed. Inte- (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles.
grated in safety systems, these
valves intercept actuator move- • Possible mountings: E / F / H
ments that could be dangerous for • The valve is supplied with DC solenoid only
the operators and for the machine.
Spool Connections
PRESSURE DROPS type
ORDERING CODE P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
1 2
3 01 5 5 5 5
AD Directional control valve 02 6 6 6 6 5
4
06 5 5 6 5
3 CETOP 3/NG6 5 16 5 5 4 4
17 1 3
Δp (bar)
6
V Directional valve with 66 5 5 5 6
32 1 1 2 2
single solenoid and
Curves No.
L.V.D.T. proximity sensor
The diagram at side shows the Δp curves for spool
*** Spool and mounting (table 1) in normal usage. The fluid used is a mineral oil with
a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C; the tests have been
* Voltage (table 2) carried out at a fluid temperature of 40°C.
Q (l/min)
** Variants (table 3)
TAB1 - STANDARD SPOOLS FOR AD3V
TAB.2 - VOLTAGE
2 Serial No. D15 COIL (30W) POSSIBLE MOUNTING: E / F / H
L 12V Spool Covering Transient position
type
M 24V 115Vac/50Hz
V 28V* 120Vac/60Hz 01E +
registered mark for industrial envi- N 48V* with rectifier
Z 102V* 230Vac/50Hz 01F +
ronment with reference to the electromag-
netic compatibility. European norms: P 110V* 240Vac/60Hz
02E -
with rectifier
- EN50082-2 general safety norm - in- R 205V*
W Without DC coils and connectors 06H* +
dustrial environment
- EN 50081-1 emission general norm - Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate, 16E +
their are readable on the coils.
residential environment
* Special voltage 17F +
66F +
32E +
(*) Spool with price increasing
TAB.3 - VARIANTS
No variant 00
(connectors as in the drawing)
Viton V1
Emergency button E1
Pilot light X1
Rectifier R1
Flow diversion without connector (coil) S1
E = Manual override Without proximity connector LVDT S3
Without coils and proximity connector S4
Cable gland "PG 11" C1
AMP Junior coil AJ
AMP Junior coil and integrated diode AD
Coil with flying leads (175mm) SL
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x30 Support plane Deutsch DT04-2P Coil type CZ
with material specifications min. 8.8 specifications
Tightening torque 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm Other variants relate to a special design
File: AD3V002_E I • 13 08/2000/e

AD.3.L... LEVER OPERATED CETOP 3/NG6
Max. pressure port T 160 bar
Max. flow 60 l/min
1 Lever angle
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
2 x 17°
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
-25°C ÷ 75°C
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with
Weight 1,2 Kg
AD.3.L... Weight M1 variant 1,8 Kg
STANDARD SPOOLS CH. I PAGE 10
ORDERING CODE TAB.1

SPOOLS TYPE
• For these valves spools
3 CETOP 3/NG6 are different from ones
used on the other direc-
tional valves
L Lever operation
• Available spools:
** Spool type (see table 1) 01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 66
07 / 22 / 13 / 15 / 16 / 17
Spool symbol see page I•10
* Mounting type (see table 2)

TAB.2
* Z = Valve with lever MOUNTING TYPE
X = Valve without lever
C
* Variants (see table 3)
4 Serial No.
E
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
TABLE 3 - VARIANTS TABLE

VARIANTS CODE (♦ )
No variant 00
Viton V1
M1 Preset for microswitch M1 (♦)

Available on request NATIONAL
AM1107 type microswitch
Preset for microswitch + Viton MV (♦ )
With detent (*)
(mechanical connection) D1 (♦ )
(Springs are different from
those for standard versions)
Preset for microswitch + Detent (*) MD (♦ )
Lever length 162 mm L1
M1 = microswitch Lever length 192 mm L2
♦ Variant codes stamped on the plate
(*) max. 150.000 cycles.
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x30 Support plane

specifications
File: AD3L004_E I • 14 06/2009/e

DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
OTHER OPERATOR CETOP 3/NG6
INTRODUCTION
interface in accordance with with UNI ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP
R 35 H 4.2-4-03), and can be used in all fields on account of their high flow rate and pressure
capacities combined with compact overall dimensions.
1
The use of solenoids with wet armatures allows a very practical, safe construction completely
dispensing with dynamic seals; the solenoid tube is screwed directly onto the valve chest
whilst the coil is kept in position by means of a lock nut.
The special, precise construction of the ports and the improvement of the spools enables
OTHER OPERATOR
relatively high flow rates to be accommodated with a minimal pressure drop (Δp).
STANDARD SPOOLS CH. I PAGE 10 The centre position is obtained by means of calibrated length springs which reposition the
AD.3.P... CH. I PAGE 16 spool in the centre or end of travel position once the action of the impulse is over.
AD.3.O... CH. I PAGE 16 The valves are designed for use with DIN 51524 standard hydraulic mineral oils and it is
AD.3.M... CH. I PAGE 17
AD.3.D... CH. I PAGE 17
ORDERING CODE TAB.1
MOUNTING
AD Directional valve STANDARD
3 CETOP 3/NG06 C
* Type of operator D
P = Pneumatic
O = Oleodynamic E
M = Mechanically
D = Direct mechanically F
(For other operator see
past pages) SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING)
G
** Spool (see page I•10)
H
* Mounting type (tab.1)
I
z No voltage
** Variants:
L
00 = no variant
V1 = Viton M
H1 = Marine version (for AD3P only)
DI(*) = Internal draining (for AD3O only) • In case of mounting D
with detent a maximum sup-
2 Serial No. ply time of 2 sec is needed
(only for AC coils).
(*) The DI variant is recommended in the environments characterised by

the presence of dust or any type of contamination.
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2 Spool Connections Spool Connections
3 type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
4
01 5 5 5 5 11 4 6
5 02 6 6 6 6 5 22 4 6
03 5 5 6 6 12 5 6
Δp (bar)
6
04 1 1 2 2 4 13 5 6 6
05 5 5 5 5 14 2 1 1 1 2
06 5 5 6 5 28 1 2 1 1 2
66 5 5 5 6 15 - 19 4 4 6 6
07 4 6 16 5 5 4 4
08 6 6 17 - 21 1 3
09 5 5 18 5 5
Q (l/min) 10 5 5 5 5 20 4 4 4 4
Curve No. Curve No.
The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop curves for spools during normal usage. The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of
46 mm2/s at 40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid temperature of 40°C. For higher flow rates than those in the diagram, the losses will
be those expressed by the following formula:
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a specific flow rate Q which can be obtained from the diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses
for the flow rate Q1 that is used.
File: AD3002_E I • 15 05/2001/e

AD.3.P... PNEUMATIC OPERATION TYPE VALVES CETOP 3/NG6
Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar • Possible mountings:
Max. pressure port T 160 bar C/D/E/F/G/H/I L/M
Max. flow 60 l/min
1 Minimum operating pressure

Maximum operating pressure
Fluid viscosity
2 + [0.027 x (pt*)] bar - see note
20 bar
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Ordering code see
page before
Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C (pt*) = pressure at port T

Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638
with filter ß25≥75
Weight single pilot 1,2 Kg
Weight twin pilot 1,8 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Support plane
specifications
IAD3P - 02/2000/e
AD.3.O... OLEODYNAMIC OPERATION TYPE VALVES CETOP 3/NG6

Max. pressure port T 160 bar C/D/E/F/G/H/I L/M
Max. flow 60 l/min
Minimum operating pressure 15 + [0.1 x (pt*)] bar - see note Ordering code see
Maximum operating pressure 250 bar page before
Fluid temperature 0°C ÷ 75°C
(pt*) = pressure at port T
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638
with filter ß25≥75
Weight single pilot 1,5 Kg
Weight twin pilot 2,3 Kg
The DI variant is recommended in the
environments characterised by the pres-
Further technical specifications (for DI variant only)
ence of dust or any type of contamination.
Minimum operating pressure [10 + (pt*)] bar - see note
Maximum operating pressure 250 bar
Max. piloting leakage 1 l/min
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override

Support plane
specifications
IAD3O - 03/2000/e
File: AD3P002_E I • 16 06/2000/e

AD.3.M... MECHANICALLY OPERATED TYPE VALVES CETOP 3/NG6
Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar •Possible mountings:
Max. pressure port T 160 bar E/F/G/H
Max. flow 60 l/min
1
• Ordering code see
Minimum operating force - see note (*) 2,5 Kg page before
Maximum operating force - see note (**) 13 Kg
Cam angle 27° • Note:
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s (*) In the absence of
Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C counter-pressure at
Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C port T
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75 (**) with a pressure
Weight 1 Kg of 160 bar at port T
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Stroke 12,4 mm
Working stroke 3 mm

Support plane
specifications
EAD3M - 02/2000/e
AD.3.D... DIRECT MECHANICALLY OPERATED TYPE VALVES CETOP 3/NG6

Max. pressure port T 20 bar E/F/G/H
Max. flow 60 l/min
Operating force - see note (*) 6 Kg
page before
Fluid temperature 0°C ÷ 75°C • Note:
(*) In absence of
counter-pressure at
port T
Weight 1,5 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Stroke 6 mm
Extra stroke 2 mm
Working stroke 3 mm

Support plane
specifications
EAD3D - 02/2000/e
File: AD3M002_E I • 17 04/2000/e

"D15" DC COILS FOR CETOP 3
Type of protection • AMP Junior coils (with or without
(in relation to the connector used) IP 66 diode) and coils with flying leads
Number of cycles 18.000/h and coils type Deutsch, are
1 Supply tolerance
Ambient temperature
Duty cycle
±10%
-54°C ÷ 60°C
100% ED
available in 12V or 24V DC voltage
only.
• The pastic type coil (BR variant)
Insulation class wire H is available in 12V, 24V, 28V or
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C PLASTIC COIL E1 MANUAL
(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±10% (BR) EMERGENCY
12V 110°C 30 4.8
24V 110°C 30 18.8
28V* 110°C 30 25.6
48V* 110°C 30 75.2
68,65
56,6
102V* 110°C 30 340
110V* 110°C 30 387
205V* 110°C 30 1375
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGES 57,9

ETD15 - 04/2001/e
FLYING LEADS AMP JUNIOR (AJ) DEUTSCH P1 ROTARY P5 ROTARY

(SL) AJ + DIODE (AD) (CZ) EMERGENCY EMERGENCY 180°
DT04 - 2P
"B14" AC SOLENOIDS FOR CETOP 3
MANUAL EMERGENCY (E1) ROTARY EMERGENCY (P1)

81,1
80,8
85,5 112
Type of protection (in relation to the connector used) IP 65

Number of cycles 18.000/h
Supply tolerance +10% / -10%
Duty cycle 100% ED
Insulation class wire H
Weight 0,436 Kg
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE AT 20°C

(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (OHM) ±10%
24V/50Hz - 24V/60Hz 100°C - 96°C 1.7

48V/50Hz - 48V/60Hz — —
115V/50Hz - 120V/60Hz 133°C - 101C° 32.5
230V/50Hz - 240V/60Hz 120°C - 103C° 134
File: TD15K12_E I • 18 09/2010/e

CONNECTORS DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIN 43650/ISO4400
CONNECTOR VOLTAGE ORDERING CODE CODE
*SPECIAL VOLTAGE (VARIANTS)
STANDARD (IP65)
Grey (side A)
Black (side B)
V86.05.0004
V86.05.0002
No variant 1
TYPE WITH
CABLE GLAND PG 11 C1
Grey (side A) V86.05.0008
Black (side B) V86.05.0006
LENS COVER WITH PILOT LIGHT X1

12 VAC/VDC V86.10.0018
(sides A and B) 24 VAC/VDC V86.10.0012
115 VAC/VDC V86.10.0020
230 VAC/VDC V86.10.0022
WITH RECTIFIER R1
Inlet voltage: 12÷220VAC
Rectified voltage: 9÷200VDC
LENS COVER WITH XR

PILOT LIGHT AND RECTIFIER
12 VAC V86.25.0018
24 VAC V86.25.0019
(sides A and B) 48 VAC* V86.25.0020
115 VAC* V86.25.0021
230 VAC* V86.25.0022
TYPE OF PROTECTION IP67 CN

• Screw tightening torque: 60Ncm.
• Note: the screw has to enter less than 4 mm into the threaded section of the coil.
• It is suggest the use of the CN connector type (IP67) with the variant BR coil, which made
in plastic material.
ELECTRICAL FEATURES OF CONNECTORS
ISO 4400 standard

Cable gland
CONNECTORS IP 65 (STANDARD)
connector type
PG09 AC rated voltage Max. 250 V
DC rated voltage Max. 300 V
Pin conctat rated flow 10A
Pin conctat max. flow 16A
Max. section cable 1,5 mm2
Ø sheath
6 ÷ 8 mm Ø Cable gland PG09 - M16x1,5 6 ÷ 8 mm
Type of protection IP65 EN60529
spacer cable
Seal gland Insulation class VDE 0110-1/89
Operating temperature -40°C ÷ 90 C°
Seal
CONNECTORS IP67 (CN VARIANT)
Exagonal AC rated voltage Max. 250 V
Screw thread key DC rated voltage Max. 300 V
PG9 19 mm.
Pin conctat rated flow 10A
Ø cable Pin conctat max. flow 16A
4 ÷ 7 mm
Max. section cable 1,5 mm2
Ø Cable gland PG09 - M16x1,5 4 ÷ 7 mm
Type of protection IP67 EN60529
Seal
Insulation class VDE 0110-1/89
Operating temperature -20°C ÷ 80 C°
The degrees of protection indicate is guaranteed only if the connectors were properly mounted with his original seals.
File: TCNT000_E I • 19 06/2010/e

"LE" VARIANT - EMERGENCY CONTROL LEVER FOR
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES (ADC/AD.3.E)
The emergency control lever for solenoid valves by Aron, represents a develop in terms
of safety and flexibility among applied hydraulic components.
Thanks to his flexibility, the component was designed to be inserted between the valve
1 body and the spool, providing total interchangeability between the different types of solenoid
body valves manufactured by Aron. It is compatible with the standard CETOP 3 and stackable
valves with threaded connections –G3/8" or 9/16-18UNF (SAE 6). The component is available
for both directional control and proportional valves (for the last type of control please consult
our Technical Department)
As an emergency lever applied to solenoid valves, the control can be used as a safety
device in conformity with the industry standards , also playing an useful role in the event of
power cuts. The control can be used in agricultural and mobile fields; the manual action can
be used to carry out periodic maintenance work on mobile components of the vehicle , in
perfectly safe working conditions.
Max operating pressure port T:

dynamic 160 bar
static 210 bar HYDRAULIC SIMBOL
Max operating pressure port P
for series connection configuration 160 bar
• MOUNTING TYPE: C / F / H
• SPOOLS TYPE: 01/02/03*/04/16/17/66
* The spool 03 is allowed only on AD3E. Not permitted with ADC3
MOUNTING COMPATIBILITY
CODE VALVE DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE
ADC.3... Directional control valve A09 27 W
AD.3.E... Directional control valve D15 30 W
OVERALL DIMENSION
ADC.3...
VERSION
AD.3.E..
VERSION
Support plane
specifications
File: TLEAD3E_E I • 20 05/2010/e

PROXIMITY SENSOR TYPE L.V.D.T.
Supply voltage 24 V ± 20%
Polarity reversal protection max 300 V
Switching point hysteresis ≤ 0,06 mm
Reproducibility
Max. output current
Protection against short circuit
± 0,02 mm
≤ 250 mA
yes
1
Operating temperature -25°C ÷ 85°C
Connection type connector
Protection according to DIN IP65
Max. pressure 315 bar
CE certificate according to 89/336/EEC EMC is provided. A screened cable is needed.

The LVDT position transducers allow to check exactly the very instant when the passage of
a minimum flow is allowed.
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM ON PIN 2 AND 4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS LVDT

With this connection, on the Pin 4 an output signal is active when no oil
A is crossing the valve (from P →B).
Hub
0 = Voltage Pin 2 and Pin 4 < 1,8 V

1 = Voltage Pin 2 and Pin 4 24 V ± 20%
OVERALL DIMENSION LVDT
A=3:1 Stroke
Switching point
With this connection, on the Pin 4 there is no output signal when oil is
B crossing the valve (from P → B).
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CONNECTOR
Switching point
Type of protection IP67

Ambient temperature -40°C ÷ 85°C NB:
connecting the output to Pin 4 or Pin 2 the type of contact, normally closed
Ordering code: V86400003 or open, can be chosen.
File: TLVDT000_E I • 21 01/2000/e

AD.3.X*... DIRECTIONAL CONTROLE CETOP 3
IN ACCORDANCE WITH 94/9/CE ATEX DIRECTIVE
ATEX
94/9/CE ATEX EC DIRECTIVE (EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE)
1 AD.3.XD...
INTRODUCTION
Since 30/06/2003 products introduced into the market (or started-up) inside the EU,
destined to be used in potentially explosive environments, must be in compliance with the 94/
9/EC Directive through special marking. The directive regarding ATEX products 94/9/EC is
therefore the regulation instrument that the European Union uses to obtain legislative
harmonisation between the States and guarantee free circulation of goods inside the
European Community itself.
The directive affirms that to eliminate obstacles from commerce it is necessary to
guarantee a high level of protection and, with this aim, define the essential requirements on
the subject of safety and health. The dispositions base themselves on the principle of the “new
approach” (NA), for which the essential safety requirements of products must be established
depending on the risk evaluation concurrent at the time of their use.
The 94/9/EC Directive is applied to the manufacture specifications of all those
products (electrical and not) destined to be used in potentially explosive environments
AD.3.XS.........
caused, by the dangers deriving from the presence of dust or gas, with the scope of reducing
the risk of use that could be derived.
AD.3.XD... / AD.3.XS...
ATEX DIRECTIVE CH. I PAGE 22 The term product refers to appliances, protection systems, devices, components and
ATEX CLASSIFICATION CH. I PAGE 23 relative combinations, as defined in 94/9/EC Directive.
SERIES AD.3.X*... CH. I PAGE 24 The term appliances intends machines, materials, fixed or mobile devices, control
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CH. I PAGE 24 elements, instruments detection and prevention systems. Alone or combined these are
destined for production, transport, deposit, measurement, adjustment and conversion of
ORDERING CODE CH. I PAGE 24 energy, and to the transformation of material and which, by way of the powerful triggering
TAB.1 ASSEMBLY CH. I PAGE 25 sources, risk causing an explosion. As a consequence, even intrinsically safe appliances
TAB. 2 VOLTAGES CH. I PAGE 25 re-enter within the field of application of the directive.
TAB.3 SPOOL CH. I PAGE 25
LIMITS OF USE CH. I PAGE 25 Ther combination of two or more appliance parts, as well as any other components,
IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE CH. I PAGE 26 makes up a whole unit that can be considered a product and therefore re-enters within the
field of application of the 94/9/EC Directive. If the whole unit requires adequate installation
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CH. I PAGE 26 (therefore it is not immediately ready for use) the attached instructions should guarantee
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. I PAGE 27 maintenance of compliance to the 94/9/EC Directive on installation, without further evaluations
of conformity. The installer must follow the instructions correctly.
When a combination of appliances leads to a plant this may not re-enter within the field
of application of the directive. Each part must be certified and in compliance with the directive
(as well as being subject to the relative evaluation of conformity, EC marking, etc.).
The plant manufacturer must therefore presume the conformity of the various
components (each supplied with conformity certificate released by the respective manufacturer)
and limit their evaluation only to any additional risks that become important in the final
combination. Nevertheless, if the plant manufacturer inserts parts without EC marking or
components not supplied with the certificate it will be obligatory to carry out further conformity
evaluation of the whole unit.
The 94/9/EC Directive envisions obligations of the person who introduces products
into the market and/or starts them up, whether they are manufacturer’s, his agent’s, importer’s
or any other responsible person. The dispositions and obligations envisioned by the directive
for introduction into the market have been applied, since 30 June 2003, to every individual
product, independently from the date and place of manufacture. It is the manufacturers
responsibility to guarantee conformity of all products, where these re-enter within the field of
application of the directive.
The directive does not govern the use of the appliances; rather it establishes that the
products can only be used if in compliance with safety requirements at the time of their
introduction into the market or of their start-up. “Start-up” means the first use of the products
subject of the 94/9/EC Directive on EU territory by a final user. Nevertheless, a product that
is immediately ready for use and does not need assembly or installation, and whose
distribution conditions (deposit, transport, etc.) are not important for performance, is
considered started-up at the time of introduction into the market.
Among the main potential causes/sources of triggering an explosion, such as sparks, flames, electric arcs etc.., maximum surface
temperature also plays an important role. The dispositions of the directive establish evaluation criteria for the maximum temperature admissible
depending on the type of explosive atmosphere in which the appliance must operate.
For environments characterised by the presence of gas-air, some temperature values are supplied to which the appliances must refer.
They are indicated by the letter T followed by a number. The criterion to apply is that for which the temperature of the appliance must never
exceed 80% of the value indicated for its own category.
For environments characterised by the presence of dust-air, to prevent setting on fire of the airborne dust, the surface temperature
of the appliances must be decidedly lower than the predictable temperature of catching fire of the air+dust mixture. Therefore, during planning
the maximum working surface temperature must be declared directly (in degrees centigrade).
Increases in temperature deriving from an accumulation of heat and chemical reactions must also be taken into consideration. The
thickness of the deposited layer of dust must also be considered and, if necessary, limit the temperature, to prevent an accumulation of heat.
File: AD3X$002_E I • 22 01/2010/i

ATEX
CLASSIFICATIONS OF AREA - MIX - GROUP AND RELATIVE CATEGORY – ACCORDING TO ATEX DIRECTIVES
1
The 94/9/EC Directive is a “new approach” directive based on risk analysis. Its objective is to minimise the risks deriving from the use
of some products indoors or in relation to a potentially explosive atmosphere. The probability of an explosive atmosphere manifesting must
be considered not only as “one-off” or from a static point of view: all operative conditions that can derive from the transformation process must
be taken into consideration.
• An explosive atmosphere for the 94/9/EC Directive is made up from a mixture of inflammable substances (as gas, vapours, mists
and dust), with air, in determined atmospheric conditions in which, after triggering, the combustion propagates together with the unburned mixture.
• An atmosphere susceptible to transforming into an explosive atmosphere because of local and/or operative conditions is defined
potentially explosive atmosphere.
Explosive atmospheres are not only formed in the presence of obviously dangerous substances such as fuel, solvents etc., but also
in the presence of apparently harmless products such as wood dust, metal dusts, flour, grain, sugar etc. Therefore it can concern not only
industries in the chemical or oil industry sectors, but also industries in the foodstuffs, textile, manufacturing etc.. It is important to consider that
to re-enter within the 94/9/EC Directive a product must be applied in presence of one or more of the characteristic elements listed above: presence
of inflammable substances and air, in atmospheric conditions that favour the propagation of combustion. The directive does not define the
atmospheric conditions itself. The relative norms indicate a temperature range, but this does not exclude that the products may be planned
and evaluated specifically to occasionally function outside of this range, introducing the opportune construction transformations.
To define a conformity evaluation procedure adequate for the directive, the Manufacturer must, on the basis of the
declared use, establish the products functioning conditions (this means to say, envision the type of working area, the type of
explosive mixture with which it will come into contact and the level of probability that an explosive atmosphere verifies itself);
successively he must establish to which Group the product belongs and individualise the category inside the Group.
With the Atex 99/92/EC Directive (For the safety of workers) the working conditions in which products in compliance with Atex 99/4/EC
Directive will function are indicated here. These are expressed in “Areas” and defined according to the level of probability that a potentially
explosive atmosphere is verified, respectively for every type of atmosphere (gas-air mix or dust-air mix).
Area 0 and 20 Places in which an explosive atmosphere is constantly present or present for long periods or frequently.
Area 1 and 21 Places in which an explosive atmosphere is probable. It is verified in normal functioning and exercise conditions.
Area 2 and 22 Places in which an explosive atmosphere has low probability of being verified or, if it occurs only lasts for a brief period of time.
GAS-AIR-TYPE EXPLOSIVE MIXTURE (G)

The products destined to work in environments characterised by this type of explosive atmosphere will be respectively
indicated for Area 0, 1 or 2 depending on the Group and category of origin (see below) and are marked with the letter G.
DUST-AIR-TYPE EXPLOSIVE MIXTURE (D)
The products destined to work in environments characterised by this type of explosive atmosphere will be respectively indicated for
Area 20, 21 or 22 depending on the Group and category of origin (see below) and are marked with the letter D.
GROUP I
Includes the appliances destined to be used in underground jobs in the mines and their surface plants, exposed to the risk of the release
of firedamp and/or combustible dust. The subdivision into categories depends on the fact if the power supply must be interrupted or not if an
explosive atmosphere manifests due to a mixture of air and gas, vapours mists (D) or a mixture of air and dust (G).
Category M1 Very high protection level. These products must be able to remain operative, for safety reasons, in the presence of
an explosive atmosphere and present specific performances or protection configurations for breakdown in case of explosion.
Category M2 High protection level. The power supply to these products must be interrupted in the presence of an explosive
atmosphere. Protection means must be incorporated to guarantee the level of protection during normal functioning and also in oppressive working
conditions or resulting from great stressi.
GROUP II
Includes appliances destined to be used in different environments (from the mines) in which there is a probability that an explosive
atmosphere manifests itself. Their subdivision into categories depends on two factors: the place, where the product will be used and if the
probability that a potentially explosive atmosphere, owing to the mixture of air and gas, vapours, mists (D) and the mixture of air and dust (G),
comes about in a constant or occasional manner and if it does occur, does this possibility remain for long or brief period of time.
Category 1 Very high protection level. These products must be planned to function in compliance with operative parameters
established by the Manufacturer in environments in which there is a high probability that explosive atmospheres are always detected or manifest
often or for long periods of time. They must present specific performances or protection configurations for breakdown in case of explosion.
Category 2 High protection level. These products must be planned to function in compliance with operative parameters
established by the Manufacturer in environments in which there is a high probability that explosive atmospheres can manifest.
Protection against explosions relative to this category must function in a way to guarantee the required safety level even in the
presence of functioning defects of the appliances or in dangerous operative conditions, which frequently must be taken into
consideration.
Category 3 Normal protection level. These products must be planned to function in compliance with operative parameters
established by the Manufacturer in environments in which there is a slight probability that explosive atmospheres can manifest, and however
only rarely or for a brief period of time. This type of product belonging to the category in question must guarantee the safety level required in
normal functioning conditions.
File: AD3X$002_E I • 23 01/2010/i

ATEX
SOLENOID VALVES FOR USE IN WORKPLACES WHERE EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
MAY OCCUR DUE TO THE PRESENCE OF GAS, VAPOUR OR MIST AND DUST.
1 AD.3.XD...
AD3.X* solenoid valves are classified in:
Group II appliances (to be used in workplaces, apart from mines, where there is the probability
of explosive atmospheres);
category 2 (high protection level), for use in workplaces where it is probable that an explosive
atmosphere may form in normal working conditions and classified by the presence of
explosive mixtures:
- Atmosphere gas-dust type (letter GD) for zones 1 and 21, AD3XD solenoid valves.
- Atmosphere gas type (letter G) for zones 1 and 2, AD3XD solenoid valves.
These valves are therefore designed especially and manufactured in compliance with the
ATEX 94/9/EC Directive and according to European regulations EN 1127-1, EN 13463-1 and
EN 13463-5.
AD.3.XS.........
Belonging to the "NG06 direction control" of Aron range, these valves are prepared for plate-
mounting with attachment surface in compliance with UNI ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 (former
AD.3.XD... / AD.3.XS...
CETOP R 35 H 4.2-4-03). They are activated electrically and the centre position is ensured
ATEX DIRECTIVE CH. I PAGE 22 by springs with gauged lengths, which once the pulse or command ceases, re-position the
ATEX CLASSIFICATION CH. I PAGE 23 spool in the centre or at the end of travel position.
SERIES AD.3.X*... CH. I PAGE 24
The coils used for these valves are subject to separate conformity certification, according
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CH. I PAGE 24
to the ATEX Directive (EC-type). For further specifications, please consult the documents
ORDERING CODE CH. I PAGE 24 that are always supplied with the valve.
TAB.1 ASSEMBLY CH. I PAGE 25
TAB. 2 VOLTAGES CH. I PAGE 25 Before marking and marketing the valves of the AD3XD / AD3XS series, undergo tests and
inspections according to the in-house Manufacturing System and to the Certified Company
TAB.3 SPOOL CH. I PAGE 25
Quality System in compliance with ISO 9001:2008. All of the AD3XD and AD3XS valve series
LIMITS OF USE CH. I PAGE 25 undergo 100% functional testing. These tests and inspections guarantee that the products
IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE CH. I PAGE 26 sold comply with all the information reported in the Technical Specifications File registered
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CH. I PAGE 26 and declared by marking with AD3X/ATEX/10.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. I PAGE 27
ORDERING CODE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

AD Directional Control Valve Description AD3XD... AD3XS...
3 CETOP 3/NG06 Valve marking II 2 GD cT5 II 2 G cT4

Max. pressure on lines P/A/B 320 bar 320 bar
X* Solenoid valves built pursuant to Max. pressure on line T (dynamic) 250 bar 70 bar
ATEX Directive-94/9/EC Max. flow rate 60 l/min 60 l/min
D = With coils in explosion-proof Max.excitation frequency 3 Hz 3 Hz
version (Ex d) Duty cycle 100%ED 100%ED
S = With coils in increased safety Hydraulic fluids mineral oils DIN 51524 mineral oils DIN 51524
version (Ex me) Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ +40°C -30°C ÷ +60°C
** Spools Ambient temperature -20°C ÷ +40°C -30°C ÷ +60°C
01/02/03/04/16 (tab.3) Max.contamination level class 10 according to class 10 according to
For further hydraulic diagrams, NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75 NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
contact Aron Customer Service Weight (one solenoid) 2,37 kg 2,10 kg
Weight (two solenoids) 3,82 kg 3,40 kg
* Assembly Coil rated power 11-13 W
C / E / F / G / H (tab.1) Degree of protection IP 67 IP 66
For further assembly instructions, Power supply tolerance ±10% -10% ÷ 0%
contact Aron Customer Service Power supply cable standard length 3m Cable gland
with cable gland according to Atex for cable
* Voltage (tab.2) with outside Ø 7÷ 12 mm
Coil marking: consult documents supplied with coil
** Variants
00 = None
V1 = Viton (just for AD3XD)
LE = Emergency lever
(just for AD3XD)
2 Serial number
File: AD3X$002_E I • 24 01/2010/i

ATEX
TAB.1 ASSEMBLY TAB.3 SPOOL
STANDARD Two solenoids - Assembly C
C
E
Two solenoids centred
One solenoid (side A)

Type of
spool
Cover Transit position
1
01 +
F One solenoid (side B)
Specials (with increased price ) 02 -
G 03 +
H 04* -
One solenoid - Assembly E

Type of Cover Transit position
spool
01 +
02 -
03 +
TAB. 2 VOLTAGES
AC for for 04* -
Voltage AD3XD AD3XS
16 +
A 24/50Hz 24/50Hz
B* / 48/50Hz
C 110V/50Hz / One solenoid - Assembly F
J / 115V/50Hz Type of Cover Transit position
D 220V/50Hz / spool
I 230V/50Hz 230V/50Hz
01 +
DC for for
Voltage AD3XD AD3XS 02 -
L 12V 12V
M 24V 24V 03 +
P* 110V /
N 48V / 04* -
(*) special voltage The tension symbol is always printed on the

nameplate.
16 +
(*) spool with increased price
AD.3.XD... AD.3.XS... The tests have been carried out with

Spool Curva
solenoids at operating temperature with
1 5 type AD3XD
a voltage 10% less than rated voltage
01 2 with a fluid temperature of 40°C. The
2 6 02 1 fluid used was a mineral oil with a
03 3 viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The
values in the diagram refers to tests
P (bar)
P (bar)
04 4
16 1 carried out with the oil flow in two
3 8
7 AD3XS direction simultaneously (e.g.. from P
4 to A and in the same time B to T).
01 6 In cases where valves 4/2 e 4/3 were
02 5 used with the flow in one direction
03 7 only, the limits of use could have
04 8 variations which may even be
Q (l/min) Q (l/min) 16 5 negative.
File: AD3X$002_E I • 25 01/2010/i

ATEX
IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE AND MARKING
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
All the solenoid valves are
supplied with identification
nameplate and
13 14 7 Declaration of conformity
subject to Directive 94/9/EC.
CODE
A Pmax 320bar Tamb: -**°C ÷ +**°C 8
The identification nameplate
BATCH
plant
bears the main technical
12 specifications related to the
www.brevinifluidpower.com www.aron.it
M82101020A functional and constructional
Tfluido: -** ÷ +**°C B
HYDRAULIC characteristics of the valve
SCHEME and must therefore be kept
11 10 9
intact and visible.
Made in Italy
1 Conformity to European Directive 8 T amb Working ambient temperature:

- 20°C ÷ + 40°C series AD3XD
2 Conformity to
- 30°C ÷ + 60°C series AD3XS
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
9 T fluid Working fluid temperature:
3 II 2 Group II (surface places) - 20°C ÷ + 40°C series AD3XD
Category 2 (high protection) - 30°C ÷ + 60°C series AD3XS
4 G* Explosive atmosphere: 10 HYDRAULIC Type of hydraulic control
GD: presence of gas, vapour or SCHEME performed by the valve
mist and combustible dust (series
11 M82101020A Nameplate code
AD3XD)
G: presence of gas, vapour or 12 BATCH Reference number of
mist (series AD3XS) technical order (batch)
5 c Constructional safety 13 Pmax 320 bar Max.working pressure
14 CODE Complete reference number of
6 T* Temperature class:
valve ordering code
T5 (<100 °C) series AD3XD
T4 (<135 °C) series AD3XS
7 AD3X/ATX/10 Reference to Technical File
registered c/o Notified Body
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
• Read the instruction handbook supplied with the valves carefully before installation. All maintenances must be carried out following the
instructions given in the manual.
• The AD3XD and AD3XS series valves must be installed and serviced in compliance with plant engineering and maintenance regulations
for workplaces classified against the risk of explosion due to the presence of gas and dust and gas (for example: CEI EN 60079-14, CEI
EN 60079-17, CEI EN 61241-14, CEI EN 61241-17 or other national regulations/standards).
• The valves must be connected to earth using the special anti-loosening and anti-rotation connection element.
• For all safety aspects related to the use of the coils, consult the relative use and maintenance instructions. The electrical appliances/
components must not be opened when live.
• The user must periodically inspect, based on the conditions of use and the substances used, the presence of scale, dirt, the state of wear
and tear and correct efficiency of the valves.
Attention: all installation and maintenance jobs must be carried out by qualified personnel.
File: AD3X$002_E I • 26 01/2010/i

ATEX
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AD.3.XD... 1
0.03
1.6
Support surface
specifications

with material specification min.
8.8
Tightening torque 5 Nm / 0.5
kgm
AD.3.XD...LE.
134,5
117
18,5
26,5 46
OR 2-012/90SH 0.03
27,75 1.6
167,7 69,5 114,7
21,5 19
10,4
Support surface
specifications
32,5
31

8,8 8,7
10,4
242,4
8.8
351,9
kgm
AD.3.XS...
0.03
1.6
Support surface
specifications

8.8
kgm
File: AD3X$002_E I • 27 01/2010/i

INTRODUCTION
The ARON directional control valves NG10 designed for subplate mounting with an interface
1 in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 05 - 04 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP R 35 H

4.2-4-05), and can be used in all fields on account of their excellent capacity and pressure
specifications.
The use of solenoids with wet armatures means that the construction is extremely functional
and safe completely dispensing with need for dynamic seals. The solenoid dust cover is
screwed directly onto the valve casing whilst the coil is kept in position by a ring nut.
CETOP 5/NG10
Great care has been taken in the design and the production of the ducts and the improvement
STANDARD SPOOLS CH. I PAGE 30 of the spools has allowed relatively high flow rates to be accommodated with minimal pressure
AD.5.E... CH. I PAGE 31 drops (Δp). The operation of the directional valves can be electrical, pneumatic, oleodynamic,
AD.5.E...J* CH. I PAGE 32 mechanical or lever operated .
AD.5.E...Q5 CH. I PAGE 32 The centring position is achieved by means of calibrated length springs which, once the action
AD.5.O... CH. I PAGE 33 of impulse is over, return the spool to the centre or end travel position.
AD.5.D... CH. I PAGE 33 The solenoids constructed with protection class in accordance with DIN 40050 standards are
AD.5.L... CH. I PAGE 34 available in either direct current (IP65) or alternating current (IP66) with different voltage and
frequencies.
"A16" DC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 35
"K16" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 35 All types of electrical controls can be fitted, on request, with different types of manual
emergency controls. The electrical supply takes place through connectors meeting DIN 43650
ISO 4400 standards; connectors are also available with built in rectifier or pilot lights.
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2
3
Δp (bar)
The diagram at the side show the pressure drop

Q (l/min) curves for spools during normal usage. The fluid
used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at
40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid
temperature of 40°C.
For higher flow rates than those in the diagram, the losses will be those expressed by the
following formula:
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
Spool Connections Spool Connections

type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
01 2 2 5 5 22 4 5
02 3 3 6 6 3 14 3 3 6 6 2
03 2 2 6 6 15 2 2 4 5
04 3 3 4 4 1 16 2 2 4 5
05 3 3 5 5 17 3 3
06 2 2 5 5 19 3 3 4 5
66 2 2 5 5 20 3 3 4 5
07 1 5 21 3 3
10 3 3 5 5 28 3 3 6 6 2
11 4 5
Curve No. Curve No.
File: AD5002_E I • 28 04/2000/e

ORDERING CODE TAB.1 TAB.2

TYPE OF OPERATOR MOUNTING
AD
5
Directional valve
CETOP 5/NG10
E
D
O
Electrical
Direct mechanical
Oleo-pneumatic
C
STANDARD
1
L Lever
* Type of operator (tab.1) D
** Spools (see tables on page I•30) E
* Mounting type (tab.2)

TAB.3 - "E" TYPE OPERATION F
* Voltage (tab.3) AC VOLTAGE SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING)
A 24V/50Hz G
** Variants (tab.4) B 48V/50Hz*
J 115V/50Hz - 120V/60Hz
Y 230V/50Hz - 240V/60Hz H
2 Serial No. E 240V/50Hz*
F 24V/60Hz* I
DC VOLTAGE
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz L
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
with rectifier
N 48V*
P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz
M
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
with rectifier
X 205V* • Mounting type D is only for valves
K Without AC coils with detent
W Without DC coils
Z other controls • In case of mounting D
Voltage codes are not stamped on the with detent a maximum supply time
plate, their are readable on the coils. of 2 sec is needed (only for AC
coils).
* Special voltage
• The springs for the version with
detent (mounting D) are different
from those for standard versions.
TAB.4 - VARIANTS
VARIANT CODE ♦ PAGE
No variant 00
Viton V1
Emergency button E1 I•35
Pilot light X1 I•19
Rectifier R1 I•19
Preset for microswitch - (E/F/G/H only) see below note ◊ M1 ♦ I•31- I•34
Rotary emergency button P1 I•35
Marine version (AD.5.O..) H1 ♦
Cable gland "PG 11" C1 I•19
Emergency + Viton EV
Emergency + Pilot light EX
Emergency + Viton + Pilot light A1
Emergency + Rectifier ER
Viton + Rectifier + Emergency A2
Pilot light + Rectifier XR I•19
Pilot light + Rectifier + Emergency A3
Pilot light + Rectifier + Emergency + Viton A4
Preset for microswitch + Viton MV ♦
Spool movement speed control (VDC only) with ø 0.5 mm diameter orifice J5 ♦ I•32
External draining solenoid (electrically operated only) Q5 ♦ I•32
Microswitch+ Detent (for lever operation) MD ♦
Detent for lever control D1 ♦
◊ = Maximum counter-pressure on T port: 4 bar ♦ = Variant codes stamped on the plate
File: AD5002_E I • 29 04/2000/e

TWO SOLENOIDS, SPRING CENTRED "C" MOUNTING
STANDARD SPOOLS
(*) Spool with price increasing
1
type
• With spools 15 / 16 / 17 only the mounting E / F are possible

01 +
• 19 / 20 / 21 spool not planned for variant J*
02 -
• For lever operated the spools used are different.
Available spools for this kind of valve are: 01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 66 / 07
03 +
22 / 13 / 15 / 16 / 17
04* -
05 + ONE SOLENOID, SIDE B "F" MOUNTING

66 + type
01 +
06 +
02 -
07* +
08* + 03 +
04* -
10* +
05 +
22* +
11* + 66 +
06 +
12* +
08* +
13* +
14* - 10* +
22* +
28* -
12* +
13* +
07* +
Spool Covering Transient position 15 -
type
16 +
01 +
17 +
02 -
14* -
03 +
28* -
04* -
05 +
66 +
06 + TWO SOLENOIDS "D" MOUNTING

08* + type
19* -
10* +
20* +
12* +
21* +
15 -
16 +
17 +
14* -
28* -
File: TCRS005_E I • 30 00/2000/e

AD.5.E... SOLENOID OPERATED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
Max. pressure port T (DC coil) see note (*) 250 bar
Max. pressure port T (AC coil) 160 bar
Max. flow
Duty cycle
100 l/min
3 Hz
100% ED
1
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with NAS
1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight (with one DC solenoid) 4 Kg
A max. counter-pressure of 4 bar at T is permit- Weight (with two DC solenoids) 5,1 Kg
ted for the variant with a microswitch (M1). Weight (with one AC solenoid) 3,5 Kg
Weight (with two AC solenoids) 4,3 Kg
(*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override

with material specifications min 8.8
M1
M1 = Microswitch
Support plane
specifications
LIMITS OF USE (MOUNTING C-E-F)S

The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature
of 40°C. The fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C.
The values in the diagram refer to tests carried out with the oil flow in two directions simultaneously T = 2 bar (e.g. from P to A and the same
time B to P).
In the cases where valves 4/2 and 4/3 were used with the flow in one direction only, the limits of use could have variations which may even
be negative. Rest time: the values are indicative and depend on the following parameters: hydraulic circuit, fluid used and variations in hydraulic
scales (pressure P, flow Q, temperature T).
Direct current : Energizing 60 ÷ 95 ms. Alternating current: Energizing 12 ÷ 30 ms.
De-energizing 25 ÷ 70 ms. De- energizing 10 ÷ 55 ms.
DIRECT CURRENT SOLENOIDS (DC) ALTERNATING CURRENT SOLENOIDS (AC)
Spool Solenoids
1 6
type DC AC
2 01 1 8
02 1 6 8
3
03 2 7
P (bar)
P (bar)
4 04 4 10 7
9
5 05 1 6
10
06 - 66 3 9
14-28 5 11
15 3 10 11
16 1 6
Curves
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
File: AD5E002_E I • 31 04/2010/e

AD.5.E...J* VALVES WITH SPOOL MOVEMENT SPEED CONTROL VARIANT J*
Valves type AD5.E... with spool movement speed control variant J* Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar
These ON-OFF type valves are used when a lower spool movement Max. pressure port T - see note (*) 250 bar
speed than usual for conventional solenoid valves is required to prevent Max. flow 100 l/min
1 impacts which could adversely affect the smooth running of the system.
The system consists of reducing the transfer section for the fluid from one
solenoid to the other by means of calibrated orifice.
Duty cycle
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
100% ED
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
-25°C ÷ 75°C
• This version can only be used with a direct current (DC) and also Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
involves a reduction in the limits of use so that we suggest to always Weight with one DC solenoid 3,6 Kg
test the valve in your application. Weight with two DC solenoids 4,5 Kg
• To order AD.5.J* version valves, specify the orifices code.
• The operation is linked to a minimum counter-pressure on the (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles.
T line (1 bar min.)
• The switching time referred to the spool travel detected by
a LVDT transducer can vary for the NG10 valve a minimum of
200 to a maximum of 400 ms depending on 5 fundamental
variables:
1) Diameter of the calibrated orifice (see table)
2) Hydraulic power for clearance referring to flow and pressure
values through the valve
3) Spool type
4) Oil viscosity and temperature
5) Counter-pressure at T line
• Possible mounting: C / E / F / G / H
• 19 / 20 / 21 spools not planned for variant J*
CALIBRATED
ORIFICE AVAILABLE
ø (mm) M6x6 Code

0.5 M89.10.0031 J5
0.6 M89.10.0026 J6 E = Manual override
0.7 M89.10.0032 J7
0.8 M89.10.0033 J8 Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x40 Support plane
EAD5E...J$ - 00/2000/e Tightening torque 8 Nm / 0.8 Kgm
AD.5.E...Q5 VALVES WITH EXTERNAL DRAINING SOLENOID - VARIANT Q5

Valves type AD5.E... variant Q5 with external draining solenoid Max. pressure ports P/A/B/T 320 bar
This involves valves with solenoid drainage chambers separated by Max. pressure port L (DC coils) see note (*) 250 bar
line T in the CETOP 5 interface distinguished by the letter L. This Max. pressure port L (AC coils) 160 bar
solution makes it possible to operate with a maximum counter- Max. flow 100 l/min
pressure at T up to 320 bar using only 12.9 material fixing screws to Max. excitation frequency 2 Hz
ensure the maximum safety of the solenoid valve fixing and use of an Duty cycle 100% ED
additional drain. This version can be used for direct current (DC) and Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
alternating current (AC), but involves a reduction in the limits of usage Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
depending on the pressure at T. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
• Mounting possible: C / D / E / F / G / H / I / L / M Weight with one DC solenoid 3,6 Kg
• For subplate see BSH.5.31.. Weight with two DC solenoids 4,5 Kg
Weight with one AC solenoid 3,5 Kg
Weight with two AC solenoids 4,3 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
EAD5E...Q5 - 02/2000/e
E = Manual override

Support plane
with material specifications 12.9 must be used specifications
File: AD5EJ$2_E I • 32 02/2000/e

AD.5.O... OLEO-PNEUMATIC OPERATION TYPE VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar • Possible mounting:
Max. pressure port T 160 bar C/D/E/F/G/H/I L
Max. flow 100 l/min /M
Min. operating pressure
Max. operating pressure
Fluid viscosity
4 + [0.027 x (pt*)] bar - see note
200 bar
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
page I•29 1
Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C (pt*) = Pressure at port T
Max. contamination level class 10 in according with NAS
1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight (single pilot) 4,1 Kg
Weight (twin pilot) 5,4 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Support plane
specifications
EAD5O - 02/2000/e
AD.5.D... DIRECT MECHANICALLY OPERATED TYPE VALVES CETOP 5/NG10

• Possible mounting:
E/F/G/H
Max. pressure port T 20 bar
Max. flow 100 l/min
page I•29
Operating force - see note (*) 8 Kg - see note (**)
• Notes:
(*) In the absence of
counter-pressure at
port T
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with NAS
1638 with filter ß25≥75 (**)10 Kg with a pres-
Weight 3,8 Kg sure of 20 bar at T
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Stroke 8 mmm
Extra stroke 2 mm
Working stroke 4 mm

Support plane
specifications
EAD5D - 03/2000/e
File: AD5O002_E I • 33 05/2000/e

AD.5.L... LEVER OPERATED TYPE VALVES
CETOP 5/NG10
Max. pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar • Possible mounting:
Max. pressure port T 160 bar C/E/F
Max. flow 100 l/min
1
• There is no D type
Lever angle 2 x 15° mounting
Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C • The variant D1
Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C specifies the detent
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with (mechanical connec-
NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75 tion) for lever opera-
Weight 4,7 Kg tion
AD.5.L... Weight with M1 variant 5,35 Kg • The springs for the
ORDERING CODE CH. I PAGE 29 version with detent
STANDARD SPOOLS CH. I PAGE 30 • Completely different spools are used for these (lever operated) (variant D1) are dif-
valves than for all other types of operation (e.g. electrical, mechani- ferent from those for
cal, pneumatic operation, .....) standard versions.
• Available spools: 01 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 66 / 07 / 22 / 13 / 15 /
16 / 17 (for hydraulic symbols see page 1•30)
• Available on request NATIONAL AM1107 type microswitch
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
M1
M1 = Microswitch

File: AD5L002_E I • 34 01/2000/e

"A16" DC COILS FOR CETOP 5
VARIANT WITH MAN. EMERGENCY E1 VARIANT WITH ROT. EMERGENCY P1

Supply tolerance ±10%
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,9 Kg
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C

(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±7%
12V 106°C 45 3.2
24V 113°C 45 12,4
48V* - 45 -
102V* - 45 -
110V* 118°C 45 268
205V* - 45 -
(*) Special voltage ETA16 - 03/2002/e
"K16" AC SOLENOIDS FOR CETOP 5
E1 VARIANT WITH MAN. EMERGENCY P1 VARIANT WITH ROT. EMERGENCY

Duty cycle 100% ED
Max. pressure static 210 bar
Weight 0,8 Kg
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER IN RUSH CURRENT RESISTANCE AT 20°C
(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE25°C) (VA) (VA) (OHM) ±10%
24V/50Hz 134°C 124 454 0.56
24V/60Hz* 115°C 103.5 440 0.55
48V/50Hz* 134°C 113 453 2.10
115V/50Hz-120V/60Hz 121°C - 138°C - - 10.8
230V/50Hz-240V/60Hz 121°C - 138°C - - 43.0
240V/50Hz* 134°C 120 456 47.39
* Special voltage ETK16 - 01/2000/e
File: TA16K16_E I • 35 05/2010/e

ADP. 5.E... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL CETOP 5/NG10
HIGH PERFORMANCES SOLENOID OPERATED VALVES
The ARON NG10 directional control valves are designed for subplate mounting with an
4.2-4-05). The use of solenoids with wet armatures allows an extremely safe construction
1 completely dispensing with the need for dynamic seal. The solenoid tube is screwed directly
onto the valve casing whilst the coil is kept in position by a ring nut. Great care has been taken
over the design and production of the ducts and the improvement of the spools allows relatively
high flow rates to be accommodated for its size with minimal pressure drops (Δp). The
ADP.5.E...
operation of the directional valve is electrical. The centring is achieved by means of calibrated
"D19" DC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 38 length springs which, once the impulse is over, immediately reposition the spool in the neutral
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 position. The solenoids, constructed with a protection class of IP66 in accordance with BS
5490 standards, are available in direct current form and different voltage. The electrical
controls are equipped with an emergency manual control inserted in the tube.
The ADP.5.E.. valve has certain design features which allow it to “manage” a hydraulic power
equal to Q = 120l/min with a P = 320 bar, maintaining a considerable safety margin. These
features can be summarized as follows:
- Solenoid D19 with an optimum ratio between the power absorbed (42W) and the magnetic
force
- Diameter of the spool 18 mm, with carefully designed geometry improved to compensate for
the flow forces
- Compact graphite cast iron valve casing with high mechanical resistance
- Different springs, improved according to the features of the spool
The electrical supply connectors meet DIN 43650 ISO 4400 standards; connectors are also
available with built in rectifiers or pilot lights.
The recommended fluids are hydraulic mineral based oils in accordance with DIN 51524 and
it is recommended that filters should be fitted to ensure a maximum contamination level of
class 10 in accordance with NAS 1638, ß25≥75.
For other fluids please contact our Technical DPT.
• The solenoids are in DC voltage only
Spool Connections
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2 The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop
3
curves for spools during normal usage. The fluid 01 4 4 7 7
4 used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 02 6 6 8 8 7
5
6
40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid 03 3 3 8 8
temperature of 40°C. For higher flow rates than 04 4 4 2 2 3
7 those in the diagram, the losses will be those 05 6 6 6 6
Δp (bar)
expressed by the following formula: 66 4 4 8 7

8
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2 06 4 4 7 8
14 6 4 8 6 2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a 15-19 2 2 5 5
specific flow rate Q which can be obtained from the 16-20 1 1 2 2
diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses for the 28 4 6 6 8 2
flow rate Q1 that is used.
Curve No.
Q (l/min)
TAB.1 - MOUNTING
ORDERING CODE
C
ADP High performances
directional control valve E
5 CETOP 5/NG10 F
E Electrical operator D*
TAB.3 - VARIANTS
** Spools (Table next page) VARIANTS CODE (*) Valve with detent
* Mounting (table 1) No variant 00

Viton V1
Pilot light X1 TAB.2 - SOLENOID D19 (42 W)
* Voltage (table 2) Rectifier R1 DC VOLTAGE
Rotary emergency button P1 L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
** Variants (table 3) Solenoid valve without connectors S1 M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
Cable gland "PG 11" C1 N 48V* with rectifier
1 Serial No. Viton + Pilot light VX P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz
Viton + Rectifier VR Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
Pilot light + Rectifier XR X 205V* with rectifier
Adjustable spool movement W Without DC coils
speed control Q4
With solenoid chamber external
plate, their are readable on the coils.
drainage (Y) Q5
* Special voltage
File: ADP5E001_E I • 36 07/2010/e

ADP.5.E. HIGH PERFORMANCES SOLENOID OPERATED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
STANDARD SPOOLS * SPOOLS WITH PRICE INCREASING
TWO SOLENOIDS, SPRING CENTRED "C MOUNTING"
Spool
type
1
01 +
02 -
03 -
04* -
05 -
66 -
TWO SOLENOIDS "D MOUNTING"
06 - Spool Covering Transient position

type
14* - 19* -
28* - 20* +
ONE SOLENOID, SIDE A "E MOUNTING" ONE SOLENOID, SIDE B "F MOUNTING"
Spool Covering Transient position Spool Covering Transient position

type type
01 + 01 +
02 - 02 -
03 - 03 -
04* - 04* -
05 - 05 -
66 - 66 -
06 - 06 -
14* - 14* -
15 - 15 -
16 + 16 +
28* - 28* -

Spool n°
1
type curves The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating
4 01 1 temperature and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid
02 1 temperature of 50°C.
2
03 2
04 1 The fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at
P (bar)
05 1 40°C.
3
66 1 The values in the diagram refer to tests carried out with the oil flow
06 1 in two directions simultaneously (e.g. from P to A and at the same
14 3 time B to T).
15 1
16 1 In the cases where valves 4/2 and 4/3 were used with the flow
28 3 in one direction only, the limits of use could have variations
19 4 which may even be negative.
Q (l/min)
20 4 The tests were carried out with a counter-pressure of 2 bar at T.
File: ADP5E001_E I • 37 07/2010/e

ADP.5.E. HIGH PERFORMANCES SOLENOID OPERATED VALVE CETOP 5/NG10
ADP.5.E... Q4 variant - These ON-OFF type valves are used when a Max. operating pressure: ports P/A/B 350 bar
lower spool movement speed is required than it is generally available with Max. operating pressure: port T (*) 250 bar
a conventional solenoid valve in order to avoid those shocks which might Max. flow 120 l/min
1 otherwise compromise proper system operation. This is obtained by

forcing the fluid to pass through the gap which exists between the screw
thread and the M8x1 tapped thread, restricting in this way the transfer
Duty cycle
Fluid viscosity
3 Hz
100% ED
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
cross section between the 2 solenoid chambers. Using this variant may Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
entail a reduction in the operational limits according to the spool used, up Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
to the complete blocking of the change over itself. The valve operation Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
depends on the presence of a minimum back pressure on the T line (min. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
1 bar). The change over time referred to the spool stroke depends on 4 Weight with one DC solenoid 5 Kg
main variables: Weight with two DC solenoids 6,5 Kg
• Applicable hydraulic power, related to the flow rate and pressure
drop across the valve; (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles
• Spool type (system configuration);
Pressure on port T valid in case Y is blocked (no external drainage).
• Oil viscosity and temperature;
Normally the external drainaged is blocked with a plug S.T.E.I M6x6
• Back pressure on T.
UNI 5923
ADP.5.E... Q5 variant - These are valves with solenoid chambers drainage separated from the T line, obtained on CETOP RO5 interface and
characterized by the letter Y. This solution allows operation with up to 320 bar max. back pressure on the T line while using only 12.9 material
fixing screws to ensure maximum solenoid valve mounting safety and supplementary drainage.
E = Manual override
GSQ = Square section seal
Support plane
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x40 with material specifications 12.9 specifications
Tightening torque 8 ÷ 10 Nm / 0.8 ÷ 1 Kgm
"D19" DC SOLENOIDS
Number of cycle 18.000/h
Duty cycle 100% ED
Max static pressure 210 bar
Weight 1,63 Kg
P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY
12V 105°C 42 3.43
24V 105°C 42 13.71
48V* 105°C 42 55
102V* 105°C 42 248
110V* 105°C 42 288
205V* 105°C 42 1000
* Special voltage ETD19 - 03/2000/e
File: ADP5E001_E I • 38 07/2010/e

ADP.5.V... WITH PROXIMITY
SENSOR L.V.D.T. CETOP 5/NG10
The ARON NG10 directional control Max. operating pressure: ports P/A/B 350 bar
valves are designed for subplate Max. operating pressure: port T (*) 250 bar
mounting with an interface in Max. flow 120 l/min
accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 05
- 04 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP
R 35 H 4.2-4-05).
Duty cycle
Fluid viscosity
3 Hz
100% ED
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
1
ADP.5.V... The single solenoid directional Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
valves type ADP5V are used in Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
"D19" DC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 39
applications where the monitoring Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
of the position of the spool inside
L.V.D.T. CH. I PAGE 21 the valve is requested to manage Type of protection
the machine safety cycles in (in relation to connector used) IP 66
according with the accident Weight 6,2 Kg
prevention legislation. These (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles
directional valves are equipped with
an horizontal positioned inductive sensor on the opposite side of the solenoid, which is capable
of providing the first movement of the valve when the passage of a minimum flow is allowed.
Integrated in safety systems, these valves intercept actuator movements that could be
dangerous for the operators and for the machine.
• Possible mountings: E / F
• The solenoid is in DC voltage only
Spool Connections
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2
The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop
curves for spools during normal usage. The fluid 01 3 3 5 5
3
used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 02 4 4 6 6 5
4 40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid 66 3 3 6 5
temperature of 40°C. For higher flow rates than 06 3 3 5 6
5 those in the diagram, the losses will be those 16 1 1 2 2
Δp (bar)
expressed by the following formula: Curve No.

6
Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a
specific flow rate Q which can be obtained from the
diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses for the
flow rate Q1 that is used.
Q (l/min)
ORDERING CODE TAB.2 - DC VOLTAGE TAB1 - STANDARD SPOOL

ADP High performances
DC VOLTAGE ONE SOLENOID
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
directional control valve M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
type
N 48V* with rectifier
5 CETOP 5/NG10 P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz 01E +
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
with rectifier 01F +
V Directional valve with X 205V*
single solenoid and W Without DC coils 02E -
and connectors
L.V.D.T. proximity sensor 02F -
Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate,
their are readable on the coils. 66E -
*** Spool and mounting (table 1) * Special voltage
06F -
* Voltage (table 2) 16E +
16F +
** Variants (table 3)
32E +
1 Serial No.
TAB.3 - VARIANTS
VARIANTS CODE
No variant (connectors as in the drawing) 00
registered mark for industrial Pilot light X1
environment with reference to the Rectifier R1
electromagnetic compatibility. Rotary emergency button P1
European norms: Solenoid valve without connectors (coils) S1
- EN50082-2 general safety norm - Without proximity connector LVDT S3
industrial environment Without coils and proximity connector S4
- EN 50081-1 emission general norm - Cable gland "PG 11" C1
residential environment With solenoid chamber external
drainage (Y) Q5
File: ADP5V001_E I • 39 07/2000/e

ADP.5.V... WITH PROXIMITY SENSOR L.V.D.T. CETOP 5/NG10
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
1 E = Manual override

with material specifications 12.9 Support plane
Tightening torque specifications
8 ÷ 10 Nm / 0.8 ÷ 1 Kgm
"D19" DC SOLENOIDS

Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 1,63 Kg
P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY
12V 105°C 42 3.43
24V 105°C 42 13.71
48V* 105°C 42 55
102V* 105°C 42 248
110V* 105°C 42 288
205V* 105°C 42 1000
* Special voltage ETD19 - 03/2000/e
File: ADP5V001_E I • 40 07/2000/e

AD.3.I... AUTOMATIC RECIPROCATING
VALVES CETOP 3
These automatic reciprocating Max. operating pressure port P 320 bar
valves, with interface UNI ISO 4401 Max. flow 30 l/min
- 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP Minimum permitted flow 3 l/min
R 35 H 4.2-4-03), reverse the move-
ment of an actuator every time the
flow through the valve stops.
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
20 ÷ 200 mm2/s
-20°C ÷ 60°C
Max. contamination level(*) class 10 in accordance
1
With no max. pressure valves inside with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
the body, the spool is moved by two Positioner activating force 130 N
springs and locked by unbalanced (measured with 1 bar on the T line)
pressure inside valve; when no more Weight of version without positioner 0,95 Kg
AD.3.I... flow is crossing the valve, the spool Weight of version with positioner 1 Kg
changes the position inverting the
direction of the actuator. (*) Max contamination level must be respect to obtain
the right function of the valve
With a preferential starting P → B
and A → T position, these valves are
mainly used to control the move-
ment compactors or system where is
not possible to use electrical device.
ORDERING CODE HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
3 CETOP 3/NG6
I Automatic reciprocating
valve at null flow
P Version with positioner to

adjust the pressure relief valve PRESSURE DROPS
of the system
B →T
** 00 = No variant P →B
V1 = Viton P →A
1 Serial No. A →T
Δp (bar)
Tests carried out with mineral oil at a tem-

perature of 40°C with viscosity of 46 mm2/s. Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Support plane
specifications
File: AD3I001_E I • 41 03/2000/e

AD.5.I... AUTOMATIC RECIPROCATING
VALVES CETOP 5
The operating principle of this type of Max. operating pressure port P 320 bar
inverter valve, with interface UNI ISO Max. flow 100 l/min
4401 - 05 - 04 - 0 - 94 standard (ex Minimum permitted flow 10 l/min
1 CETOP R 35 H 4.2-4-05), is based on

the pressure unbalanced created in
its interior as a consequence of the
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
32 ÷ 60 mm2/s
-20°C ÷ 60°C
Max. contamination level(*) class 10 in accordance
fluid flow rate. On starting the system with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
this valve assumes always a prefer- Positioner activating force 190 N
ential position P → B e A → T. (measured with 1 bar on the T line)
Weight of version without positioner 3,4 Kg
AD.5.I... When a pressure is applied to the Weight of version with positioner 3,6 Kg
cylinder which exceeds the system
maximum flow rate valve calibration (*) Max contamination level must be respect to obtain
value (e.g. end stroke actuator), a the right function of the valve
hydraulic unbalanced is generated ca-
pable of changing over the valve and
inverting the cylinder direction of the
movement.
ORDERING CODE
AD Directional control
5 CETOP 5/NG10
AD.5.I.P.2T.1 FOR REGENERATIVE SYSTEM
I Automatic reciprocating valve
at null flow
P Version with positioner to adjust the

pressure relief valve of the system
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2T = Variant for PRESSURE DROPS
regenerative
system B →T
P →B
1 Serial No.
Δp (bar)
P →A
A →T
Version AD.5.I.P.2T.1 integrated in a regenerative circuit for

compactors with roll on-off mobile system, solution useful for all
Tests carried out with mineral oil a applications where to connect microswitch of proximity is not
temperature of 40°C with a vis- possible. For any information about our regenerative manifold
cosity of 46 mm2/s. Q (l/min) Aron please contact our technical department. For special subplate
BS.5.RIA see Chapter X "Systems", next pages.
GSQ = square section seal

Support plane
specifications
File: AD5I001_E I • 42 03/2000/e

AD.3.RI... AUTOMATIC RECIPROCATING
VALVES CETOP 3
This valve type is characterized by Max. operating pressure 320 bar
fully hydraulic operation, as it takes Max. pressure port T 160 bar
advantage of the system pressure Min. recommended pressure 15 bar
rise to cause an automatic and con-
tinuous inversion of the utilization.
The changeover takes place when
Max. flow
Min. flow
Setting ranges: Spring 1
25 l/min
2 l/min
15 ÷ 50 bar
1
the system pressure exceeds the in- Spring 2 20 ÷ 140 bar
version valves calibration pressure, Spring 3 50 ÷ 320 bar
and therefore also in not predeter- Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 60 mm2/s
AD.3.RI...
mined positions. At cylinder stroke Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
end, the overall maximum pressure Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
valve should be adjusted on a value with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
30% higher than the system operating Weight 2,3 Kg
pressure.
The inverter valves pressure calibra-
ORDERING CODE tion values should be 15% lower than HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
that of the overall maximum pressure
AD Directional valve valve, and 15% higher than the maxi-
mum operating pressure.
3 CETOP 3/NG6 Note: to operate the push button emer-
gency, a minimum pressure of 3 bar
RI Automatic reciprocating valve on the actuator is needed.
hydraulically operated
automatic reciprocation
211 Scheme
Z No voltage
PRESSURE DROPS
* Setting ranges:
1 = 15 ÷ 50 bar A →T
B →T
2 = 20 ÷ 140 bar
3 = 50 ÷ 320 bar
** 00 = No variant
Δp (bar)
V1 = Viton P →A
P →B
3 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
E = Manual override

File: AD3RI003_E I • 43 02/2000/e

AD.5.RI... AUTOMATIC RECIPROCATING
VALVES CETOP 5
This valve type is characterized by a Max. operating pressure 320 bar
fully hydraulic operation, as it takes Max. pressure port T 160 bar
advantage of the system pressure Min. recommended pressure 15 bar
1 rise to cause an automatic and con-

tinuous inversion of the utilization.
The changeover takes place when
Max. flow
Min. flow
Setting ranges: Spring 1
70 l/min
6 l/min
15 ÷ 50 bar
the system pressure exceeds the Spring 2 20 ÷ 140 bar
inversion valves calibration pressure, Spring 3 50 ÷ 320 bar
AD.5.RI... and therefore also in not predeter- Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 60 mm2/s
mined position. At the cylinder stroke Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
end, the overall maximum pressure Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
valve should be adjusted on a value with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
30% higher than the system operat- Weight 5,4 Kg
ing pressure.
The inverter valves pressure calibra-
ORDERING CODE tion values should be 15% lower than HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
that of the overall maximum pres-
AD Directional valve sure valve, and 15% higher than the
maximum operating pressure.
5 CETOP 5/NG10 Note: to operate the push button
emergency, a minimum pressure of
RI Automatic reciprocating valve 3 bar on the actuator is needed.
hydraulically operated
automatic reciprocation
211 Scheme
Z No voltage
* Setting ranges: PRESSURE DROPS

1 = 15 ÷ 50 bar P →A
2 = 20 ÷ 140 bar P →B
3 = 50 ÷ 320 bar
** 00 = No variant A →T
Δp (bar)
V1 = Viton B →T
3 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
E = Manual override

File: AD5RI003_E I • 44 01/2000/e

ADPH.5... PILOTED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
WITH CETOP 2/NG4 PILOT VALVE
These ADPH 5 valves are used primarily for controlling
the starting, stopping and direction of fluid flow. These HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
kind of distributors are composed by a main stage crossed
by the big flow from the pump (ADPH.5) and by a cetop 2
pilot directional solenoid valve (AD.2.E) available with
different mounting type .
1
When a short response time is requested, a special
version of solenoids with high dynamics is available with
the code AD.2.E.**.*.*FF.2 (Please, contact our Techni-
ADPH.5... cal Aron Service).
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR ADPH.5 CH. I PAGE 46
TECH. SPECIFICATIONS ADPH5 CH. I PAGE 47
CETOP 2/NG04 CH. I PAGE 2 ORDERING CODE
AD.2.E... CH. I PAGE 4 ADPH Piloted valve
"A09" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 4 The pilot valves AD.2.E...
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 must be ordered separately
5 CETOP 5/NG10
** Spool type (Table next page)
* Mounting (Table next page) TAB.2 - PLUGS DISPOSAL

Standard orifice at port P: ∅ 1mm
Internal piloting
Internal draining (I code)
* Orifice type on
Cetop 2 valves (Table 1)
0 = none
A / B / C / D / E / F / G = orifice
on line A
H / I / L / M / N / P / Q = orifice
on line B
* Piloting and draining type (Tab.2)

I = internal piloting
internal draining
E = internal piloting
external draining
X = external piloting Internal piloting
internal draining External draining (E code)
(special body)
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
TAB.1 - ORIFICE ON LINE A/B

On line A On line B ø(mm)
0 0 None
A H 0,5 External piloting
B I 0,6 Internal draining (X code)
C L 0,7
D M 0,8
E N 0,9
F P 1
G Q 1,2
File: ADPH5001_E I • 45 03/2000/e

ADPH.5... PILOTED VALVES 5/NG10 WITH CETOP 2/NG4 PILOT VALVE
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS, SPOOLS AND MOUNTING (* Spools with price increasing)

"A" MOUNTING "B" MOUNTING
1 Pilot
Piloted
Pilot
Piloted
Scheme Scheme
Spool Covering Transient position Spool Covering Transient position

type type
01 + 01 +
02 - 02 -
03 - 03 -
04* - 04* -
06 + 06 +
15 - 15 -
16 + 16 +
"C" MOUNTING
PRESSURE DROPS
Pilot
1 2
Piloted 3
4
5
6
Δp (bar)
Scheme 7

type
01 +
Q (l/min)
02 - The diagram at the side shows the pressure drop curves for spools
during normal usage. The used fluid is a mineral oil with a viscosity of
46 mm2/s at 40°C; the tests have been carried out at a fluid temperature
03 -
of 40°C. For flow rates higher than those in the diagram, the losses will
be those expressed by the following formula:
04* - Δp1 = Δp x (Q1/Q)2
where Δp will be the value for the losses for a specific flow rate Q which
can be obtained from the diagram, Δp1 will be the value of the losses
06 + for the flow rate Q1 that is used.
Spool Connections
01 4 4 7 7
02 6 6 8 8 7
03 3 3 8 8
04 4 4 2 2 3
06 4 4 7 8
15 2 2 5 5
16 1 1 2 2
Curve No.
File: ADPH5001_E I • 46 03/2000/e

ADPH.5... PILOTED VALVES 5/NG10 WITH CETOP 2/NG4 PILOT VALVE
PILOT SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS EXTERNAL BACK PRESSURE ON LINE P

Max. operating pressure: ports P/A/B 250 bar (FOR SPOOL IN THE CENTRE POSITION)
Max. operating pressure: port T (dynamic)
Max. piloting pressure
Min. piloting pressure
70 bar
250 bar
10 bar
1
Max. flow 120 l/min
Switching times (*see note below) Energizing: 20 ms
De-energizing: 50 ms
Piloting oil volume for engagement 1 cm3
Hydraulic fluid mineral oil DIN 51524
Mounting plate
Weight ADPH5 without pilot valve 3,4 Kg When the main spool connect P to T in the centre position,
Weight ADPH5 with pilot valve with one solenoid 4,3 Kg the minimum pressure of 10 bar is needed to move the main
Weight ADPH5 with pilot valve with two solenoids 4,5 Kg spool (see the “Specifications”); for this reason a check
valve on the P line (see the drawing above) is necessary.
(*) All the tests have been carried out with AD.2.E pilot valve with variant FF,
mounting type C, spool 03, flow 100 l/min,pressure 160 bar, back pressure on
the T line of 2 bar and oil temperature 40°C.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING SURFACE
Mounting surface
1 Pilot solenoid valve

Cetop 2/NG4 type AD.2.E...FF variant
2 Calibrated springs Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x40
with material specifications 12.9
3 Piloted valve ADPH.5 Tightening torque 8 ÷ 10 N / 0,8 ÷ 1 Kgm
File: ADPH5001_E I • 47 03/2000/e

ADH.5... 4/3 AND 4/2
PILOTED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
Type ADH.5 distributors are intended for interrupting, inserting and diverting a hydraulic
system flow. Normally these distributors are composed of a main stage, crossed by circuit
main flow, and of a pilot stage available in several versions.
1 Various types of controls are available, used either individually or in combination for, among
other functions, stroke limitation and main spool movement speed control, in order to optimize
the hydraulic system operation where this type of valve is employed.
In those case where normally to drain spools are used, it is necessary to remember that the
minimum changeover pressure due to the opposing springs is equal to approximately 7 bar
(see the operating features table on page I•45) and consequently necessary to insert a check
ADH.5... valve in the P way (as shown above).
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR ADH.5 CH. I PAGE 49 • Mounting surface in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 05 - 05 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP
TECH. SPECIFICATIONS ADH.5 CH. I PAGE 50 R 35 H 4.2-4-05).
• Pilot operated spool, solenoid controller.
SUBPLATES BSH.5... CH. I PAGE 51
• Stroke control of main spool.
CMP.30... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE • Presetting for pressure reducing valve mounting.
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 8 • Presetting for single-acting throttle valve mounting.
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR AD.3.E CH. I PAGE 10
"K12" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 18 PLUGS ARRANGEMENT FOR THE PILOT AND DRAIN LINES
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 Plugs type used: M5x6 both for pilot and drain
ADH.5...I
X internal piloting
Y internal draining
ORDERING CODE
ADH Piloted valve
(Pilot valve and any
mounting valves should
be ordered separately)
5 CETOP 5/NG10
* Mounting type (Table next page)

ADH.5...IE
X internal piloting
** Spool type (Table next page) Y external draining
* Piloting and draining

I = X internal / Y internal
IE = X internal / Y external
EI = X external / Y internal
E = X external / Y external
(see diagram at side)
** 00 = No variant
LC = Main spool ADH.5...EI
stroke limiter X external piloting
Y internal draining
1 Serial No.
EXTERNAL CHECK ON P
ADH.5...E
X external piloting
Y external draining
File: ADH5001_E I • 48 05/2010/e

ADH.5... 4/3 AND 4/2 PILOTED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
Spool Connections
PRESSURE DROPS
1 2
3
5
01
02
03
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
6
6
5
6
6
3 1
6 04 2 2 5 5 1
Δp (bar)
05 3 3 5 5
7 06-66 3 3 6 6
The diagram an the side shows the pressure
drops in relation to spools adopted for normal 07 1 6
usage (see table). 10 3 3 5 5
11 4 5
Tests carried out at a constant temperature of 22 4 5
40°C. 14-28 3 3 7 7 2
15 3 3 4 5
Q (l/min) The fluid used was a mineral based oil with a 16 3 3 4 5
viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. 17 3 3
Curve No.
SPOOLS AND MOUNTING TYPE (* Spools with price increasing)

C mounting A mounting B mounting Mounting P
Pilot AD.3.E.03.C... AD.3.E.03.E... AD.3.E.03.F... AD3E16E/AD3E16F
Piloted ADH.5.C... ADH.5.B... ADH.5.P...
Scheme
Spool
type
01
02
03
04*
05
66
06
07*
10*
11*
22*
14*
28*
15
16
17
File: ADH5001_E I • 49 05/2010/e

PILOT SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS FOR DIFFERENT CONTROLS, PLEASE CONTACT OUR TECHNICAL ARON SERVICE
1 Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B

Max. operating pressure port T (int. drainage)
Max. pressure on T (ext. drainage)
320 bar
160 bar
250 bar
Max. piloting pressure 250 bar
Min. piloting pressure 7 bar
Max. flow 100 l/min
SWITCHING TIMES PILOTED VALVE
Piloting oil volume engagement 3 position valves 0,8 cm3 OPERATING CURRENT ENERGIZING DE-ENERGIZING
PRESSURE centre-extern extern-centre
Piloting oil volume engagement 2 position valves 1,6 cm3 (bar) (ms) (ms)
Hydraulic fluid mineral oil DIN 51524
50 30
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s 100 ALTERNATING 25 50
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C 200 20
Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance with 50 40
NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75 100 DIRECT 35 60
Weight ADH5 without pilot valve 2,7 Kg 200 30
Weight ADH5 with pilot valve with 1 AC solenoid 4 Kg
Weight ADH5 with pilot valve with 1 DC solenoid 4,2 Kg 3 position valve. The values are indicative and depend on the
Weight ADH5 with pilot valve with 2 AC solenoids 4,3 Kg hydraulic circuit, the fluid used and the variations in pres-
Weight ADH5 with pilot valve with 2 DC solenoids 4,7 Kg sure, flow rate and temperature.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CETOP 5 MOUNTING SURFACE
SPOOL STROKE ADJUSTMENT
1 Piloted solenoid valve type AD3E... CETOP 3/NG6

2 Calibrated diaphragms for AD3E...
3 Flow regulation valve type AM3QF..C Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x35
4 Pressure reduction valve type AM3RD..C with material specifications 12.9
5 Main valve type ADH5..E Tightening torque 8 N / 0,8 Kgm
File: ADH5001_E I • 50 05/2010/e

BSH.5... SUBPLATES MOUNTING FOR ADH.5 TYPE PILOTED VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
BSH.5.13 WITH P, T AND A, B REAR 3/4" BSP, X AND Y CLEARANCE HOLES
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
1
5 CETOP 5/NG10
13 3/4" BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3,8 Kg
Fixing screws M6x50 UNI 5931
BSH.5.17 WITH P AND T REAR AND A, B SIDE 3/4" BSP, X AND Y CLEARANCE HOLES
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
17 3/4" BSP rear and

side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3,9 Kg
BSH.5.31 WITH P AND T REAR, A AND B SIDE 3/4" BSP, X AND Y CLEARANCE HOLES WITH MAXIMUM PRESSURE VALVE
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10

side connectors
* M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Setting ranges
1 = Max 50 bar
2 = Max 140 bar
3 = Max 320 bar
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
Weight: 5,5 Kg • For the minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring, see
Fixing screws M6x75 UNI 5931 minimum setting curve pressure CMP30
File: BSH5001_E I • 51 00/2000/e

ADH.7... 4/3 AND 4/2
Type ADH.7 distributors are intended for interrupting, inserting and diverting a hydraulic
system flow. Normally these distributors are composed of a main stage, crossed by the circuit
main flow, and of a pilot stage available in several versions.
1 Various types of controls are available, used either individually or in combination for, among
In those cases where normally to drain spools are used, it is necessary to remember that the
ADH.7... minimum changeover pressure due to the opposing springs is equal to approximately 5 bar
(see the operating features table next pages) and it is consequently necessary to specify when
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR ADH.7 CH. I PAGE 53 ordering the check valve incorporated in the P line, if required (as shown below).
TECH. SPECIFICATIONS ADH.7... CH. I PAGE 54
SUBPLATES BSH.7... CH. I PAGE 55/56 • Mounting surface in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 07 - 06 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 8 R 35 H 4.2-4-07).
• Pilot operated spool, solenoid controller.
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR AD.3.E CH. I PAGE 10
AD.3.E... CH. I PAGE 11 • Presetting for pressure reducing valve mounting.
ADC.3... CH. I PAGE 5 • Presetting for single-acting throttle valve mounting.
"D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 18 TAB.1 - PLUGS ARRANGEMENT FOR THE PILOT AND DRAIN LINES
"K12" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 18 Plugs type used: M5x5 both for pilot and drain.
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 Note: standard M6x6 orifice Ø1,5 insert in the P port (Z)
ADH.7...I
ORDERING CODE X internal piloting
Y internal draining
ADH Piloted valve - Pilot valves and
any modulating valves should be
ordered separately
7 CETOP 7/NG16
* Mounting type (see next page)
** Spool type (see next page)
* Piloting and draining ADH.7...IE

I = X internal / Y internal X internal piloting
IE = X internal / Y external Y external draining
EI = X external / Y internal
E = X external / Y external
(see Tab.1 at side)
R Check valve incorporated at port P
(Tab. 2) Only for I and IE versions
(omit if not required)
** 00 = No variant
LC = Main spool stroke limiter
ADH.7...EI
2 Serial No. X external piloting
Y internal draining
TAB. 2 - INTERNAL CHECK ON P

ADH7*.**.*.R.**.2 VERSION
ADH.7...E
X external piloting
Y external draining
• For the spools 02-04-14-28 the piloting

is normally external; the internal piloting
is possible only with the internal check
valve (R).
File: ADH7002_E I • 52 03/2005/e

Spool Connections
PRESSURE DROPS type
The two diagrams show the "Pressure P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T
5
4
drops" in relation to spools adopted for
normal usage (see table).
The fluid used was a mineral based oil
01
02
ENERGIZING
DE-ENERGIZ.
ENERGIZING
DE-ENERGIZ.
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
1
3 with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40° C. 03 ENERGIZING 2 1 3 3
DE-ENERGIZ.
Δp (bar)
2 ENERGIZING 2 2 4 4
04
1 DE-ENERGIZ. 5
DE-ENERGIZ. 2 2
DE-ENERGIZ. 4
DE-ENERGIZ.
DE-ENERGIZ. 4
Q (l/min) DE-ENERGIZ. 4
DE-ENERGIZ.
PRESSURE DROPS FOR Connections Curve No.

Spool
INTERNAL CHECK ON P VERSION type P →A P →B P →T
2 02 1 1 1 LIMIT OF USE
04 1 1 2 Spool No.
type Curve
Curve No. 1
01 1
Δp (bar)
1
3
02 2
03 1
P (bar) 2
04 3
The limit of use test has been carried
4 05 1
out with external draining and orifice
Ø1,5 insert in the P port (Z). The fluid 66 1
used was a mineral based oil with a 10 1
viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40° C. 14 4
28 4
Q (l/min) 23 1
(•) For the "E mounting" the locating
spring works only with the steady Q (l/min)
SPOOLS AND MOUNTING TYPE system (* Spools with price increasing)
C mounting A mounting B mounting E mounting (•) P mounting
Pilot AD.3.E.03.C... AD.3.E.03.E... AD.3.E.03.F... AD.3.E.16.E... AD3E16E/AD3E16F

Piloted ADH.7.C... ADH.7.A... ADH.7.B... ADH.7.E... ADH.7.P...
Scheme
Spool
type
01
02
03
04*
05
66
10*
14*
28*
23*
File: ADH7002_E I • 53 03/2005/e

1
Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 350 bar
Max. operating pressure port T (int. drainage) 160 bar
Max. operating pressure port T (ext. drainage) 250 bar
Max. piloting pressure 210 bar
Max flow 300 l/min.
Piloting oil volume for engagement 3 position valves 4 cm3 Switching time
Piloting oil volume for engagement 2 position valves 8 cm3 Such values refer to a tests carried out with Aron solenoid
Hydraulic fluid mineral oil DIN 51524 valve type AD3E03 with P = 100 bar pressure and Q = 100
Fluid viscosity 2.8 ÷ 380 mm2/s l/min flow. Orifice ø1.5 mm, insert on piloting port, using a
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 70°C mineral oil at 40°C. with 46 mm2/s viscosity.
NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75 TEMPI DI RISPOSTA VALVOLA PILOTATA
Weight ADH7 without pilot valve 7 Kg
Solenoids ENERGIZING ±10% (ms) DE-ENERGIZING ±10% (ms)
Weight ADH7 with pilot valve with 1 AC solenoid 8,2 Kg
Weight ADH7 with pilot valve with 1 DC solenoid 8,4 Kg No. Spool 01 - 03 01 - 03
Weight ADH7 with pilot valve with 2 AC solenoids 8,5 Kg Scheme 2 positions 3 positions 2 positions 3 positions
Weight ADH7 with pilot valve with 2 DC solenoids 9 Kg
AC 50 20 25 30
Note: the solenoid valve type ADC.3.E... (with A09 coil) and AD3.E... (with D15 DC 70 35 40 50
or K12 coils) could be used both as pilote valve, without any changement of
No. Spool 02 04 02 - 04 02 - 04
technical features.
Scheme 2 posit. 2 posit. 3 posit. 2 positions 3 positions
AC 35 60 30 25 25
DC 55 80 40 40 50
CETOP 7 MOUNTING SURFACE
• Piloted valve fixing:

n° 4 screws T.C.E.I. M10x60 - Tightening torque 40 Nm
n° 2 screws T.C.E.I. M6x55 - Tightening torque 8 Nm
Fixing screws UNI 5931 with material specifications 12.9
• Seals:
n° 4 OR 2-118 PARKER (type 130)
SPOOL STROKE ADJUSTMENT
1 Piloted solenoid valve type AD3E... or ADC.3.E... CETOP 3/NG6

2 Calibrated diaphragms AD3E...
3 Flow regulation valve type AM3QF..C
4 Pressure reduction valve type AM3RD..C
5 Main valve type ADH7..E
File: ADH7002_E I • 54 03/2005/e

BSH.7.12 WITH P, T, AND A, B REAR 3/4" BSP
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
1
7 CETOP 7/NG16
12 3/4" BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 5,5 Kg
BSH.7.13 WITH P, T AND A,B REAR 1" BSP
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16
13 1" BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 4,7 Kg
BSH.7.14 WITH P, T AND A, B SIDE 3/4" BSP
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16
14 3/4" BSP side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 6,3 Kg
File: BSH7001_E I • 55 01/2000/e

BSH.7.15 WITH P, T AND A, B SIDE 1" BSP
1 BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16
15 1" BSP side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 6,3 Kg
BSH.7.16 WITH P AND T REAR, A AND B SIDE 3/4" BSP, X AND Y REAR
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16

side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 5,1 Kg
BSH.7.17 WITH P AND T REAR, A AND B SIDE 1" BSP, X AND Y REAR
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16
17 1" BSP rear and

side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 5,3 Kg
File: BSH7001_E I • 56 01/2000/e

ADH.8...4/3 AND 4/2
Type ADH.8 distributors are intended for interrupting, inserting and diverting a hydraulics
system flow.
Normally these distributors are composed of a main stage, crossed by circuit main flow, and
of a pilot stage available in several versions.
Various types of controls are available, used either individually or in combination for, among
1
In those cases where normally to drain spools are used, it is necessary to remember that the
minimum changeover pressure due to the opposing springs is equal to approximately 5 bar
ADH.8... (see the operating features table next pages) and it is consequently necessary to specify when
ordering the check valve incorporated in the P line, if required (as shown below).
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR ADH.8 CH. I PAGE 58
TECH. SPECIFICATIONS ADH.8... CH. I PAGE 59 • Mounting surface in accordance with UNI ISO 4401 - 08 - 07 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP
SUBPLATES BSH.7... CH. I PAGE 60 R 35 H 4.2-4-08).
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 8 • Pilot operated spool, solenoid controller.
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR AD.3.E CH. I PAGE 10 • Presetting for pressure reducing valve mounting.
AD.3.E... CH. I PAGE 11 • Presetting for single-acting throttle valve mounting.
"K12" AC SOLENOIDS CH. I PAGE 18
TAB.1 - PLUGS ARRANGEMENT FOR THE PILOT AND DRAIN LINES
Plugs type used: M6x6 both for pilot and drain
ORDERING CODE
ADH.8...I
ADH Piloted valve X internal piloting
(Pilot valves and any Y internal draining
modulating valves should be
ordered separately)
8 CETOP 8/NG25
* Mounting type (see next page)
** Spool type (see next page)
* Piloting and draining

I = X internal / Y internal
IE = X internal / Y external ADH.8...IE
EI = X external / Y internal X internal piloting
E = X external / Y external Y external draining
(see Tab.1 at side)
R Check valve incorporated at port P

- setting 5 bar (Tab. 2 below)
Only for I, IE versions
(Omit if not required)
** 00 = No variant
LC = Main spool stroke limiter
TA = High pressure (•) ADH.8...EI
(Up to 420bar on P/A/B ports) X external piloting
Y internal draining
1 Serial No.
(•) For heavy applications, eg. concrete pumps
TAB. 2 - INTERNAL CHECK ON P
ADH.8...E
X external piloting
Y external draining
• For the spools 02-04-14-28 the piloting is

normally external; the internal piloting is
possible with the internal check valve (R).
File: ADH8001_E I • 57 05/2009/e

PRESSURE DROPS
5 4 63 Connections
1 1
2
Spool
type
01 ENERGIZING
P →A
1
P →B
1
A →T
2
B →T
3
P →T
DE-ENERGIZ.
02 2 2 1 2 6(1)
Δp (bar)
ENERGIZING
03 DE-ENERGIZ.
1 1 4(2) 4(3)
ENERGIZING 1 2
DE-ENERGIZ.
04 6 6 3 4 5
ENERGIZING
The diagram shows the pressure drops in 05 DE-ENERGIZ. 4(2) 4(3) 2 3
ENERGIZING 2 2
relation to spools adopted for normal us- DE-ENERGIZ. 4
age (see table). 66 1 1 2
ENERGIZING 2
The fluid used was a mineral based oil with 10 1 1 2 3
ENERGIZING
a viscosity of 35 mm2/s at 50° C. DE-ENERGIZ.
Q (l/min) 14
ENERGIZING
6 6 3 4 5(3)
DE-ENERGIZ.
28 6 6 4 3 5(2)
ENERGIZING
DE-ENERGIZ. 4
23 1 2 3
ENERGIZING 2
Curve No.
Notes: ( ) A/B stopped - (2) B stopped - (3) A stopped
1
SPOOLS AND MOUNTING TYPE (* Spools with price increasing)

(•) For the E mounting the locating spring works
only with the steady system
C mounting A mounting B mounting E mounting P mounting

Pilot AD.3.E.03.C... AD.3.E.03.E... AD.3.E.03.F... AD.3.E.16.E... AD3E16E/AD3E16F
Piloted ADH.8.C... ADH.8.A... ADH.8.B... ADH.8.E... ADH.8.P...
Scheme
Spool
type
01
02
03
04*
05
66
10*
14*
28*
23*
File: BSH8001_E I • 58 05/2009/e

Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B

Max. operating pressure port T (int. drainage)
Max. operating pressure port T (ext. drainage)
Max. piloting pressure
320 bar
160 bar
250 bar
210 bar
1
Max. flow with 04-14-28 spools 500 l/min a 210 bar
450 l/min a 320 bar
Max. flow with all other spools 600 l/min a 210 bar
500 l/min a 320 bar
Piloting oil volume for engagement 3 position valves 11.1 cm3
Switching time
Piloting oil volume for engagement 2 position valves 22.12 cm3
Hydraulic fluid mineral oil DIN 51524 Such values refer to a solenoid valve with P = 100 bar
Fluid viscosity 2.8 ÷ 380 mm2/s pressure using a mineral oil at 50°C with 36 mm2/sec
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 70°C viscosity PA and BT connections.
Weight ADH8 without pilot valve 13,1 Kg
SWITCHING TIMES PILOTED VALVE
Weight ADH8 with pilot valve with 1 AC solenoid 14,3 Kg ENERGIZING ±10% (ms) DE-ENERGIZING ±10% (ms)
Solenoids 2 posit. 3 posit. 2 posit. 3 posit.
Weight ADH8 with pilot valve with 1 DC solenoid 14,5 Kg
Weight ADH8 with pilot valve with 2 AC solenoids 14,6 Kg AC 60 45 90 60
Weight ADH8 with pilot valve with 2 DC solenoids 15,1 Kg DC 75 55 90 60
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CETOP 8 MOUNTING SURFACE
• Piloted valve fixing: n° 6 screws T.C.E.I. M12x60

• Tightening torque: 69 Nm
• Seals: n° 4 OR 2-123 PARKER (type 3118)

1 Piloted solenoid valve type AD3E... CETOP 3/NG6 SPOOL STROKE ADJUSTMENT
2 Calibrated diaphragms AD3E...
3 Flow regulation valve type AM3QF..C
4 Pressure reduction valve type AM3RD..C
5 Main valve type ADH7..E
File: ADH8001_E I • 59 05/2009/e

BSH.8.13 WITH P, T AND A, B REAR 1" BSP
1 BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
8 CETOP 8/NG25
13 1" BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 6,3 Kg - Fixing screws M10x60 UNI 5931
BSH.8.13* WITH P, T AND A, B REAR 1"1/4 BSP OR 1" 1/2 BSP
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
8 CETOP 8/NG25
13* A = 1"1/4 BSP rear connectors

B = 1"1/2 BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 21,7 Kg (BSH.8.13A) - Weight: 21,2 Kg (BSH.8.13B)
BSH.8.15 WITH T, P AND A, B SIDE 1" BSP
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
8 CETOP 8/NG25
15 1" BSP side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 8,2 Kg
BSH.8.17 WITH P AND T REAR, A AND B SIDE 1" BSP, X AND Y REAR
BSH Single plate

for piloted valve
8 CETOP 8/NG25
17 1" BSP rear and

side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
File: BSH8001_E I • 60 00/2000/e

CDL.04.6... STACKABLE CIRCUIT
SELECTOR VALVES OFF-HIGHWAY
The stackable circuit selector valves, MACHINERY
type CDL.04.6, allows one single drive
of 5 users with 4 elements connected Max. pressure 250 bar
in series.
As they are moved from high perform-
ances solenoids they don’t need the
Max. flow
Overlap
Hydraulic fluids
20 l/min
positive
Mineral oils DIN 51524
1
external drainage. Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Additionally, beyond having a reduced Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
and compact dimensions, they can Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
CDL.04.6... manage high hydraulic powers with a NAS with 1638 with filter ß25≥75
"A09" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 67 minimal pressure drop. Weight see “Overall dimension”
CONNECTORS STANDARD CH. I PAGE 19
TAB.1 - A09 (27 W) COIL HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

DC VOLTAGE SINGLE ELEMENT
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
ORDERING CODE
W Without DC coil
CDL Stackable circuit selector valve their are readable on the coils.
* Special voltage MULTI STATION CONNECTION
04 Size NG04 • The AMP Junior coil and with the flying
leads (with or without diode) coils are avail-
6 No. of way able in 12V or 24V DC voltage only.
(single element) • The Deutsch coil with bidirectional diode
is available in 12V DC voltage only.
W Threaded connectors
1/4” BSP TAB. 2 - VARIANTI
VARIANTE CODE
I Internal drainage
No variant 00
* No. of elements: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Viton V1
Pilot light X1
Rectifier R1
* Voltage (Tab. 1) Solenoid valve without connectors S1
Cable gland "PG 11" C1
** Variants (Tab. 2) Viton + Pilot light VX
1 Serial No. Rotary emergency button P1(*)
Emergency button E1
AMP Junior connection AJ
Bobina con fili (250 mm) FL
with flying leads (130 mm) and integr. diode LD
Deutsch connection with bidir. diode CX
(*) P1 Emergency tightening torque
max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22 Other variants relate to a special design.
PRESSURE DROPS LIMITS OF USE

ΔP (bar)
P1 → C1
ΔP (bar)
P1 → C2 Energizing
P2 → C3 De-energizing
P2 → C4
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature and
a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature of 50 C°. The
fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 degrees C.
File: CDL04001_E I • 61 05/2010/e

CDL.04.6... STACKABLE CIRCUIT SELECTOR VALVES
OFF-HIGHWAY
MACHINERY
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Fixing screws with material specifications min. 8.8

Tighten the screws to a torque of 5 Nm (0.5 Kgm)
No. of No. of L Weight Fixing Kit spare part code*

elements way (Length) (Kg) screws (rods and studs)
1 06 46 1,05 - /
2 08 100 2,20 TCEI M5x95 V89.54.0020
3 10 145 3,30 TCEI M5x140 V89.54.0021
TCEI M5x194 (*) For multiple composition

4 12 200 4,45 V89.54.0022
(special rods) rods and studs are available.
Support plane
specifications
File: CDL04001_E I • 62 05/2010/e


of 6 users with 5 elements connected
in series.
Max. flow
Overlap
Hydraulic fluids
50 l/min
negative
1
external drainage.
This valves can manage high hydrau-
lic powers with a minimal pressure
drop.
NAS with 1638 with filter ß25≥75
CDL.06.6... Weight see “Overall dimension”
"40W" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 68
TAB.1 - 40W COIL HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
L 12V
M 24V
W Without DC coil
ORDERING CODE
CDL Stackable circuit selector valve
06 Size NG06 TAB.2 - VARIANTS MULTISTATION CONNECTION

No variant 00
6 No. of way
(single element) Viton V1
Pilot light X1
W Threaded connectors Rectifier R1
3/8” BSP Valve without connector (coil) S1
I Internal drainage Viton + Rectifier VR
Emergency button E1
* No. of elements: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
Rotary emergency button P1
Raccordements Deutsch DT04-2P CZ
* Voltage (Tab. 1)
** Variants (Tab. 2)
1 Serial No.
PRESSURE DROPS OVERALL DIMENSIONS

ΔP (bar)
Q (l/min)
P1 → C1, P1 → C2,
P2 →C3 et P2 →C4
The fluid used is a mineral oil with

a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C;
the tests have been carried out at No. of No. of A B C Weight Kit spare part code*
a fluid temperature of 40°C. elements way Lengths (mm) (Kg) (rods and studs)
1 06 54 69 - 3 /
2 08 123 138 160 6,3 V89.56.0001
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x60 3 10 192 207 226 9,3 V89.56.0002
4 12 261 276 296 12,3 V89.56.0003
5 14 330 345 365 25,3 V89.56.0004
Tightening torque for studs 8 Nm / 0.8 Kgm
Tightening torque for rods 20 Nm / 2 Kgm (*) For multiple composition rods and studs are available.
File: ADL06003_E I • 63 03/2008/e

ADL06.6... FLOW DIVERSION VALVES OFF-HIGHWAY
The 6 way flow diversion valves are

MACHINERY
special solenoid valves which allow
Max. pressure (without drainage, Y pluged) 250 bar
the simultaneous connection of two
Max. pressure (external drainage) 320 bar
1 systems.
In order to obtain valve's working at
pressure of 250 bar up to 320 bar
Max. flow
Overlap
Fluid viscosity
40 l/min
negative
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
(exeternal drainge) the G 1/8" BSP Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
plug must be removed to Y connector. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
ADL06.6... Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
"D15" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 67 with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight 2,4 Kg
TAB.2 - VOLTAGE DRAINS AND HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

ORDERING CODE D15 COIL (30W)
L 12V
ADL06 Flow diversion valves NG6 M 24V 115Vac/50Hz
V 28V* 120Vac/60Hz
6 No. of way
Z 102V* 230Vac/50Hz
W Threaded connectors 3/8"BSP P 110V* 240Vac/60Hz
with rectifier
X 205V*
W Without DC coils and connectors
I Without drainage Y connector pluged WITHOUT DRAINAGE - Y PLUGED
* Voltage (see table 1) * Special voltage
** Variants (see table 2) • AMP Junior (with or without diode) and

Deutsch and with flying leads coils, are
available in 12V or 24V DC voltage only.
3 Serial No.
• Plastic type coils are available in 12V,
24V, 28V or 110V DC voltage only.
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE
TAB.2 - VARIANTS
Viton V1
Pilot light X1
Rectifier R1
Emergency button E1
AMP Junior coil AJ
AMP Junior coil and integrated diode AD
Coil with flyning leads (175mm) SL
Deutsch DT04-2P Coil type CZ
for Plastic type coil BR
ning
Ope inage
dra
PRESSURE DROPS
Curve n° 1:
Δp (bar)
P1 → C1 1
P1 → C2
P2 → C3
P2 → C4
Q (l/min)
Support plane
specifications
File: ADL06003_E I • 64 07/2010/e


of 6 users with 5 elements connected
in series.
Max. flow
Overlap
Hydraulic fluids
80 l/min
negative
1
external drainage.
This valves can manage high hydrau-
lic powers with a minimal pressure
drop.
NAS with 1638 with filter ß25³75
CDL.10.6... Weight see “Overall dimension”
TAB.1 - A16 COIL HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
ORDERING CODE P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
CDL Stackable circuit selector valve X 205V* with rectifier
W Without DC coil
10 Size NG10 Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate,
their are readable on the coils. MULTISTATION CONNECTION
6 No. of way * Special voltage

(single element)
W Threaded connectors TAB.2 - VARIANTS

1/2” BSP No variant 00
I Internal drainage Viton V1
Pilot light X1
* No. of elements: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Rectifier R1
Valve without connector (coil) S1
* Voltage (Tab. 1)
** Variants (Tab. 2) Emergency button E1
1 Serial No.
PRESSURE DROPS OVERALL DIMENSIONS

ΔP (bar)
Q (l/min)
P1 → C1, P1 → C2,
P2 →C3 et P2 →C4
The fluid used is a mineral oil with

a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C;
the tests have been carried out at No. of No. of A B C Weight Kit spare part code*
a fluid temperature of 40°C. elements way Lengths (mm) (Kg) (rods and studs)
1 06 54 69 - 4,5 /
2 08 123 138 160 9,3 V89.56.0001
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M6x60 3 10 192 207 226 14 V89.56.0002
4 12 261 276 296 18,5 V89.56.0003
5 14 330 345 365 23,3 V89.56.0004
Tightening torque for studs 8 Nm / 0.8 Kgm
Tightening torque for rods 20 Nm / 2 Kgm (*) For multiple composition rods and studs are available.
File: CDL10001_E I • 65 02/2008/e

ADL10.6... FLOW DIVERSION VALVES
The 6 way flow diversion valves are
Max. pressure (without drainage, Y plugged) 250 bar
special solenoid valves which allow
Max. pressure (external drainage) 320 bar
the simultaneous connection of two
1
Max. flow 80 l/min
systems.
In order to obtain valve's working at Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
pressure of 250 bar up to 320 bar Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
(external drainage) the G 1/8" BSP Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
plug must be removed to Y connector. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight 3,6 Kg
ADL10.6...
TAB.1 - A16 COIL DRAINS AND HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
DC VOLTAGE
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
ORDERING CODE P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz

Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
ADL10 Flow diversion valves NG10
W Without DC coil
6 No. of way their are readable on the coils. WITHOUT DRAINAGE - Y PLUGGED
* Special voltage
J Connectors 3/4"BSP
I Without drainage Y connector plugged
* Voltage (see table 1)
** Variants (see table 2)
1 Serial No. EXTERNAL DRAINAGE
TAB.2 - VARIANTS
VARIANT CODE
Viton V1
Pilot light X1
Rectifier R1
Emergency button E1
PRESSURE DROPS
Opening for
drainage
Δp (bar)
Q (l/min)
Support plane
specifications
File: ADL10001_E I • 66 03/2000/e

"A09" DC COILS FOR CDL.04...
Supply tolerance
Ambient temperature
Duty cycle
±10%
-30°C ÷ 60°C
100% ED
DC voltage only.
• The Deutsch coil with
1

AMP JUNIOR (AJ) (V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±7%
12V 123°C 27 5.3
24V 123°C 27 21.3
48V* 123°C 27 85.3
102V* 123°C 27 392
110V* 123°C 27 448
205V* 123°C 27 1577
* Special voltages ETA09/AD2-CDL04-C3V - 04/2001/e
DEUTSCH COIL WITH FLYING LEADS (FL) E1 MANUAL P1(*) ROTARY

BIDIR. DIODE (CX) LEADS WITH DIODO (LD) EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
DT04 - 2P
(*) P1 Emergency tightening torque max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22
"D15" DC COILS FOR ADL06... AND A.66..

Supply tolerance ±10% available in 12V or 24V DC voltage
Ambient temperature -54°C ÷ 60°C only.
Duty cycle 100% ED • The pastic type coil (BR variant)
• Emergency, plastic coil, and Amp Junior, leads
or deutch coils, are not available for A66 valve.
PLASTIC COIL (BR) VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C
12V 110°C 30 4.8

24V 110°C 30 18.8
28V* 110°C 30 25.6
68,65
56,6
48V* 110°C 30 75.2

102V* 110°C 30 340
110V* 110°C 30 387
205V* 110°C 30 1375
57,9
(*) Special voltages ETD15/ADL06-A66 - 04/2001/e
FLYING WITH AMP JUNIOR (AJ) DEUTSCH E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY

LEADS COIL(SL) AJ + DIODE (AD) COIL (CZ) EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
DT04 - 2P
File: TA09D15_E I • 67 09/2010/e

"40W" DC COILS FOR CDL06...
Type of protection
(in relation to the connector used) IP 66
1 Supply tolerance
Ambient temperature
Duty cycle
+10% / -10%
-54°C ÷ 60°C
100% ED
Weight 0,354 Kg

12V 135°C 40 3.6
24V 135°C 40 14.4
IT40W - 02/2004/e
DEUTSCH E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY

(CZ) EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
DT04 - 2P
"A16" DC COILS FOR ADL10 AND CDL10
E1 MANUAL EMERGENCY P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY

Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,9 Kg

12V 106°C 45 3.2
24V 113°C 45 12,4
48V* - 45 -
102V* - 45 -
110V* 118°C 45 268
205V* - 45 -
(*) Special voltage ETA16 - 03/2002/e
File: T40WA16_E I • 68 08/2010/e

TECHNICAL PRESSURE CONTROL
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS
AP HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION SUBPLATE MOUNTING
AS PHASE LAG (DEGREES) PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES
C
CH
CH
STROKE (MM)
ACROSS FLATS
INTERNAL ACROSS FLATS
2
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING PV*.3 / PV*.U.3
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) CH. II PAGE 2
PARBAK PARBAK RING PV*.5 / PV*.U.5
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION CH. II PAGE 4
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN SUBPLATE MOUNTING
SF BALL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE
V.*.P
CH. II PAGE 6
V.*.L
CH. II PAGE 6
BS.VMP... P
Plant
CH. II PAGE 11

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 02TA_E II • 1 02/2010/e

PV*.3 / PV*.U.3 PRESSURE REDUCING AND
SEQUENCING VALVES CETOP 3/NG6
These subplate mounting piloted type Max. pressure 320 bar
pressure reducing and sequencing Setting ranges Spring 1 max. 60 bar
valves ensure a minimum variation in Spring 2 max. 120 bar
their calibrated pressure value with Spring 3 max. 250 bar
changing flow rate. Maximum allowed Δp pressure between
They are normally supplied with inter- the inlet and outlet pressure (PVR only) 150 bar
nal piloting and internal drainage on Max. flow 40 l/min
B, but they are already provided with Draining on port T 0.5 ÷ 0.7 l/min
2 PVR.3 / PVS.3... a hole on the front cover to allow for

external drainage.
They are available with two different
Hydraulic fluids
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
-25°C ÷ 75°C
types of adjustment and three cali- Max. contamination lever class 10 in accordance
brated ranges that cover pressure 7 ÷ with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
250 bar, with and without check valve. Weight (without check valve) 1,5 Kg
The adjustment is carried out by means Weight (with check valve) 2 Kg
of a grub screw or a metric plastic
knob.
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
PVR.3... PVS.3...
ORDERING CODE
PV* R = Reducing valve

S = Sequencing valve
U Check valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6 PVR.U.3... PVS.U.3...
* Type of adjustment:
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Setting ranges
1 = max. 60 bar (white spring)
2 = max. 120 bar (yellow spring)
3 = max. 250 bar (green spring) DIAGRAMS
PVR.3... / PVR.U.3... PVS.3... / PVS.U.3...
** 00 = No variant
PRESSURE - FLOW RATE PRESSURE - FLOW RATE
V1 = Viton
3 3
1 Serial No.
P (bar)
P (bar)
2
2
1
1
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
PVR.3... / PVR.U.3... PVS.3... / PVS.U.3...

MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
1-2-3
1
2
3
P (bar)
P (bar)
Curves n° 1 - 2 - 3 = setting ranges

The fluid used is a mineral oil with viscosity of
46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests were carried out
at a fluid temperature of 50°C. Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
File: PV$3001_E II • 2 01/2000/e

PV*.3 / PV*.U.3 PRESSURE REDUCING AND SEQUENCING VALVES
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
REDUCING VALVE SEQUENCING VALVE

PVR.3... CETOP 3/NG6 PVS.3... CETOP 3/NG6
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
C Grub screw Tightening torque 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
REDUCING VALVE WITH CHECK VALVE SEQUENCING VALVE WITH CHECK VALVE
PVR.U.3... CETOP 3/NG6 PVS.U.3... CETOP 3/NG6
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
File: PV$3001_E II • 3 01/2000/e

PV*.5 / PV*.U.5 PRESSURE REDUCING AND
SEQUENCING VALVES CETOP 5/NG10
These subplate mounting piloted type Max. pressure 320 bar
pressure reducing and sequencing Setting ranges Spring 1 max. 60 bar
valves ensure a minimum variation in Spring 2 max. 120 bar
their calibrated pressure value with Spring 3 max. 250 bar
changing flow rate. Maximum allowed Δp pressure between
They are normally supplied with inter- the inlet and outlet pressure (PVR only) 150 bar
nal piloting and internal drainage on Max. flow 90 l/min
B, but they are already provided with Draining on port T 0.5 ÷ 0.7 l/min
2 PVR.5 / PVS.5... a hole on the front cover to allow for

external drainage.
They are available with two different
Hydraulic fluids
Fluid viscosity
Fluid temperature
Ambient temperature
10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
-25°C ÷ 75°C
-25°C ÷ 60°C
types of adjustment and three cali- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
brated ranges that cover pressure 7 ÷ with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
250 bar, with and without check valve. Weight (without check valve) 3,8 Kg
The adjustment is carried out by means Weight (reducing valve with check valve) 4,2 Kg
of a grub screw or a metric plastic Weight (sequencing valve with check valve) 4,5 Kg
knob.
ORDERING CODE
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
PV* R = Reducing valve PVR.5... PVS.5...
S = Sequencing valve
U Check valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
* Type of adjustment: PVR.U.5... PVS.U.5...

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Setting ranges
3 = max. 250 bar (green spring)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton DIAGRAMS
PVR.5... / PVR.U.5... PVS.5... / PVS.U.5...
1 Serial No. PRESSURE - FLOW RATE PRESSURE - FLOW RATE
3
3
P (bar)
P (bar)
2 2
1 1
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
PVR.5... / PVR.U.5... PVS.5... / PVS.U.5...
MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
1-2-3
1
2
3
P (bar)
P (bar)

The fluid used is a mineral oil with viscosity of
46 mm2/s a 40°C. The tests were carried out at
a fluid temperature of 50°C. Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
File: PV$5001_E II • 4 00/2000/e

PV*.5 / PV*.U.5 PRESSURE REDUCING AND SEQUENCING VALVES
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
REDUCING VALVE SEQUENCING VALVE

PVR.5... CETOP 5/NG10 PVS.5... CETOP 5/NG10
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
REDUCING VALVE WITH CHECK VALVE SEQUENCING VALVE WITH CHECK VALVE
PVR.U.5... CETOP 5/NG10 PVS.U.5... CETOP 5/NG10
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
File: PV$5001_E II • 5 00/2000/e

V.*.P PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES PLATE
V.*.L PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES IN LINE
These pressure control valves are avail- Pressure max. 400 bar
able in the basic VMP* maximum pres- Setting ranges Spring 1 15 ÷ 45 bar
sure, VSP* sequence and VUP* exclu- Spring 2 15 ÷ 145 bar
sion versions, with a single pressure Spring 3 45 ÷ 400 bar
value and three calibration ranges that Max. flow V*P16... 150 l/min
cover the band 15 ÷ 400 bar. It is possi- Max. flow V*P25... 350 l/min
ble to use auxiliary pilot valves, which Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
can be the simple standard AD3E Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
solenoid valve, by the mere exchange
2 of covers. These valves have been
fitted with an important safety feature
for the operation of the system where
Fluid temperature
Ambient temperature
-25°C ÷ 75°C
-25°C ÷ 60°C
they are used; a mechanical end of Drainage V*P16... 1 ÷ 2 l/min
stroke stop prevents the operator from Drainage V*P25... 1 ÷ 2.5 l/min
setting pressure values higher than Dynamic pressure at drainage Max. 2 bar
those specified in the catalogue (it is Weight V*P16... (without pilot valve) 3,3 Kg
V.*.P / V.*.L... impossible to compress the spring com- Weight V*P25... (without pilot valve) 7,4 Kg
V.*.P... CH. II PAGE 7 pletely). In the standard configuration Weight V*L16... (without pilot valve) 4,6 Kg
these valves are supplied with a 1.6 Weight V*L161... (without pilot valve) 4,5 Kg
V.*.P.E... CH. II PAGE 8 bar main spring and with calibrated ø1 Weight V*L251... (without pilot valve) 7,7 Kg
V.*.L... CH. II PAGE 9/10 mm pilot feed orifice (Variant part No. Weight V*L25... (without pilot valve) 8,3 Kg
BS.VMP... CH. II PAGE 11 00).
KEC.16/25... CH. V PAGE 9 Subplate mounting valves are suitable
for covers which do not conform to DIN
C*P.16/25... CH. V PAGE 9 standards type C*P16/25.. whilst in line
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 8 mounting valves are suitable for DIN
STANDARD SPOOLS FOR AD.3.E CH. I PAGE 10 standards covers type KEC16/25...
AD.3.E... CH. I PAGE 11 PRESSURE - FLOW V.*.16 PRESSURE - FLOW V.*.P.25
AM.3.VM... CH. IV PAGE 9
P (bar)
P (bar)
ORDERING CODE
V Valve
* M = maximum pressure
S = sequence Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
U = exclusion (areas rep. 1,15 : 1) The fluid used is a mineral oil with viscosity of 46 mm /s at 40°C.2
The tests were carried out at a fluid temperature 40°C.

* P = Plate mounting
L = In line mounting
* E = Presetting for solenoid valve HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

Not for sequencing valve V.S.P...
(omit if not required) V.M.P.16.**...
V.M.P.25.**...
*** Size (see overall dimensions) Maximum pressure
16 - 25 = NG16 or NG25 valve
161 - 251 = for V.*.L... only Internal piloting
and draining
(in line mounting valve)
* Type of adjustment: V.S.P.16.**...

M = Plastic knob V.S.P.25.**...
C = Grub screw
Sequencing valve
* Setting ranges Internal piloting
External draining
1 = 15 ÷ 45 bar (white spring)
2 = 15 ÷ 145 bar (yellow spring)
3 = 45 ÷ 400 bar (green spring)
** 00 = No variant V.U.P.16.**...
V1 = Viton V.U.P.25.**...
AC = Exclusion valve for Exclusion valve
accumulators (only for VU*.**) External piloting
AQ = Presetting for XP3 Internal draining
2 Serial No.
File: V$$002_E II • 6 05/2000/e

V.*.P... PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES PLATE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS V.*.P.16...
VERSION WITH
PRESETTING FOR
SOLENOID VALVE
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M12x40 with material specifications min. 8.8
Tightening torque 70 Nm / 7 Kgm
Support plane
M = 1/4" BSP connector for pressure gauge for maximum pressure valve version only specifications
Y = 1/8" BSP external draining for sequencing valve version only
OVERALL DIMENSIONS V.*.P.25...
VERSION WITH
PRESETTING FOR
SOLENOID VALVE
Tightening torque 70 Nm / 7 Kgm Support plane
specifications
M = 1/4" BSP connector for pressure gauge for maximum pressure valve version only
File: V$$002_E II • 7 05/2000/e

V.*.P.E... PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES PLATE
MOUNTING TYPE V.*.P.E...

V.*.P.E... +
AD.3.E.15.E... OR AD.3.E.16.E...
1) Solenoid de-energized, pump to tank.
2 ) Solenoid energized, circuit pressure control-
led by valve on cover.
2 For mounting valves to have normally discharged

configuration it is necessary to use an
AD.3.E.15.F.. or AD.3.E.16.F... type solenoid
valve, whilst for subplate mounting valves it is
necessary to use type AD.3.E.15.E.. or
AD.3.E.16.E.
V.*.P.E... +
AD.3.E.15.F... OR AD.3.E.16.F...
1) Solenoid de-energized, pump pressure con-
trolled by valve on cover.
2 ) Solenoid B energized, pump to tank.
V.*.P.E... + AM.3.VM.B... +
AD.3.E.15.E... OR AD.3.16.E...
2 ) Solenoid energized, pump pressure control-
led by valve AM.3.VM.B.
V.*.P.E... + AM.3.VM.B... +
AD.3.E.02.C...
1) Solenoid de-energized, pump to tank.
2 ) Solenoid A energized, pump pressure con-
trolled by valve AM.3.VM.B.
3) Solenoid B energized, pump pressure con-
V.*.P.E... + AM.3.VM.B... +
AD.3.E.01.C...
2 ) Solenoid A energized, pump pressure con-
trolled by valve AM.3.VM.AB.
3) Solenoid B energized, pump pressure con-
trolled by valve AM.3.VM.AB.
File: V$$002_E II • 8 05/2000/e

V.*.L... PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES IN LINE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS V.*.L.16...

1/2" BSP P connector
3/4" BSP T connector
VERSION WITH PRESETTING FOR SOLENOID VALVE

3/4" BSP P and T connectors
File: V$$002_E II • 9 05/2000/e

V.*.L... PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES IN LINE

1" BSP P connector
1 1/4" BSP T connector
Fixing screws UNI 5931

M8x110 with material specifications min. 8.8 VERSION WITH PRESETTING FOR SOLENOID VALVE

1 1/4" BSP P connector
1 1/2" BSP T connector

M8x120 with material specifications min. 8.8
File: V$$002_E II • 10 05/2000/e

BS.VMP... SUBPLATE MOUNTING FOR V.*.P
BS.VMP.16... CONNECTORS: P = 1/2'' BSP - T = 3/4'' BSP - X = 1/4'' BSP
BS Single plate
VMP Maximum pressure
16
00
Size NG16
No variant
2
1 Serial No.
Weight: 2,2 Kg
BS.VMP.25... CONNECTORS: P AND T = 3/4'' BSP - X = 1/4'' BSP
BS Single plate
VMP maximum pressure
25 Size NG25
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3,6 Kg
BS.VMP.25/1... CONNECTORS: P AND T = 1'' BSP - X = 1/4'' BSP
BS Single plate
VMP maximum pressure
25/1 Size NG25
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 4,2 Kg
File: BSVMP001_E II • 11 02/2000/e

2
File: BSVMP001_E II • 12 02/2000/e

TECHNICAL FLOW CONTROL
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS COMPENSATED FLOW
AP HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION REGULATORS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F
I%
FORCE (N)
INPUT CURRENT (A)
3
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING
PARBAK PARBAK RING
QC.3.2...
CH. III PAGE 2
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
QC.3.3...
CH. III PAGE 3
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
CHECK VALVE HOLDER
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE FOR REGULATORS

technical specifications must therefore be AM.3.ABU... .
examined and checked by members of the CH. III PAGE 4
Plant

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 03TA_E III • 1 02/2010/e

QC.3.2... 2 WAY COMPENSATED
FLOW RATE REGULATORS
These QC.3.2... compensated flow Max. operating pressure 320 bar
rate regulators are designed to control Opening pressure (with bypass) 1 bar
and maintain a constant irrespective Min. regulated flow rate (Q1 version) 0.03 ÷ 0.05 l/min
of the pressure variations upstream Nominal regulated flow rate
and downstream of the regulation (1 turn version) 1,5 ÷ 30 l/min
section. Their new cast construction Nominal regulated flow rate
has made it possible to obtain a wider (4 turns version) 1,5 ÷ 35 l/min
flow rate range, taking the upper limit Difference in pressure (Δp) for vers. Q1 3 bar
to 35 l/min (4 turns version) while Difference in pressure (Δp) Q2-Q3-Q4-Q5-Q6 8 bar
maintaining unchanged the pressure Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
differential required to obtain good Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
pressure compensation. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
All models are available with and with- Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
out reverse flow check valve, com- Max. contamination level(*) class 10 in accordance
3 OVERALL DIMENSIONS
QC.3.2...
CH. III PAGE 4
plete with an "anti-jump" device on
request. This accessory has been
designed to eliminate the problem
Dependency on temperature (Q1 vers.)
5%
3%
which manifests itself as a "anti-jump" Dependency on temperature (Q3-Q4-Q5-Q6) 2%
in the controlled actuator due to the Weight 1,5 Kg
instantaneous flow rate variation that (*) Max contamination level must be respect to obtain
takes place under the form of a tran- the right function of the valve
sient every time the flow is made to
pass through the regulator.
ORDERING CODE HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

QC Compensated flow rate regulated
3 CETOP 3/NG6
2 2 way
G Anti-jump system with internal

check valve (omit if not required)
** Nominal flow rate ranges

1 Turn version 4 Turn version
Q1 = 1,5 l/min Q1 = 1,5 l/min
Q2 = 3 l/min Q2 = 4 l/min
Q3 = 9 l/min Q3 = 10 l/min
QC.3.2... QC.3.2.**.*.R QC.3.2.G.**.*.R
Q4 = 19 l/min Q4 = 21 l/min
Q5 = 24 l/min Q5 = 28 l/min
Q6 = 30 l/min Q6 = 35 l/min DIAGRAMS
REGULATED FLOW RATE REGULATED FLOW RATE
K Version with lock 1 TURN VERSION 4 TURNS VERSION
(omit if not required) 6
6
* 1 = 1 turn version 5
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
4 = 4 turns version 5 4
R With internal check valve 4
(omit if not required) 3

3
2
2
** 00 = No variant 1
1
V1 = Viton
No. of turns of knob No. of turns of knob
5 Serial No.
FLOW RATE - INLET PRESSURE FREE FLOW THROUGH
CHECK VALVE
Q (l/min)
Δp (bar)
P (bar) Q (l/min)
File: QC32005_E III • 2 02/2009/e

QC.3.3... 3 WAY COMPENSATED
FLOW RATE REGULATORS
This regulator type can be used when- Max. operating pressure 320 bar
ever it is necessary to obtain a con- Opening pressure (with bypass) 1 bar
stant fluid flow irrespective of the pres- Min. regulated
sure variations present upstream or flow rate (Q1 version) 0.03 ÷ 0.05 l/min
downstream. It is fitted with a third T Nominal regulated
line for discharging any excessive flow flow rate 1 ÷ 22 l/min
rate. Difference in pressure (Δp) for vers. Q1 3 bar
Difference in pressure (Δp) Q2-Q3-Q4-Q5-Q6 8 bar
When the reverse flow check valve is Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
needed, the check valve holder type Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
"AM.3.ABU.3..."can be fitted under- Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
neath the valve. (The check valve Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
holder must be ordered separately Max. contamination level(*) class 10 in accordance
see page III•4) with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
QC.3.3...
CH. III PAGE 4
Dependency on temperature (Q3-Q4-Q5)
5%
3%
2%
3
AM.3.ABU... CH. III PAGE 4
Weight 1,5 Kg
(*) Max contamination level must be respect to obtain
the right function of the valve

QC Compensated flow rate regulator
3 CETOP 3/NG6
3 3 way
** Flow rate ranges

Q1 = 1 l/min QC.3.3...
Q2 = 3 l/min
Q3 = 9 l/min QC.3.3... + AM.3.ABU
Q4 = 17 l/min
Q5 = 24 l/min
DIAGRAMS
K Version with lock
(omit if not required) REGULATED FLOW RATE FLOW RATE - PRESSURE DROP
5
* 1 = 1 turn version
4 = 4 turns version 4
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton 3
3 Serial No. 2
1
No. of turns of knob P (bar)
ΔP - PUMP FLOW RATE

Δp (bar)
Q (l/min)
File: QC33003_E III • 3 00/2000/e

QC.3.2... QC.3.3... COMPENSATED FLOW RATE REGULATORS
QC.3.2... 2 WAY FLOW RATE REGULATOR QC.3.3... 3 WAY FLOW RATE REGULATOR
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x40 Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x40
are supplied by Aron with are supplied by Aron with
material specifications min. 12.9 material specifications min. 12.9
Tightening torque 6.5÷7 Nm / 0.65÷0.70 Kgm Tightening torque 6.5÷7 Nm / 0.65÷0.70 Kgm
File: ETQC3$00$ 00/2000/e
AM.3.ABU... CHECK VALVE HOLDER

FOR REGULATORS TYPE QC.3...
This check valve holder must be fitted underneath the QC valve when he reverse flow function is needed.
ORDERING CODE
AM Modulating valve
3 CETOP 3/NG06
ABU External check valve

for QC.3.*.
3 For 2 way and 3 way
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,4 Kg
Fixing screws for regulator and modular check valve M5x60 UNI 5931 - 12.9 K
File: AM3ABU001_E III • 4 01/2010/e

TECHNICAL MODULAR VALVES
CATALOGUE MODULAR VALVES
ARON 2010 CETOP 2
ABBREVIATIONS
AS PHASE LAG (DEGREES) MODULAR VALVES
BP LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION CETOP 3
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
AM.2.UD...
CH. IV PAGE 2
AM.2.UP...
NG KNOB TURNS
4
CH. IV PAGE 3
OR SEAL RING
AM.2.VM... AM.3.UD...
CH. IV PAGE 4 CH. IV PAGE 7
PARBAK PARBAK RING
AM.2.QF... AM.3.UP / AM.3.UP1
SCREWS AND STUDS AM.3.VM... / AM.3.VI...
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN AM.3.CP...
SF BALL CH. IV PAGE 11
MODULAR VALVES AM.3.RD... / AM.3.SD...
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE AM.3.VR...
CH. IV PAGE 13
catalogue may cause harm to personnel and AM.3.VS...
equipment. The technical information given CH. IV PAGE 15
AM.3.SH...
reserves the right to make constructional CH. IV PAGE 16
modifications without giving prior notice. Each AM.3.QF...
CH. IV PAGE 17
examined and checked by members of the AM.66...
user's staff (possessing suitable technical CH. IV PAGE 18
AM.5.UD... A.66...
operating conditions of each product in relation AM.5.UP... AM.3.RGT...
to the application that he intends to use it for, CH. IV PAGE 23 CH. IV PAGE 20
analysing the data, features and technical SCREWS AND STUDS
specifications in view of the proposed AM.5.VM... / AM.5.VI...
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the CH. IV PAGE 24 CH. IV PAGE 21
product, all of the conditions relating to the AM.5.CP...
event of breakdown, are respected. CH. IV PAGE 26
AM.5.VR... MODULAR VALVES
CH. IV PAGE 27 CETOP 7
AM.5.VS...
CH. IV PAGE 29
AM.5.SH...
CH. IV PAGE 30
AM.5.QF...
CH. IV PAGE 31
Plant AM.88...
Via Natta, 1 (Z.I. Mancasale) CH. IV PAGE 32
42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) A.88...
Tel. +39 0522 5058 CH. IV PAGE 33
Fax +39 0522 505856 AM.5.RGT... AM.7.UP...
General terms and conditions of sale: SCREWS AND STUDS AM.7.QF...
File: 04TA_E IV • 1 01/2000/e

AM.2.UD... MODULAR DIRECT
CHECK VALVES CETOP 2
AM.2.UD type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 250 bar
allow one way free flow, while pre- Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
venting any flow in the opposite direc- Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
tion by means of a conical seated Max. flow 20 l/min
poppet. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°C
They are available on single P and T Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
AM.2.UD... lines (see hydraulic symbols). Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 6 with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
1 bar spring is standard, while a 5 bar Weight 0,4 Kg
rated spring is available on request.

AM Modular valve
2 CETOP 2/NG4
AM.2.UD.P
UD Direct check valve
4 * Control on lines P / T
* Minimum opening AM.2.UD.T

pressure
1 = 1 bar
5 = 5 bar
** 00 = No variant PRESSURE DROPS

V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
5b
Δp (bar) ar
ar
1b
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM2UD001_E IV • 2 00/2000/e

AM.2.UP... MODULAR PILOT
OPERATED CHECK VALVES CETOP 2
AM.2.UP type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 250 bar
allow one way free flow by raising a Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
conical shutter, while in the opposite Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
direction the fluid can return by means Piloting ratio: 1:4
of a small piston piloted by the pres- Max. flow 20 l/min
sure in the other line. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
They are available on single A or B Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°C
AM.2.UP... Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
lines, and on double A and B lines
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 6 (see hydraulic symbols ). Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
Weight 0,5 Kg
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
AM
2
Modular valve
CETOP 2/NG4
4
AM.2.UP.A
Δp (bar)
UP Piloted check valve

r
ar ba
5b 1
** Control on lines A / B / AB
3
* Minimum opening AM.2.UP.B

pressure
1 = 1 bar Q (l/min)
5 = 5 bar
Curve n. 3 = Piloted side flow
** 00 = No variant AM.2.UP.AB
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM2UP001_E IV • 3 01/2000/e

AM.2.VM... MODULAR MAXIMUM
PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 2
AM.2.VM type pressure regulating Max. operating pressure 250 bar
valves are available with an operating Setting ranges:
pressure range of 4 to 250 bar. spring 1 30 bar
Adjustment is via a grub screw. Two spring 2 90 bar
base versions are available: spring 3 180 bar
AM.2.VM.. single on A or B, and dou- spring 4 250 bar
AM.2.VM...
ble on A and B lines, with drainage on Max. flow 20 l/min
CMP.02... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE T; AM.3.VM.P.. single on P line, with Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 6 drainage on T. Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°C
4 different types of springs can be Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
mounted on all versions, with the ad- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
justment range specified in the speci- with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
fications. The cartridge used is the Weight AM.2.VM.A/B/P... 0,53 Kg
CMP.02 type. Weight AM.2.VM.AB... 0,7 Kg
ORDERING CODE
AM Modular valve
2 CETOP 2/NG4 PRESSURE - FLOW RATE HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
4 VM Max. pressure valves

4
3
** Adjustment on the lines
A / B / P / AB AM.2.VM.A
P (bar)
C Type of adjustment 2
grub screw 1
* Setting ranges at port A/B/P AM.2.VM.B

1 = max.30 bar (white spring)
2 = max.90 bar (yellow spring) Q (l/min)
3 = max.180 bar (green spring)
4 = max.250 bar (orange spring)
AM.2.VM.P
* Setting ranges at port B MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
(Omit if the setting is same 4
as that at port A)
1 = max.30 bar (white spring)
1
2 = max.90 bar (yellow spring) 2
3 = max.180 bar (green spring) 3
AM.2.VM.AB
P (bar)
4 = max.250 bar (orange spring)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.2.VM.AB... AM.2.VM.A/B/P...
Support plane
specifications
File: AM2VM001_E IV • 4 01/2010/e

AM.2.QF... MODULAR
FLOW REGULATOR CETOP 2
AM.2.QF type one way non-compen- Max. operating pressure 250 bar
sated throttle valves are adjustable by Flow rate regulation on 6 screw turns
means of a grub screw. Max. flow. 20 l/min
Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
Three types of regulations are avail- Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°C
able on A / B / AB lines, as shown in Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
the hydraulic symbols. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
AM.2.QF... with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 6 Weight AM.2.QF.A/B... 0,5 Kg
Weight AM.2.QF.AB... 0,6 Kg
FREE FLOW
FLOW REGULATION THROUGH CHECK VALVE
ORDERING CODE Δp (bar) 4
Δp (bar)
AM Modular valve
2 CETOP 2/NG4
QF Non-compensated flow rate regulator Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
** Control on lines
A / B / AB
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
C Type of adjustment
grub screw
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
AM.2.QF.A AM.2.QF.B AM.2.QF.AB
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM2QF001_E IV • 5 00/2000/e

TABLE OF SCREWS AND STUDS FOR MOUNTING MODULES CETOP 2
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Tighten M27.05.0001 to a torque of 5 Nm / 0.5 Kgm max.
SCREWS CODE T.C.E.I L L1 COMPOSITION Qty.

Q26.07.4069 35 / AD2... 4
Q26.07.4243 65 30 AD2... + 1 AM2... (ISO) 4
Q26.07.4252 95 60 AD2... + 2 AM2... (ISO)
STUDS CODE L L1 COMPOSITION SPECIAL NUTS CODE Qty.
M80.10.0008 135 90 AD2... + 3 AM2... M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0020 165 120 AD2... + 4 AM2... M27.05.0001 4
File: TAMTR002_E IV • 6 00/2000/e

AM.3.UD type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 350 bar
allow one way free flow, while flow in Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
the opposite direction is prevented by Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
means of a conical seated poppet. Max. flow 40 l/min
They are available on single A, B, P Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°
and T lines, and on double A and B, P Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
AM.3.UD... and T lines (see hydraulic symbols). Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
1 bar spring is standard, while a 5 bar with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
rated spring is available on request. Weight 0,8 Kg
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS

AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6 5 bar
Δp (bar)
** Control on lines
A / B / P / T / AB 1 bar
* Minimum opening pressure

1 = 1 bar Q (l/min)
5 = 5 bar
** 00 = No variant
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
AM.3.UD.A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.3.UD.B
AM.3.UD.P
AM.3.UD.T
AM.3.UD.AB
Support plane
specifications
K = OR plate
File: AM3UD002_E IV • 7 01/2000/e

AM.3.UP... / AM.3.UP1... MODULAR
PILOT OPERATED CHECK VALVES CETOP 3
AM.3.UP type modular check valves
Max. operating pressure 350 bar
allow free flow in one direction by
Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
raising a conical seated poppet valve,
Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
while in the opposite direction the
Piloting ratio AM.3.UP 1:4
fluid can return by means of a small
Piloting ratio AM.3.UP1 1:12,5
piston piloted by the other line pres-
Max. flow 40 l/min
sure (piloted side).
AM.3.UP / AM.3.UP1... Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
They are available on single A or B Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 lines, and double A and B lines (see Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
hydraulic symbols). Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
A pre-opening version is also avail-
able (AM3UP1..) only with 5 bar spring.
Weight 1 Kg
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS PRESSURE DROPS AM3UP
4 AM.3.UP.A
Δp (bar)
ORDERING CODE
r
ba
3
ar
1
5b
AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6 AM.3.UP.B
** UP = Piloted check valve Q (l/min)

UP1 = With pre-opening
PRESSURE DROPS AM3UP1
** Control on lines A / B / AB AM.3.UP.AB
* Minimum opening
pressure
1 = 1 bar (only for UP version)
3
5 = 5 bar
Δp (bar)
ar
** 00 = No variant 5b
V1 = Viton
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of
3 Serial No. 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have been carried
out a fluid temperature of 50°C. Q (l/min)
Curve n. 3 = Piloted side flow

OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM3UP$003_E IV • 8 03/2008/e

AM.3.VM... / AM.3.VI... MODULAR
MAX. PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 3
valves are available with a pressure Setting ranges: spring 1 max. 50 bar
range of 2 ÷ 320 bar. spring 2 max. 150 bar
Adjustment is by means of a grub spring 3 max. 320 bar
screw or a plastic knob. Max. flow 40 l/min
Three basic versions are available: Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
- AM3VM on single A or B lines, and Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
on A and B lines, with drainage to T; Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
- AM3VMP on single P line, with Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
drainage to T; with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
- AM3VI on single A or B lines, and on Weight AM.3.VM.A/B/P... 1,2 Kg
A and B lines, with crossed drainage Weight AM.3.VM.AB... 1,3 Kg
on A or B (see hydraulic symbols). Weight AM.3.VI.A/B... 2 Kg
AM.3.VM / AM.3.VI... All versions can accept three types of Weight AM.3.VI.AB... 2,2 Kg
springs with calibrated ranges as
CMP.10... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE
shown in the specifications.
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21
The cartridge, which is the same for all
versions, is the direct acting type
CMP10.
For the minimum permissible set-
ting pressure depending on the
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS 4
spring, see minimum pressure set-
ting curve.
ORDERING CODE AM.3.VM.A
AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6
PRESSURE - FLOW RATE
AM.3.VM.B
** VM = Maximum pressure
3
VI = Maximum pressure crossline

AM.3.VM Version = A / B / P / AB
P (bar)
AM.3.VI Version = A / B / AB AM.3.VM.P

2
* Type of adjustment
M = Plastic knob 1
C = Grub screw
AM.3.VM.AB
* Setting ranges at port A/B/P Q (l/min)
MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE AM.3.VI.A
* Setting ranges at port B
as that at port A)
2 = max. 150 bar (yellow spring) AM.3.VI.B
P (bar)

2
V1 = Viton
AM.3.VI.AB
3 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
File: AM3V$003_E IV • 9 04/2010/e

AM.3.VM.../AM.3.VI... MODULAR MAX. PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 3
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.3.VM.AB...
4 Type of adjustment
Support plane
M Plastic knob specifications
C Grub screw
AM.3.VM.P...
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob Support plane

specifications
C Grub screw
AM.3.VI.AB...
Type of adjustment

specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM3V$003_E IV • 10 04/2010/e

AM.3.CP... MODULAR BACK
PRESSURE VALVE CETOP 3
AM3CP type back pressure valves Max. operating pressure 350 bar
are damped in-line direct acting pres- Setting ranges: spring 1 max. 50 bar
sure relief valves fitted with bypass spring 2 max. 150 bar
non-return valves. spring 3 max. 320 bar
Adjustment within the range Max. flow 40 l/min
2 ÷ 320 bar is by means of a grub Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
screw or a plastic knob, on ports A or Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
AM.3.CP... Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
B (single) or AB (double).
CMP.10... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 The cartridge is the direct acting type Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
CMP10. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
These valves are especially used on Weight AM.3.CP.A/B... 2 Kg
vertically working cylinders with drag- Weight AM.3.CP.AB... 2,7 Kg
ging loads.
For the minimum permissible set- PRESSURE - FLOW RATE
ORDERING CODE ting pressure depending on the
spring, see minimum pressure set- 3
AM Modular valve ting curve.
3 CETOP 3/NG6 4
P (bar)
2
CP Back pressure valve
** Control on lines A / B / AB 1
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
M = Plastic knob Q (l/min)
C = Grub screw
* Setting ranges AM.3.CP.A

MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
3
** 00 = No variant AM.3.CP.B
V1 = Viton
P (bar)
2
3 Serial No.
1
AM.3.CP.AB
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Type of adjustment

specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM3CP003_E IV • 11 03/2010/e

AM.3.RD... /AM.3.SD... MODULAR PRESSURE
REDUCING / PRESSURE SEQUENCING VALVES CETOP 3
AM3RD and AM3SD valves are direct Max. operating pressure: port P 350 bar
acting spool type pressure reducing Max. pressure adjustable 250 bar
and sequencing units, respectively, Setting ranges: spring 1 2 ÷ 30 bar
with one end pre-loaded by means of spring 2 10 ÷ 120 bar
a spring an the other end exposed to spring 3 60 ÷ 250 bar
the hydraulic pressure. Max. flow 40 l/min
The drainage is drained within the Internal drainage RD:
AM.3.RD / AM.3.SD... valve to port T. Pressure is adjustable Positive overlap version 0,5 l/min
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 by means of a screw and locknut, or of Negative overlap version 2 l/min
a handwheel. Three types of springs Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
allow adjustment within the range Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
2÷250 bar. The pressure reducing Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
valves are available in two versions: Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
with positive overlap (suitable with Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
ORDERING CODE low flow rate) and with negative over- with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
lap to obtain a greater pressure rein- Weight 1,3 Kg
AM Modular valve statement speed.
3 CETOP 3/NG6
4 ** RD = Direct pressure reducing valve

SD = Direct pressure sequencing valve PRESSURE - FLOW RATE PRESSURE - FLOW RATE
AM3RD AM3SD
* Control on lines
3
AM.3.RD version = A / P
AM.3.SD version = P
3
* 1 = Positive overlap
2 = Negative overlap
Pr (bar)
P (bar)
2
Omit for version AM3SD
2
1 1
C = Grub screw
V = Handwheel
Relieving ← Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
* Setting ranges 2
The fluid used is a mineral based oil with a viscosity of 46 mm /sec at 40 degrees C.
1 = max. 2 ÷ 30 bar (white spring)
The tests have been carried out at with a fluid temperature of 40 degrees C.
2 = max. 10 ÷ 120 bar (yellow spring)
3 = max. 60 ÷ 250 bar (green spring)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
4 Serial No.
AM.3.RD.A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.3.RD.P
Type of adjustment
AM.3.SD.P
V Handwheel
C Grub screw
Application
example
Support plane
specifications
File: AM3$D004_E IV • 12 01/2000/e

AM.3.VR... MODULAR REDUCING VALVES
WITH RELIEVING - PILOT OPERATED CETOP 3
These pressure reducing valves en-
sure a minimum pressure variation on
Setting ranges: spring 1 max. 60 bar
the P or A port with changing flow rate
spring 2 max. 120 bar
up to 90 l/min.
Three spring types allow adjustment Maximum allowed Δ Δp pressure
within the range 7 ÷ 250 bar. Manual between the inlet an outlet pressure 150 bar
adjustment is available by a grub screw Max. flow 40 l/min
AM.3.VR...
or plastic knob. Draining on port T 0,5 ÷ 0,7 l/min
CVR.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
The RELIEVING SYSTEM inside the
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
valve AM3VR allows the passage from
the setting pressure line to T line of the
flow through the valve to avoid the
increasing of pressure in the reduced-
pressure line by diverting exceeding
Weight 1,36 Kg
flow to reservoir. A bypass module
Weight bypass version 2 Kg
with check valve for free flow from A to
AR port (see hydraulic symbol) is avail-
able..
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
AM
ORDERING CODE
Modular valve
4
3 CETOP 3/NG6
VR Pilot operated pressure AM.3.VR.P... AM.3.VR.A... AM.3.VR.D...

reducing valve with relieving
* Control on lines
P = Drain on T AM.3.VR.A... +
A = Drain on T Bypass
D = Drain on B reduct pressure on A Version with check valve
* Drain connection
E = External (only for
control on the P line)
I = Internal (Standard) PRESSURE-FLOW RATE PRESSURE-FLOW OF RELIEVING
B Version with bypass

3
on line A only 3
Omit if not required
P (bar)
* Type of adjustment 2
P (bar)
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw 2 1
* Setting ranges
1 = max. 60 bar (white spring) 1

Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No ΔP AM.3.VR... + BYPASS MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
1
2
3
ΔP (bar)
P (bar)
To changes valves AM.3.VR.P... from inter-

nal to external drainage it is necessary:
- screw out the plug on the "Y" port
- screw out the plug T.C.E.I. M8x1 from the
body
- screw in a screw S.T.E.I. M6
- rescrew the T.C.E.I. M8x1 plug on the
body Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
NOTE: the external draining can be used as Curves n° 1 - 2 - 3 = setting ranges
a piloting line (please, contact our Techni-
cal Service for other informations) The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have been
carried out a fluid temperature of 50°C.
File: AM3VR001_E IV • 13 03/2010/e

AM.3.VR... MODULAR REDUCING VALVES WITH RELIEVING - PILOT OPERATED CETOP 3
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.3.VR.P... / AM.3.VR.D...
AM.3.VR.A... + BYPASS
B Bypass (optional)
Ordering code:
V89.45.000
(if ordered separately)
Type of adjustment
Support plane
M Plastic knob
specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM3VR001_E IV • 14 03/2010/e

AM.3.VS... MODULAR
SEQUENCING VALVES CETOP 3
The sequence valve are used to as- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
sure that a secondary circuit is pres- Setting ranges: Spring 1 max. 60 bar
surized when the setting pressure is Spring 2 max. 120 bar
reached. Spring 3 max. 250 bar
These valves grant a minimum varia- Max. flow 40 l/min
tion of the setting pressure with a Draining on port T 0,5 ÷ 0,7 l/min
changing flow up to 40 l/min (see Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
AM.3.VS... Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
diagram).
CVS.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 Three spring types allow adjustment Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
within the range 7 ÷ 250 bar. Manual Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
adjustment is available by a grub screw with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
or plastic knob. Weight 1,36 Kg
The cartridge used is the "CVS" type.
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
ORDERING CODE
AM
3
Modular valve
CETOP 3/NG6
4
VS Sequencing valve
* Drain connection
E = External
I = Internal (Standard)
* Type of adjustment PRESSURE-FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE

M = Plastic knob 1-2-3
C = Grub screw
3
* Setting ranges
P (bar)
P (bar)

3 = max. 250 bar (green spring) 2
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS Curves n° 1 - 2 - 3 = setting ranges
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a

viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests
have been carried out at a fluid
temperature of 50°C.
To changes valves AM.3.VS... from internal to exter-

nal drainage it is necessary:
- screw out the plug on the Y port
- screw out the plug T.C.E.I. M8x1 from the body
- rescrew the T.C.E.I. M8x1 plug on the body
NOTE: the external draining can be used as a piloting
line (please, contact our Technical Service for other
informations)
Type of adjustment
Support plane
M Plastic knob
specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM3VS001_E IV • 15 03 /2010/e

AM.3.SH... MODULAR
SHUTTLE VALVES CETOP 3
Modular valves type AM.3.SH are Max. operating pressure 350 bar
actuator load pressure selecting units, Max. flow at the cartridge 3 l/min
as they are fitted with an integral shut- Max. flow at ports A/B/P/T 40 l/min
tle valve cartridge which allows taking Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
of the highest pressure signal to the Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
external port via displacement of a Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
ball. They are usually employed to Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
signal the actuator load to the pres- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
sure compensator of load sensing with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
AM.3.SH... pump, or for the command of fail-safe Weight 1 Kg
SH.03... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE brakes. Cartridge tightening torque 20÷30 Nm/2÷3 Kgm
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 For seat overall dimensions see car-
tridge shuttle SH.03 type.
4 ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS

ON THE SHUTTLE VALVE
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6
SH Cartridge shuttle
Δp (bar)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM3SH001_E IV • 16 02/2010/e

AM.3.QF... MODULAR
AM.3.QF type one way non-compen-
sated throttle valve are fitted with an
Max. pressure adjustable 250 bar
O-Ring mounting plate which allows
Flow rate regulation on 8 screw turns
its assembly for either input or output
Max. flow 40 l/min
regulation. Adjustment is obtained by
means of a grub screw or a plastic
knob. They are available in the four
AM.3.QF... regulating configurations shown in the
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 hydraulic diagrams.
The standard valve configuration al- with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
lows "meter in" regulation, while it is Weight 1,5 Kg
possible to obtain "meter out" regula-
tion by turning the valve by 180° along
its longitudinal axis.
ORDERING CODE FLOW REGULATION FREE FLOW

TOWARDS CHECK VALVE
AM
3
Modular valve
CETOP 3/NG6
Δp (bar) 4
QF Non compensated throttle valve
Δp (bar)
** Control on lines
A / B / P / AB
M = Plastic knob Q (l/min)
C = Grub screw Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
4 Serial No.
AM.3.QF.A AM.3.QF.B AM.3.QF.P AM.3.QF.AB
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
C Grub screw
Support plane
specifications
File: AM3QF004_E IV • 17 02/2000/e

AM.66... MODULAR COMPENSATED
FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY CETOP 3
This is an intermediate block (AM.66) Max. operating pressure 320 bar
for modular mounting of one or two Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
flow rate regulators type QC.3... Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
The flow regulator type QC.3.2... Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
must be ordered separately. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
Weight 1,3 Kg
AM.66... HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

QC.3.2... CH. III PAGE 2
AM.66.A AM.66.B AM.66.AB
4
ORDERING CODE
AM.66.P AM.66.PT* AM.66.T
AM Modular valve
66 Size
** Control on lines
A / B / P / PT* / AB AM.66.A1 AM.66.B1 AM.66.A1B1
For T / A1 / B1 / A1B1 versions
see table "Hydraulic symbols"
→ T drain)
PT * = From line towards exhaust (P→
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton • In order to obtain versions with regulation on T, the AM.66.P regulator carrying block
should be turned by 180°.
3 Serial No.
• In order to obtain versions A1, B1 and A1B1 the AM.66.A, AM.66.B or AM.66.AB
regulators carrying block should be turned by 180°.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Support plane
specifications
File: AM66003_E IV • 18 01/2000/e

A.66... MODULAR FLOW CONTROL VALVES
FAST / SLOW ASSEMBLY CETOP 3
This is modular assembly ON/OFF Max. operating pressure 320 bar
solenoid valve which, by fitting suit- Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
able 2 way regulator, allows two speed Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
operation in the same system via an Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
electrical changeover command. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
The flow rate regulator type QC.3.2... Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
must be ordered separately. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
A.66... Weight 2,4 Kg
The operational limit curves have
DC COILS CH. I PAGE 67 been obtained with the regulator
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 The test have been carried out at operating tempera-
fully closed, and those same limits
ture, with a voltage 10% lower than rated voltage and
QC.3.2... CH. III PAGE 2 improve gradually with the open-
with a fluid temperature of 50 degrees C. The fluid used
ing of the regulator.
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 21 was a mineral based oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at
40 degrees C.
ORDERING CODE
A Speed control valve LIMITS OF USE
66 Size 121 (NC)

4
p (bar)
*** 120 = Normally open

121 = Normally closed
120 (NA)
See table hydraulic symbols
* Control on lines A/B/P/T (see symbols)
The interface holder "H" must
be turned by 180° in order to Q (l/min)
obtain the A1 and B1 versions.
* Voltage: see tab.1
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
** Variants: see tab.2 A.66.*.120.*... A.66.*.*.A A.66.*.*.B A.66.*.*.T
* 4 = Serial No.
A.66.*.121.*... A.66.*.*.A1 A.66.*.*.B1 A.66.*.*.P
TAB.1 VOLTAGE OVERALL DIMENSIONS

DC COILS
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
N 48V*
Z 102V* 230Vac/50Hz
P 110V* 240Vac/60Hz
W without coils
Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate, their are
readable on the coils.
(*) Special voltage
TAB.2 - VARIANTS
No variant 00
Viton V1
Indicator light X1
Rectifier R1
Support plane
Cable gland "PG11" C1 specifications
Valve without connector (coil) S1 H = QC.3... interface holder
Indicator light + rectifier XR
File: A6600$_E IV • 19 08/2009/e

AM.3.RGT... MODULAR VALVES FOR
REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT CETOP 3
This modular valve produces a regen- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
erative system to increase the actua- Max. flow at port A/B/P/T 20 l/min
tor (differential cylinder) exit speed as Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
shown in the diagram. Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
In particular, if a cylinder is used with Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
a 2:1 ratio for the operating surfaces, Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
the exit and re-entry speeds are the with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
same. Weight 1,7 Kg
AM.3.RGT...
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS →P

A→ HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
4 AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6
Δp (bar)
RGT For regenerative circuit
A Size of check valves 3/8"BSP
1 Opening pressure
1 bar
Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM3RGT001_E IV • 20 01/2000/e

TABLE OF SCREWS AND STUDS FOR MOUNTING MODULES CETOP 3
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Q26.07.4068 30 AD3... 4
Q26.07.4075 70 40 AD3... + 1 AM3... (ISO) 4
Q26.07.4076 75 45 AD3... + AM3VR 4
M80.10.0015 97 57,5 AD3... + AM3VI... M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0007 115 74 AD3... + A66 o AM66... M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0003 120 80 AD3... + 2 AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0013 125 85 AD3... + AM3VR... + AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0011 155 114 AD3... + A66... + AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0005 160 119 AD3... + A66... + AM3VR M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0005 160 120 AD3... + 3 AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0020 165 125 AD3 + AM3VR + 2 AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0017 170 130 AD3 + AM3CP + 2 AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
M80.10.0023 195 154 A66... + 2 AM3... (ISO) M27.05.0001 4
File: TAMTR003_E IV • 21 01/2000/e

AM5UD type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 350 bar
allow free flow in one direction, while Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
a conical seated poppet prevents flow Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
in the opposite direction. Max. flow 80 l/min
They are available on single A, B, P Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
and T lines, and on double A and B, P Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
and T lines (see hydraulic symbols). Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
AM.5.UD... Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 1 bar springs are standard, while 5 bar Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
rated springs are available on request. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight 2,1 Kg
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS

AM Modular valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
4 5 bar
Δp (bar)
** Control on lines
A / B / P / T / AB / PT 1 bar
* Minimum opening pressure

1 = 1 bar Q (l/min)
5 = 5 bar
** 00 = No variant HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
AM.5.UD.A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.5.UD.B
AM.5.UD.P
AM.5.UD.T
AM.5.UD.AB
AM.5.UD.PT
Support plane
specifications
K = OR plate
File: AM5UD002_E IV • 22 01/2000/e

AM.5.UP... MODULAR
AM5UP type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 280 bar
allow free flow in one direction by Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
lifting a conical steel seated poppet, Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
while in the opposite direction the fluid Piloting ratio 1 : 14,3
can return by means of a small piston Max. flow 80 l/min
piloted by the other line pressure (pi- Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
loted side). Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
AM.5.UP... Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
The cast valve body allows limited
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 pressure drops during the fluid flow Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
through the various P/A/B/T lines. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
They are available on single A or B Weight 2,7 Kg
(see hydraulic symbols).
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

4
AM Modular valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
AM.5.UP.A
Δp (bar)
UP Piloted check valve

ar
5b
** Control on lines 1 ba
r
A / B / AB 3
AM.5.UP.B
* Minimum opening pressure Q (l/min)

1 = 1 bar
5 = 5 bar Curve n. 3 = Piloted side flow
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of AM.5.UP.AB

** 00 = No variant 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have been carried
V1 = Viton out a fluid temperature of 50°C.
5 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM5UP005_E IV • 23 01/2000/e

AM.5.VM... / AM.5.VI... MODULAR
MAX. PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 5
valves are available within operating Setting ranges: spring 1 50 bar
range 7 ÷ 350 bar. Adjustment is by spring 2 140 bar
means of a grub screw or a plastic spring 3 350 bar
knob. They are three basic versions: Max. flow 80 l/min
AM.5.VM, on single A or B lines, and Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
on double A and B lines, with drainage Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
AM.5.VM... / AM.5.VI... on T; AM.5.VM.P, on single P line, Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
CMP.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE with drainage on T; AM.5.VI, on sin- Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
gle A or B lines, and on double A and Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
B lines, with crossed drainage on ei- with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 ther A or B (see hydraulic symbols). Weight AM.5.VM.A/B/P... 2,5 Kg
Three spring types can be fitted on all Weight AM.5.VM.AB... 2,7 Kg
versions, with calibrated ranges as Weight AM.5.VI.A/B... 5,7 Kg
shown in the unit specifications. Weight AM.5.VI.AB... 5,9 Kg
Piloted operation cartridge type
CMP.30 is used on versions AM.5.VM
and AM.5.VM.P (see ordering code),
while on version AM.5.VI direct acting
cartridge type CMP.20 is used instead.
4 AM
ORDERING CODE
Modular valve
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
spring, see the minimum pressure
5 CETOP 5/NG10 setting curve.
** VM = Maximum pressure AM.5.VM.A

VI = Maximum crossline relief
AM.5.VM Version = A / B / P / AB
AM.5.VI Version = A / B / AB
AM.5.VM.B
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Setting ranges at port A/B/P
CMP 30 CMP 20 AM.5.VM.P
(AM.5.VM only) (AM.5.VI only)
1 = max. 50 bar 1 = max.50 bar (white spring)
2 = max. 140 bar 2 = max. 140 bar (yellow spring)
3 = max. 350 bar 3 = max. 250 bar (green spring)
AM.5.VM.AB
* Setting ranges at port B
Omit if the setting is same as that at port A
CMP 30 CMP 20
(AM.5.VM only) (AM.5.VI only)
1 = max.50 bar 1 = max.50 bar (white spring)
AM.5.VI.A
2 = max. 140 bar 2 = max. 140 bar (yellow spring)
3 = max. 350 bar 3 = max. 250 bar (green spring)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
3 Serial No. AM.5.VI.B
PRESSURE - FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE

FOR CMP.30 FOR CMP.30 AM.5.VI.AB
3
3 2
1
P (bar)
P (bar)
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
File: AM5V$003_E IV • 24 01/2010/e

AM.5.VM... / AM.5.VI... MODULAR MAX. PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 5
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.5.VM.AB...
Type of adjustment
Support plane
4
C Grub screw
AM.5.VM.P...
Type of adjustment

specifications
C Grub screw
AM.5.VI.AB...
Type of adjustment

specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM5V$003_E IV • 25 01/2010/e

AM.5.CP... MODULAR BACK
PRESSURE VALVES CETOP 5
Back pressure valves type AM.5.CP Max. operating pressure 350 bar
are direct acting damped maximum Setting ranges: spring 1 30 bar
pressure in-line valves fitted with by- spring 2 140 bar
pass non-return valves. They are ob- spring 3 250 bar
tainable within the adjustable range 2 Max. flow 80 l/min
÷ 250 bar. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
Adjustment is by means of a grub Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
AM.5.CP... screw or a plastic knob, on ports A or Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
CMP.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE B (single), or on AB double. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
The cartridge is direct acting type Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
CMP.20. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
These valves are especially used on Weight AM.5.CP.A/B... 5,3 Kg
vertical working cylinders with drag- Weight AM.5.CP.AB... 7,2 Kg
ging loads.
spring, see the minimum pressure
setting curve 3
ORDERING CODE
4 AM Modular valve
2
P (bar)
5 CETOP 5/NG10
CP Back pressure valve

1
** Control on lines A / B / AB
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
* Type of adjustment Q (l/min)
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw Curves n° 1 - 2 - 3 = setting ranges
* Setting ranges AM.5.CP.A

2 = max. 140 bar (yellow spring) 3
** 00 = No variant AM.5.CP.B 2
V1 = Viton
P (bar)
3 Serial No.
AM.5.CP.AB
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Type of adjustment
Support plane
M Plastic knob
specifications
C Grub screw
File: AM5CP003_E IV • 26 02/2010/e

AM.5.VR... MODULAR PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
These pressure reducing valves en-
sure a minimum pressure variation on
Setting ranges: spring 1 60 bar
the P or A port with changing flow rate
spring 2 120 bar
up 90 l/min.
spring 3 250 bar
Three spring types allow adjustment Maximum allowed Δ Δp pressure
with the range 7 ÷ 250 bar. between the inlet and outlet pressure 150 bar
Manual adjustment is available by a Max. flow 90 l/min
AM.5.VR...
grub screw or plastic knob. Draining on port T 0,5 ÷ 0,7 l/min
CVR.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 The RELIEVING SYSTEM inside the
valve AM.5.VR allows the passage
from the setting pressure line to T line
of the flow through the valve to avoid
the increasing of pressure in the re-
duced-pressure line by diverting ex-
Weight 3,73 Kg
ceeding flow to reservoir.
Weight by-pass version 6,56 Kg
A by pass module with check valve for
free flow from A to AR port (see hy-
draulic symbol) is available.
ORDERING CODE HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS 4

AM Modular valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
VR Pilot operated pressure AM.5.VR.P... AM.5.VR.A... AM.5.VR.D...

reducing valve with relieving
* Control on lines
P = Drain on T AM.5.VR.A... +
A = Drain on T Bypass
D = Drain on B reduct pressure on A Version with check valve
* Drain connection
E = External (only for control on the P line)
PRESSURE-FLOW RATE PRESSURE-FLOW OF RELIEVING
B Version with by-pass
on line A only 3
Omit if not required 3
M = Plastic knob 2
P (bar)
P (bar)
C = Grub screw
2
* Setting ranges 1
1
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
1 Serial No.
ΔP AM.5.VR... + BY-PASS MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE

To change valves AM.5.VR.P... from internal
to external drainage it is necessary:
- screw out the plug on the Y port 1
2
- screw out the plug T.C.E.I. M8x1 from the body 3
ΔP (bar)
- rescrew the T.C.E.I. M8x1 plug on the body

P (bar)
NOTE: the external draining can be used as

a piloting line (please, concta our Technical
Service for other informations)

The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity of
46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have been carried out at Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
a fluid temperature of 50°C.
File: AM5VR001_E IV • 27 03/2010/e

AM.5.VR... MODULAR PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.5.VR.P... / AM.5.VR.D...
AM.5.VR.A... + BYPASS
B By-pass (optional)
Ordering code:
V89.46.0000
(if ordered separately)
Type of adjustment
Support plane
C Grub screw
File: AM5VR001_E IV • 28 03/2010/e

AM.5.VS... MODULAR PRESSURE
SEQUENCING VALVES CETOP 5
The sequence valve are used to as- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
sure that a secondary circuit is pres- Setting ranges: spring 1 60 bar
surized when the setting pressure with spring 2 120 bar
a changing flow to up spring 3 250 bar
90 l/min (see diagram). Max. flow 90 l/min
Three spring types allow adjustment Draining on port T 0,5 ÷ 0,7 l/min
within the range 7 ÷ 250 bar. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
AM.5.VS... Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Manual adjustment is available by a
CVS.20... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE grub screw or plastic knob. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
The cartridge used is the "CVS" type. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
Weight 3,73 Kg
ORDERING CODE HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
AM Modular valve
VS
CETOP 5/NG10
Sequencing valve
4
* Drain connection
E = External
M = Plastic knob PRESSURE-FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
C = Grub screw
1
2
* Setting ranges 3
3
P (bar)
P (bar)
2
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1
1 Serial No.
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)

OVERALL DIMENSIONS
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a
viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests
have been carried out a fluid temperature
of 50°C.
To change valves AM.5.VS... from internal

to external drainage it is necessary:
- screw out the plug on the Y port
- screw out the plug T.C.E.I. M8x1 from the body
- rescrew the T.C.E.I. M8x1 plug on the
body
NOTE: the external draining can be used as
a piloting line (please, contact our Techni-
cal Service for other informations)
Type of adjustment
Support plane
C Grub screw
File: AM5VS001_E IV • 29 03/2010/e

AM.5.SH... MODULAR
SHUTTLE VALVES CETOP 5
Modular valves type AM.5.SH are Max. operating pressure 350 bar
actuator load pressure selecting units, Max. flow at the cartridge 3 l/min
as they are fitted with an integral shut- Max. flow at ports A/B/P/T 80 l/min
tle valve cartridge which allows taking Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
of the highest pressure signal to the Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
external port via displacement of a Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
ball. They are usually employed to Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
signal the actuator load to the pres- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
sure compensator of a load sensing with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
AM.5.SH... pump, or for the command of fail-safe Weight 2,1 Kg
SH.03... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE brakes. For seat overall dimensions Cartridge tightening torque 20÷30 Nm/2÷3 Kgm
see cartridge shuttle type SH.03.
4 ORDERING CODE ΔP)

PRESSURE DROPS (Δ
ON THE SHUTTLE VALVE
HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
AM Modular valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
SH Cartridge shuttle
Δp (bar)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM5SH001_E IV • 30 02/2010/e

AM.5.QF... MODULAR
AM.5.QF type one way non-compen- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
sated throttle valve are fitted with an Max. pressure adjustable 250 bar
O-Ring mounting plate which allows Flow rate regulation on 9 screw turns
its assembly for either input or output Max. flow 80 l/min
regulation. Adjustment is obtained by Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
means of a grub screw or a plastic Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
knob. They are available in the four Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
AM.5.QF... regulating configurations shown in the Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. IV PAGE 35 hydraulic diagrams. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
These valves are supplied with re- Weight 3,7 Kg
lated hydraulic scheme. In case of
inversion of rated flow direction, turn
valve 180° right or left (attention: in
this case the label will appear upside
down with A and B inverted).
ORDERING CODE FREE FLOW

FLOW RATE TOWARDS CHECK VALVE
AM
5
Modular valve
CETOP 5/NG10
4
Δp (bar)
Δp (bar)
** Control on lines
A / B / P / AB
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
4 Serial No.
AM.5.QF.A AM.5.QF.B AM.5.QF.P AM.5.QF.AB
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Type of adjustment
M Plastic knob
C Grub screw
Support plane
specifications
File: AM5QF004_E IV • 31 01/2000/e

AM.88... MODULAR COMPENSATED
FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY CETOP 5
This is an intermediate block (AM.88) Max. operating pressure 320 bar
for modular mounting of one or two Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
compensated flow rate regulators Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
QC.3... Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
The flow regulator type QC32 must be Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
ordered separately. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight 2,75 Kg
AM.88...
QC.3.2... CH. III PAGE 2
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
4 ORDERING CODE
AM.88.A AM.88.B AM.88.AB
AM Modular valve
88 Size AM.88.P AM.88.PT* AM.88.T
** Control on lines
A / B / P / T / PT* / AB
For A1 / B1 / A1B1
see table "Hydraulic symbols"
AM.88.A1 AM.88.B1 AM.88.A1B1
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
→ T drain)
PT * = From line towards exhaust (P→
3 Serial No.
• In order to obtain versions A1, B1 and A1B1 the AM.88.B, AM.88.A or AM.88.AB
regulators carrying block should be turned by 180°.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
K = OR plate
Support plane
specifications
File: AM88003_E IV • 32 00/2000/e

A.88... MODULAR FLOW CONTROL VALVES
FAST / SLOW ASSEMBLY CETOP 5
This is a modular assembly ON/OFF Max. operating pressure 320 bar
solenoid valve which, by fitting a suit- Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
able 2 way regulator, allows two speed Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
operation in the same system via an Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
electrical changeover command. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
The flow rate regulator type QC.3.2 Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
must be ordered separately. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
A.88... The limit of use curves have been Weight with a DC solenoid 4,2 Kg
"A16" DC COILS CH. I PAGE 35 obtained with the regulator fully
closed, and those same limits im-
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 The test have been carried out at operating tempera-
prove gradually with the opening of
QC.3.2... CH. III PAGE 2 ture, with a voltage 10% lower than rated voltage and
the regulator.
with a fluid temperature of 50 degrees C. The fluid
• Solenoids used are standard type used was a mineral based oil with a viscosity of
A16 for DC voltage. 46 mm2/sec at 40 degrees C.
LIMITS OF USE FREE FLOW

ORDERING CODE DC SOLENOID THROUGH SPOOL
A Speed control valve

12
1(
4
88 Size NC
)
p (bar)
p (bar)
E Electrical operator 12
0(
NA
)
*** 120 = Normally open

121 = Normally closed
See table "Hydraulic symbols"
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
* Control on lines A/B/P/T (see symbols)
The interface holder "H" must
be turned by 180° in order to HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
obtain the A1 and B1 versions.
A.88.*.120.*... A.88.*.*.A... A.88.*.*.B... A.88.*.*.T...
* Voltage : see tab.1
** Variants: see tab.2
3 Serial No.
A.88.*.121.*... A.88.*.*.A1... A.88.*.*.B1... A.88.*.*.P...
TAB.1 - A16 COIL

DC VOLTAGE
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
P 110V* 230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz
W Without DC coil
* Special voltage
TAB.2 - VARIANTS
No variant 00
Viton V1
Indicator light X1
Rectifier R1
Cable gland "PG11" S1 Support plane
Valve without connector (coil) S1 specifications
Indicator light + rectifier XR H = QC.3... interface holder
File: A88003_E IV • 33 03/2000/e

AM.5.RGT... MODULAR VALVES
FOR REGENERATIVE CIRCUIT CETOP 5
This modular system produces a re- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
generative circuit to increasing the Max. flow at port A/B/P/T 70 l/min
actuator (differential cylinder) exit Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
speed as shown in the diagram. In Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
particular, if a cylinder is used with a Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
2:1 ratio for operating surfaces, the Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
exit and re-entry speeds are the same. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
Weight 2,1 Kg
AM.5.RGT...
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE DROPS →P

B→ HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
4 AM
5
Modular valve
CETOP 5/NG10
Δp (bar)
RGT For regenerative circuit
A Size of check valves 1/2"BSP
1 Opening pressure
1 bar
Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Support plane
specifications
File: AM5RGT001_E IV • 34 01/2000/e

TABLE OF SCREW AND STUDS FOR MOUNTING CETOP 5/NG10
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

Q26.07.4090 40 AD5... 4
Q26.07.4098 90 50 AD5... + 1 AM5... (ISO) 4
Q26.07.4301 100 60 AD5... + AM5VR 4
Q26.07.4302 110 70 AD5... + AM5VI 4
Q26.07.4099 120 80 AD5... + A88 4
M80.15.0004 150 100 AD5... + 2 AM5... (ISO) M27.05.0002 4
M80.15.0012 160 110 AD5... + AM5VR + AM5... (ISO) " 4
M80.15.0010 180 130 AD5... + A88... + AM5... (ISO) " 4
M80.15.0006 190 140 AD5... + A88... + AM5VR " 4
M80.15.0011 200 150 AD5... + 3 AM5... (ISO) " 4
File: TAMTR005_E IV • 35 02/2000/e

AM.7.UP... MODULAR
AM.7.UP type modular check valves Max. operating pressure 350 bar
allow free flow in one direction by Opening pressure 2 bar
lifting a seated poppet, while in the Piloting ratio 1 : 11,7
opposite direction the fluid can return Max. flow 250 l/min
by means of a small piston piloted by Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
the other line pressure (piloted side). Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
The cast valve body allows limited Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 80°C
pressure drops during the fluid flow Ambient temperature -20°C ÷ 50°C
through the various P/A/B/T lines. Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
AM.7.UP... They are available on single A or B Weight 7,2 Kg
(see hydraulic symbols).
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
AM.7.UP.A AM.7.UP.AB AM.7.UP.B
ORDERING CODE
4 AM Modular valve
7 CETOP 7/NG16
UP Piloted check valve The fluid used is a mineral oil

with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s PRESSURE DROPS ΔP-Q
at 40°C. The tests have been 1
** Control on lines carried out a fluid temperature
of 50°C.
A / B / AB
A 1 →A 2
* Opening pressure 1 =
B 1 →B
Δp (bar)
2 = 2 bar
A →A 1
2 =
B →B 1
A1→A (AM.7.UP.B)
V1 = Viton 3 = 4
B1→B (AM.7.UP.A)
1 Serial No. P 1 →T
4 =
T 1 →P Q (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
• Valve fixing:
n° 4 screws T.C.E.I. M10 - Tightening torque 40 Nm
The longer of the screws depends on the type of assembly used.
Fixing screws UNI 5931 with material specifications 12.9
• Seals:
n° 4 pieces OR 2-118/90SH PARKER (type 130)
CETOP 7 (4.2-4-07) MOUNTING SURFACE
Support plane
specifications
File: AM7UP001_E IV • 36 00/2006/e

AM.7.QF... MODULAR
AM.7.QF type one way non- Max. operating pressure 350 bar
compensated throttle valve are fitted Flow rate regulation on 10 screw turns
with an O-Ring mounting plate which Max. flow 250 l/min
allows its assembly for either input or Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
output regulation. Adjustment is Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
obtained by means of a grub screw. Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 80°C
They are available in the three Ambient temperature -20°C ÷ 50°C
AM.7.QF... regulating configurations shown in the Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
hydraulic diagrams. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
Weight AM.7.QF for A or B versions 7,35 Kg
ORDERING CODE All configurations have a built in check Weight AM.7.QF for AB version 7,7 Kg
valve that allows reserve free flow.
AM Modular valve
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
7 CETOP 7/NG16
AM.7.QF.A AM.7.QF.B AM.7.QF.AB
** Control on lines
A = meter out control on line A
AB = meter out control on lines A and B
4
B = meter out control on line B
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw PRESSURE DROPS ΔP-Q REGULATED FLOW RATE
n° of turns (screw)
** 00 = No variant 4,5 5 5,5 6 6,5 7
V1 = Viton
2
1 Serial No.
Δp (bar)
n° of turns (screw)
Δp (bar)
3 7,5
1 8
9
Q (l/min) 10
The fluid used is a mineral oil with a viscosity 1 = Regulator closed A→A1 / B→B1 Q (l/min)
of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have been Regulated flow rate depending on No. of turns:
2 = Regulator open A→A1 / B→B1
carried out a fluid temperature of 50°C. from 4,5 to 10 turns (unscrewing).
3 = Without regulator A→A1 (AM.7.QF.B)
B→B1 (AM.7.QF.A)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
• Valve fixing:
The longer of the screws depends on the type of assembly used.
Fixing screws UNI 5931 with material specifications 12.9.
• Seals:
CETOP 7 (4.2-4-07) MOUNTING SURFACE
Type of adjustment Support plane

specifications
M Plastic knob
C Grub screw
File: AM7QF014_E IV • 37 00/2006/e

4
File: AM7QF014_E IV • 38 00/2006/e

TECHNICAL CARTRIDGE VALVES ACCORDING DIN
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS
CARTRIDGE VALVES
AP HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION ISO 7368 (DIN 24342)
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING 2/2 CARTRIDGE VALVES CH. V PAGE 2
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) 2/2 LOGIC ELEMENTS CH. V PAGE 3
PARBAK PARBAK RING COVERS FOR LOGIC ELEMENTS CH. V PAGE 3
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION MAX. PRESSURE VALVES - COVERS CH. V PAGE 9
Q
QP
FLOW (L/MIN)
PUMP FLOW (L/MIN)
PLATE MOUNTING COVERS
KRA.16/25...
PROXIMITY
CH. V PAGE 9
CH. V PAGE 12
CH. V PAGE 15
5
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE CARTRIDGE VALVES
Incorrect use of the products described in this CARTRIDGE SOLENOID VALVES WITH CHECK
VALVE
for each product in this catalogue may be CARTRIDGE SOLENOID VALVES
modifications without giving prior notice. Each (SEE BREVINI FLUID POWER
technical specifications must therefore be CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE)
Plant

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 05TA_E V• 1 06/2010/e

2/2 CARTRIDGE VALVES LOGIC ELEMENTS
ACCORDING TO ISO 7368 (DIN 24342)
ARON cartridge valves are basically Nominal size (max. diameter) 16mm / 25mm
composed of a cover and an operat- Max. opening pressure 350 bar
ing unit insert in the ISO 7368 (DIN Max. nominal flow rate NG16 150 l/min
24342) mounting frame. Each car- Max. nominal flow rate NG25 350 l/min
tridge valve is characterized by 2 main Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
way for the nominal flow (up to 350 l/ Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
min). with NAS 1638 with filter ß25 ≥75
By combining the various covers, op-
erating units and connections within the block, many different functions can be obtained like:
direct control, non-return, hydraulically piloted non-return, pressure control, flow rate regula-
tion, as well as a combination of these same functions.
Thanks to their design features and operational flexibility, cartridge valves can be used to:
2/2 LOGIC ELEMENTS AND COVERS • speed-up machine cycles, and therefore increase productivity and efficiency (better
KEL.16/25... CH. V PAGE 3 response time compared to traditional valves);
KEC.16/25... CH. V PAGE 3/6/7/8 • ensure minimum thermal dissipation (tanks to the passageway dimensions);
• reduce the hydraulic plant weight (tanks to the compact functions block);
HYDRAULIC MOUNTING SCHEMES CH. V PAGE 4
• reduce to a minimum any internal leakages;
NG16/NG25 SEATS CH. V PAGE 5 • provide ease of installation and serving.
KEC.16/25... WITH CMP CH. V PAGE 9/10
The logic units 2/2 (Fig. 1) are formed by a cover (1), a functional unit (2), a spacer (3), a closure
C.*.P.16/25... CH. V PAGE 9/11 spring (4) and a guide bush (5) for each functional unit. Covers can be changed according to
KRA.16/25... CH. V PAGE 12 the required application and the functional unit can be combined with different springs in order
KRA.16/25... + AD.3.V... CH. V PAGE 14 to obtain various opening pressure.
PROXIMITY FOR KRA CH. V PAGE 15
Covers
5 Covers serve to enclose the functional unit and to house the piloting ports and any
incorporated valves or manual adjustment devices. Inside the cover are housed also the seats
for the calibrated orifice used to optimize the valve opening/closed response time in according
to the type of hydraulic system being implemented.
CETOP 3 interface covers are available, ready to accept solenoid valves or other modular
valves for the implementation of particular control functions.
The maximum allowed pressure is a function of the flow rate (max.400 bar).
FIG. 1 - AREA RATIO

A MAIN FLOW
B MAIN FLOW
X EXTERNAL PILOTING
Z1 EXTERNAL PILOTING
Z2 EXTERNAL PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE
A1 A PORT EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION
A2 B PORT EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION
A3 SPRING CHAMBER EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION
ORIFICE FUNCTIONAL SYMBOLS

STANDARD ORIFICE
(ALREADY INSERTED) 1 = COVER
Ø 1mm (DIAMETER)
2 = FUNCTIONAL UNIT
3 = SPACER
A GRUB SCREW ORIFICE CAN BE 4 = CLOSURE SPRING
INSERTED IN THE THREADED SEAT 5 = GUIDE BUSH FOR
FUNCTIONAL UNIT
BLIND The logic unit operates as a function of the pressures acting on the relevant areas, and different
opening pressures are obtained, depending on the dimensions of these areas.
A description of how to interpret the ARON cartridge opening ratios is as follows:
- there are three relevant areas A1, A2, A3;
- area A1 is taken to represent 100%, i.e. it is the reference area;
- area A2, when a 2:1 ratio is shown, is equal to 50% of area A1 and all the other ratios shown
in the Table 2 can be calculated on this basis.
As consequence of these area ratios the are different opening pressures whether proceeding
from A → B or from B → A.
File: TKE$002_E V• 2 01/2000/e

2/2 LOGIC ELEMENTS
ORDERING CODE TAB. 1 - SYMBOL, FUNCTION, AREA RATIO AND OPENING PRESSURE
Function Symbol Area Code Opening pressure
KEL Logic element 2/2 ratio (bar)
A →B B →A
** 16 = NG16
Directional (U) A1 : A3 KEL.*.U.L.00... L = 0.3
25 = NG25 (normally used 1:1 KEL.*.U.M.00... M = 1.6
for relief valve) KEL.*.U.H.00... H=4
* Function: see table 1 KEL.*.U.J.00... J=9
Areas ratio: Directional (U) A1 : A3 KEL.*.U.L.**... L = 0.3
U=1:1 with orifice 1:1 KEL.*.U.M.**... M = 1.6
S = 12.5 : 1 KEL.*.U.H.**... H=4
B=2:1 Directional (S) A1 : A2 KEL.*.S.L.00... L = 0.3 L=4
(for version with drilled 12.5 : 1 KEL.*.S.M.00... M = 0.6 M=8
KEL.*.S.H.00... H = 1.5 H = 20
poppet see CF variant)
F=2:1 Directional (S) A1 : A2 KEL.*.S.L.**... L = 0.3 L=4
R=2:1 with orifice 12.5 : 1 KEL.*.S.M.**... M = 0.6 M=8
KEL.*.S.H.**... H = 1.5 H= 20
* Opening pressure (bar) Directional (B) A1 : A2 KEL.*.B.L.00... L = 0.5 L=1

(normally used 2:1 KEL.*.B.M.00... M=1 M=2
(Tab.1 pressure values) for check valve) KEL.*.B.H.00... H = 2.5 H=5
(Tab.2 spring's colour and code)
Flow (F) A1 : A2 KEL.*.F.L.**... L = 0.5 L = 1
control 2:1 KEL.*.F.M.**... M=1 M=2
** Calibrated orifices: KEL.*.F.H.**... H = 2.5 H = 5
00 = blind
08 = 0.8 mm
09 = 0.9 mm
With
sensitized (R) A1 : A2 KEL.*.R.L.00...
NG16
A →B
NG25
L = 0.7 L = 0.6
5
10 = 1.0 mm cover 2:1 KEL.*.R.M.00... M = 1.5 M = 1.5
KEL.*.R.H.00... H=4 H = 3.5
12 = 1.2 mm KEL.*.R.J.00... J=9
14 = 1.4 mm
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton TAB. 2 - SPRING'S COLOUR AND CODE
CF = With drilled poppet
Spring U S B-F R
only for KEL.**.B...
type NG16 NG25 NG16 NG25 NG16 NG25 NG16 NG25
Cod. L I • 3red red red 00/2001/d
red
2 Serial No. without colour without colour without colour without colour
Cod. M green yellow red green red green red green
Cod. H blue blue yellow yellow green yellow green yellow
Cod. J without colour blue
TAB. 3 - COVERS HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

Type Symbol
KEC.**.RI.**.2 COVERS FOR LOGIC ELEMENTS
Directional with
external piloting
COVERS ORDERING CODE
KEC.**.CQ.**.2
Directional with KEC Covers for
stroke adjustment logic element 2/2
KEC.**.RC.**.2 ** 16 = NG16
Directional with 25 = NG25
interface NG6
** Type of cover (see Tab. 3)

KEC.**.PC.**.2 RI = Directional with external piloting
With hydraulic outlet CQ = Directional with stroke adjustment
pilot valve RC = Directional with interface NG6
PC = With hydraulic outlet pilot valve
KEC.**.SH.**.2 SH = With built-in-exchange (shuttle)
With built-in-exchange SP = With built-in-exchange and interface NG6
valve (shuttle)
** 00 = No variant
KEC.**.SP.**.2 V1 = Viton
With built-in-exchange
valve (shuttle) and 2 Serial No.
interface NG6
File: TKE$002_E V• 3 01/2000/e

CARTRIDGE VALVES
HYDRAULIC MOUNTING SCHEMES FOR KEC COVERS AND KEL LOGIC ELEMENTS
KEC.16/25.RI...
COVER WITH EXTERNAL PILOTING PORT
A = External piloting X allows flow in both directions A →B and
B →A. B = For rapid sequence safety circuit; A →B flow is allowed;
when pressure reaches X valve closes.
Only for CF variant (KEL.**:B... with drilled poppet), with no
pressure in X it operates as a check valve between A and B.
KEC.16/25.CQ...
COVER WITH STROKE LIMITATION
Allows flow regulation in both directions A →B and B → A.
By limiting the spool stroke the flow in both direction can be limited.
KEC.16/25.RC...
COVER WITH INTERFACE NG6
These covers have one mounting surface preset for a solenoid pilot
5 valve.
Proper connection of Y and Z2 to the A and/or B ports will allowing
piloting of the valve opening and closing functions.
KEC.16/25.PC...
COVER WITH HYDRAULIC RELEASE PILOT VALVE
This is a cover with external piloting to be connected to B port to
obtain the standard unit function. Z1 pressure piloting allows flow
transfer from B → A. Normally, in order to ensure the holding
condition the main port B is connected to the load; piloting in Z1
should be at least 50% of the load pressure in B.
KEC.16/25.SH...
COVER WITH INTEGRAL CHANGEOVER VALVE
The logic element closes as function of the larger pressure in X and
Z1, selected by the shuttle valve.
KEC16/25.SP... COVER WITH INTEGRAL CHANGEOVER

VALVE AND INTERFACE NG6
The AP branch of the cartridge valve spring is connected with the

pilot valve port.
External piloting operates from Z2 →A of the pilot valve.
An example is shown in the diagram of a type of connection used
to keep the conical seat valve closed on both sides (interrupted flow
both from A → B and from B → A).
KRA.16/25... COVER WITH ELECTRICAL CONTROL OF THE

CLOSED POSITION AND INTERFACE NG6
See cartridge type KRA... next pages
File: TKE$002_E V• 4 01/2000/e

CARTRIDGE VALVES
OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF TWO-WAY VALVE SEAT ISO 7368/BA-06-2-A NG16 (DIN 24342)
To be respect
5
X = piloting
Y = draining
Z = additional piloting
Z1 = preferential piloting
Z2 = preferential draining
OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF TWO-WAY VALVE SEAT ISO 7368/BB-08-2-A NG25 (DIN 24342)
To be respect
X = piloting
Y = draining
Z = additional piloting
Z1 = preferential piloting
Z2 = preferential draining
File: KEL002_E V• 5 00/2000/e

CARTRIDGE VALVES - COVERS
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.RI... CHECK VALVE COVER
Weight: 0,5 Kg
M = pressure gauge attachment
Orifice with calibrated ø1 mm standard diameter
The covers are supplied with M8x25 UNI 5931
fixing screws, reference pin SE ø3x12 UNI 6873-71
Tightening torque 19÷24 Nm/1.9÷2.4 Kgm with 8.8 screws
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.RI... CHECK VALVE COVER
5
Weight: 1,3 Kg
fixing screws, reference pin SE ø5X12 UNI 6873-71
Tightening torque 69÷80 Nm/6.9÷8 Kgm with 8.8 screws
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.CQ.. COVER WITH STROKE ADJUSTMENT
Weight: 0,9 Kg
Tightening torque 19÷24 Nm/1.9÷2.4 Kgm with 8.8 screws
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.CQ.. COVER WITH STROKE ADJUSTMENT
Weight: 1,6 Kg
Tightening torque 69÷80 Nm/6.9÷8 Kgm with 8.8 screws
File: KEC002_E V• 6 01/2000/e

OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.RC... COVER WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3/NG6
Weight: 1,2 Kg
tightening torque 19÷24 Nm/1.9÷2.4 Kgm with 8.8 screws
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.RC... COVER WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3/NG6
5
Weight: 1,8 Kg
tightening torque 69÷80 Nm/6.9÷8 Kgm with 8.8 screws
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.PC... COVER WITH HYDRAULIC OUTLET PILOT VALVE
Weight: 2,1 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.PC... COVER WITH HYDRAULIC OUTLET PILOT VALVE
Weight: 2,7 Kg
File: KEC002_E V• 7 01/2000/e

OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.SH... COVER WITH BUILT-IN EXCHANGE VALVE
Weight: 0,9 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.SH... COVER WITH BUILT-IN EXCHANGE VALVE
5
Weight: 1,5 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.16.SP COVER WITH BUILT-IN EXCHANGE VALVE AND INTERFACE CETOP 3/NG6
Weight: 1,4 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KEC.25.SP COVER WITH BUILT-IN EXCHANGE VALVE AND INTERFACE CETOP 3/NG6
Weight: 2 Kg
File: KEC002_E V• 8 01/2000/e

MAXIMUM PRESSURE CARTRIDGE VALVES
Aron maximum pressure cartridge Nominal size (max. diameter) 16mm / 25mm
valves allow control of hydraulic cir- Max. operating pressure 400 bar
cuit pressures up 400 bar and 350 l/ Maximum nominal flow rate NG16 150 l/min
min maximum flow rate (NG25). Maximum nominal flow rate NG25 350 l/min
Besides the normal manual pressure Setting ranges 15 ÷ 400 bar
regulation mode, function like electri-
cal command for discharge to drain, remote control, proportional pressure control or
electrically selected dual pressure levels are also available.
MAX. PRESSURE COVERS
The CETOP 3/NG6 interface allows the mounting of a AD.3.E... valve. A standard cartridge
KEC.16/25... WITH CMP CH. V PAGE 10 valve DIN 24342 is used. A cover not according to DIN rules is also available.
C.*.P.16/25... CH. V PAGE 11 The valve response specification may be modified by selection of different internal orifices
CETOP 3/NG06 CH. I PAGE 8 according to the required application. The standard version has calibrated orifices of Ø
1 mm in X and AP.
AM.3.VM... CH. IV PAGE 9
XP.3... CH. VIII PAGE 16
DIN STANDARDS COVER ORDERING CODE

MANUAL PRESSURE REGULATION
KEC DIN standards cover This regulation facility is incorporated
in the cartridge closing cover. A Z1
** 16 = NG16 port is provided on the cover for re-
25 = NG25 mote piloting via directional or pres-
sure control valves.
5
** Type of cover
ME = Max. pressure valve with
interface CETOP 3
MP = Max. pressure valve MANUAL PRESSURE REGULATION
UE = Exclusion valve with AND ELECTRICAL COMMAND FOR
interface CETOP 3 DISCHARGE TO DRAIN
UN = Exclusion valve
This arrangement uses an electrically
SL = Sequencing valve
controlled valve type AD3E15.. which
* Setting ranges normally, in the de-energized posi-
1 = 15 ÷ 45 bar (white spring) tion, allows discharge to drain of the
2 = 15 ÷ 145 bar (yellow spring) controlled flow. When energized, the
system operates at the pressure set
3 = 60 ÷ 400 bar (green spring)
on the piloting unit incorporated in the
* Type of adjustment closing cover.
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
MANUAL REGULATION AND
** 00 = No variant PROPORTIONAL CONTROL OF THE
V1 = Viton
PRESSURE
3 Serial No.
This arrangement uses a proportional
pressure valve type XP3.. as the pilot,
which allows proportional regulation
of the controlled system pressure as
PLATE MOUNTING COVERS ORDERING CODE a function of an electrical command
signal.
C*P M = Cover with max. pressure valve
U = Cover with exclusion valve
S = Cover with sequencing valve
* E = Presetting for solenoid valve MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE AND
(Omit if not required) ELECTRICALLY SELECTED TWO
LEVEL PRESSURE UNIT
** 16 = NG16
25 = NG25 This arrangement uses a dual sole-
noid electrically controlled valve type
* Type of adjustment AD3E02C.. and a modular maximum
M = Plastic knob pressure valve type AM3VMA...
C = Grub screw which, when combined, allow imple-
mentation of an electrically selected
* Setting ranges two level pressure system.
1 = 15 ÷ 45 bar (white spring) Normally, with the solenoid valve de-
2 = 15 ÷ 145 bar (yellow spring) energized, the controlled flow is dis-
3 = 60 ÷ 400 bar (green spring) charged to drain.
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
File: TKEC003_E V• 9 00/2000/e

MAXIMUM PRESSURE CARTRIDGE VALVES - COVERS
KEC.16.MP/UN/SL... WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION / SEQUENCING - IN LINE MOUNTING
KEC.16.MP...
KEC.16.UN...
DIN STANDARD
KEC.16.SL...
Weight: 1,3 Kg
The covers are supplied with
M8x35 UNI 5931 fixing screws and
reference pins dia ø3x12 UNI 6874-71
KEC.25.MP/UN/SL... WITH MAX. PRESSURE / EXCLUSION / SEQUENCING - IN LINE MOUNTING
KEC.25.MP...
5 KEC.25.UN...
DIN STANDARD
KEC.25.SL...
Weight: 1,8 Kg
M12x45 UNI 5931 and
KEC.16.ME/UE WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3 - IN LINE MOUNTING
DIN STANDARD KEC.16.ME... KEC.16.UE...
Weight: 1,3 Kg
KEC.25.ME/UE WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3 - IN LINE MOUNTING
KEC.25.ME... KEC.25.UE...
DIN STANDARD
Weight: 1,8 Kg
File: KEC003_E V • 10 01/2000/e

MAXIMUM PRESSURE CARTRIDGE VALVES - COVERS
C*P.16... WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION / SEQUENCING - PLATE MOUNTING
CMP.16...
CUP.16...
CSP.16...
Weight: 1,3 Kg
M5x45 UNI 5931 fixing screws
C*P.25... WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION / SEQUENCING - PLATE MOUNTING
CMP.25...
CUP.25... 5
CSP.25...
Weight: 1,5 Kg
C*P.E.16 WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3 - PLATE MOUNTING
CMP.E.16... CUP.E.16...
Weight: 1,3 Kg
M5X45 UNI 5931 fixing screws
C*P.E.25 WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE / EXCLUSION WITH INTERFACE CETOP 3 - PLATE MOUNTING
CMP.E.25... CUP.E.25...
Weight: 1,5 Kg
File: C$P002_E V • 11 01/2000/e

KRA.16/25... CARTRIDGE VALVES WITH ELECTRICAL
POSITION CONTROL NG16 / NG25
This valve series is used in those applications where monitoring of the "actual" valve position
is required for managing machine safety cycles as required by current accident prevention
legislation. Typical examples of applications where this product is used include: hydraulic
presses in general, plastic component injection and blow-form presses, die-casting presses.
The valve is composed of a closure cover where the inductive position monitoring proximity
sensor is inserted to signal the two possible states of logic element manufactured to DIN 24342
standard.
This valve, in view of its being placed inside a safety system loop, can detect movement
dangerous both for the safety of the operator and of the machine itself.
KRA.16/25... Availability of the CETOP 3 mounting interface on closure cover allows direct insertion of the
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. V PAGE 13 piloting valves into the main valve, offering in this way to the designer the possibility to produce
KRA.16/25... + AD.3.V... CH. V PAGE 14 compact systems which can be easily mounted inside the machine.
AD.3.V... CH. I PAGE 13 HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
L.V.D.T. FOR AD.3.V CH. I PAGE 21
ORDERING CODE
5 KRA Cartridge valve with electrical position

control (logic element 2/2 incorporated)
** 16 = NG16
25 = NG25
* Calibrated orifices at ports A and P:

0 = no orifice
1 = Ø 1 mm dia opening (NG16 in standard configuration)
2 = Ø 1.2 mm dia opening (NG25 in standard configuration)
* Opening pressure (bar):
NG16 NG25
H = 4 (green spring) 3.5 (yellow spring)
J = 12 (no colour spring) 9 (blue spring)
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
NG16 NG25
File: KRA001_E V • 12 02/2000/e

KRA... CARTRIDGE VALVES WITH ELECTRICAL POSITION CONTROL
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KRA.16...
These covers are supplied complete with dow-

els and calibrated orifices on inputs A (AP)
and P( X); mounting screws can be supplied
on request.
5
Fixing screws T.C.E.I. M8X45 UNI 5931
Reference pin dia Ø 3X12 UNI 6873
Screws S.T.E.I. M6X1X6 UNI 5923 dia Ø 1mm
Weight 2,2 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS KRA.25...
These covers are supplied complete with dow-

els and calibrated orifices on inputs A (AP)
and P( X); mounting screws can be supplied
on request.
Fixing screws T.C.E.I. M12X50 UNI 5931

Reference pin dia Ø 5X12 UNI 6873
Screws S.T.E.I. M6X1X6 UNI 5923 dia Ø 1.2mm
Weight 3,42 Kg
File: KRA001_E V • 13 02/2000/e

KRA.16/25... + AD.3.V... 2/2 CARTRIDGE VALVES
WITH ELECTRICAL POSITION CONTROL VALVE
This valve series is used in those applications where
monitoring of the "actual" valve position is required for HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
managing machine safety cycle as required by current
accident prevention legislation.
Typical example of application where this product is

used include: hydraulic presses in general, plastic com-
ponents injection and blow-form presses, die-casting
presses.
The valve is composed of closure cover where the
inductive position monitoring proximity sensor is in-
serted to signal the two possible states of logic element
KRA.16/25... + AD.3.V...
manufactured to DIN 24342 standard.
AD.3.V... CH. I PAGE 13 This valve, in view of its being placed inside a safety
D15 DC COIL CH. I PAGE 18 system loop, can detect movements dangerous both for
the safety of the operator and of the machine itself. Use
L.V.D.T. FOR AD.3.V CH. I PAGE 21
a single solenoid directional valve AD.3.V... as piloting
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. I PAGE 19 unit allows increase in the safety system control level,
since even the piloting unit is equipped with a position
monitoring proximity sensor capable of signalling the
two possible valve states.
By combining these two monitoring systems it becomes possible to evaluate the hydraulic system response speed to prevent any possible
malfunctioning or dangerous situations
5 These covers are supplied complete with dowel and calibrated orifices on inputs A (AP) /P( X); mounting screws can be supplied on request
KRA.16... + AD.3.V... KRA.25... + AD.3.V...
Fixing screws T.C.E.I. M8X45 UNI 5931 Fixing screws T.C.E.I. M12X50 UNI 5931
Reference pin dia Ø 3X12 UNI 6873 Reference pin dia Ø5X12 UNI 6873
Screw S.T.E.I. M6X1X6 UNI 5923 dia Ø 1mm Screw S.T.E.I. M6X1X6 UNI 5923 dia ø1.2mm
File: KRA001_E V • 14 02/2000/e

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PROXIMITY SENSORS AND CONNECTORS
The inductive proximity sensors make it possible to detect metal objects; the operating
principle is based on a high frequency oscillator which produces an electromagnetic field in
the immediate vicinity of the sensor.
The presence of a metal object (activator) inside the field dampness the amplitude of the
oscillation because parte of electromagnetic energy is transferred from the sensor to the
activator and from there it is dissipated through the effect of the induced currents.
In addition to the shape and the dimensions of the sensor, its sensitivity also depends on the
type of metal from which the activator is made.
SPECIFICATIONS CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM

External diameter M12x1
Release distance 0 ÷ 1.1 mm Outlet PNP-NA
Outlet function PNP - NA 1 = brown (positive)
Stabilized supply 10 ÷ 30 VDC 3 = blue (negative)
Release hysteresis ≤ 0.2 mm 4 = black (positive signal)
Type of mounting wire
Max. current supplied 130 mA
Residual undulation ≤ 15%
Max switching frequency 1000 Hz
Casing material
Type of attachment
Degree of protection
stainless steel
connector
IP68 on active surface
5
Ambient temperature -25°C÷70°C
Protection against short circuit yes
HOUSING AND SENSOR OVERALL DIMENSIONS OVERALL DIMENSIONS CONNECTOR
TUA = Reamed working length

Ordering code: V86400003
File: KRA001_E V • 15 02/2000/e

5
File: KRA001_E V • 16 02/2000/e

TECHNICAL IN LINE VALVES
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
IN LINE VALVES
DP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (BAR) (SEE BREVINI FLUID POWER
F FORCE (N) CARTRIDGE VALVES)
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING
PARBAK PARBAK RING
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
SR
X
Y
SERIES CONNECTION
PILOTING
DRAINAGE
6
Plant

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 06TA_E VI • 1 03/2010/e

TECHNICAL SUBPLATES
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
M MANOMETER CONNECTION SUBPLATES
NG KNOB TURNS CETOP 2
OR SEAL RING
PARBAK PARBAK RING
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
X PILOTING
Y DRAINAGE
Incorrect use of the products described in this BS.2...
BC.2...
CH. VII
CH. VII
PAGE
PAGE
2
4
7
reserves the right to make constructional BM.2...
product presented, its data, features and CH. VII PAGE 5
examined and checked by members of the SUBPLATES
knowledge) taking into consideration the CETOP 3
analysing the data, features and technical SUBPLATES
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the CETOP 5
BS.3...
CH. VII PAGE 7
BS.3.W...
CH. VII PAGE 9
Plant BC.3...
Via Natta, 1 (Z.I. Mancasale) CH. VII PAGE 10
42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) BC.* FOR XQ*3 BS.5...
Tel. +39 0522 5058 CH. VII PAGE 13 CH. VII PAGE 19
Fax +39 0522 505856 BC.06... BC.5...
CH. VII PAGE 14 CH. VII PAGE 24
General terms and conditions of sale: BM.3... BM.5...
CAP. VII PAGE 16 CH. VII PAGE 28
File: 07TA_E VII • 1 02/2000/e

BS.2... SINGLE STATION SUBPLATE
BS.2.**...
BS Single subplate (blanking)
2 CETOP 2/NG4
** 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 07
00 No variant
CETOP 2 SUBPLATES
BS.2.**.../ BS.2.12... 1 Serial No.
BS.2.14... CH. VII PAGE 2
BS.2.16... / BS.2.20...
BS.3.2... CH. VII PAGE 3 Weight: 0,09 Kg
BC.2.50.AB... / BC.2.50.PT... Fixing screws
BC.2.51... CH. VII PAGE 4 M5x25 UNI 5931
BM.2.**.../ BM.2.60...
CH. VII PAGE 5
BM.2.50... / BM.2.70...
CH. VII PAGE 6
BS.2.12 (REAR CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
7 2 CETOP 2/NG4
12 1/4" BSP
rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,3 Kg
BS.2.14 (SIDE CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
2 CETOP 2/NG4
14 1/4" BSP
side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,3 Kg
File: BS2001_E VII • 2 01/2010/e

BS.2.16 (CONNECTORS SIDE A AND B, REAR P AND T)
BS Single subplate
2 CETOP 2/NG4
16 1/4" BSP rear

and side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,3 Kg
BS Single subplate
2 CETOP 2/NG4
20 1/4" BSP rear

and side connectors
grub screws
* Setting ranges
7
4 = max. 250 bar (orange spring)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,45 Kg
• The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring:
Fixing screws M5x50 UNI 5931 see cartridge valve type CMP.02...
BS.3.2 (REDUCTION PLATE FROM CETOP 3/NG6 TO CETOP 2/NG4)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
2 CETOP 2/NG4
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,12 Kg
File: BS2001_E VII • 3 01/2010/e

BC.2... MODULAR COMPONENTS
BC.2.50.AB INTERMEDIATE MODULE FOR PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTION (VENTS A AND B LINES)
BC Module base
2 CETOP 2/NG4
50 Intermediate module for

pressure gauge connection
AB Check at ports A and B
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,4 Kg
BC.2.50.PT INTERMEDIATE MODULE FOR PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTION (VENTS P AND T LINES)
BC Module base
2 CETOP 2/NG4
50 Intermediate module for

pressure gauge connection
7 PT
00
Check at ports P and T
No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,4 Kg
BC.2.51 DOWEL CARRIER PLATE FOR SOLENOID VALVE
BC Module base
2 CETOP 2/NG4
51 Dowel carrier plate for

solenoid valve
00 No variant CALIBRATED
DIAPHRAGMS AVAILABLE
1 Serial No. d M5x0.8x5
0.5 M89.10.0044
0.6 M89.10.0045
Weight: 0,05 Kg 0.7 M89.10.0046
0.8 M89.10.0015
0.9 M89.10.0047
1 M89.10.0048
1.2 M89.10.0049
File: BC2001_E VII • 4 00/2000/e

BM.2... MULTI STATION SUBPLATE
BM.2.50/60/70
BM Multi station subplate (supplied in aluminium material)
2 CETOP 2/NG4
** 50 = Connected in parallel with pressure relief valve and rear connectors

70 = Connected in parallel with pressure relief valve and side connectors
60 = Connected in parallel without pressure relief valve and side connectors
* No. of valve seats

2/3/4/5/6/7/8
C Type of adjustment (omit for 60 version)

Grub screw
* Setting range (omit for 60 version)

** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.

see cartridge valve type CMP.02...
BM.2.60 CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITHOUT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Type A B Weight (Kg)

7
BM.2.60/2 105 91 0,64
BM.2.60/3 145 131 0,87
BM.2.60/4 185 171 1,10
BM.2.60/5 225 211 1,33
BM.2.60/6 265 251 1,56
BM.2.60/7 305 291 1,79
BM.2.60/8 345 331 2,02
File: BM2001_E VII • 5 00/2000/e

BM.2.50 CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

BM.2.50/2 130 116 0,70
BM.2.50/3 170 156 0,93
BM.2.50/4 210 196 1,16
BM.2.50/5 250 236 1,39
BM.2.50/6 290 276 1,62
BM.2.50/7 330 316 1,85
BM.2.50/8 370 356 2,08
7 BM.2.70 CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

BM.2.70/2 130 116 0,93
BM.2.70/3 170 156 1,16
BM.2.70/4 210 196 1,39
BM.2.70/5 250 236 1,62
BM.2.70/6 290 276 1,85
BM.2.70/7 330 316 2,08
BM.2.70/8 370 356 2,31
File: BM2001_E VII • 6 00/2000/e

BS.3.01...
3 CETOP 3/NG6
01 P / T / A / B closed
CETOP 3 SUBPLATES
BS.3.01... / BS.3.0*... 00 No variant
CH. VII PAGE 7
BS.3.10/11... / BS.3.12/13...
1 Serial No.
BS.3.14/15... / BS.3.16/17...
CH. VII PAGE 8 Weight: 0,2 Kg
BS.3.20/21... / BS.VMP.10...
Fixing screws
BS.3.W... CH. VII PAGE 9 M5x14 UNI 5931
BC.3.25/27... / BC.3.30/32... K = plate OR (Q25.95.0001)
BC.3.40... CH. VII PAGE 10
BC.3.41/*...
CH. VII PAGE 11
BC.3.50... / BC.3.51...
BC.3.07... / BC.3.107...
CH. VII PAGE 12
BC.3.08... / BC.3.09...
BC.06.XQ3... / BC.06.XQP3...
CH. VII PAGE 13
BC.06.25/27...
BS.3.**...
CAP. VII PAGE 14
BC.06.30/32... / BC.06.40... BS Single subplate (blanking)
BC.06.41/*... CH. VII PAGE 15
BM.3.**... / BM.3.60...
CH. VII PAGE 16
3 CETOP 3/NG6 7
BM.3.50.../ BM.3.70... ** 02/03/04/05/06/07/08/09
CH. VII PAGE 17
00 No variant
BM.3.52... / BM.3.72...
CH. VII PAGE 18
1 Serial No.

XQ.3... CH. VIII PAGE 12
XQP.3... CH. VIII PAGE 14
Weight: 0,5 Kg
File: BS3001_E VII • 7 03/2010/e

BS.3.10/11... (REAR CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 10 = 1/8" BSP rear connectors

11 = 1/4" BSP rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BS.3.12/13 (REAR CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 12 = 3/8" BSP
rear connectors
13 = 1/4" BSP
rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1 Kg - Fixing screws M5x25 UNI 5931
7 BS.3.14/15 (SIDE CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 14 = 3/8" BSP side connectors

15 = 1/4" BSP side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BS.3.16/17 (CONNECTORS SIDE A AND B, REAR P AND T)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 16 = 3/8" BSP rear

and side connectors
17 = 1/4" BSP rear
and side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
File: BS3001_E VII • 8 03/2010/e

BS.3.20/21 (CONNECTORS SIDE A AND B, REAR P AND T)
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 20 = 3/8" BSP rear and side connectors

21 = 1/4" BSP rear and side connectors
* M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screws
* Setting range
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BS.VMP.10 SINGLE STATION SUBPLATE WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE FOR SURFACE MOUNTING (E.G. ON TAKE COVER)
BS Single subplate
VMP Max. pressure valve
10 3/8" BSP connectors
* M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
7
V = Handwheel
* Setting range
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,6 Kg
BS.3.W...
BS Single subplate
3 CETOP 3/NG6
W Wheatstone bridge
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,8 Kg
File: BS3001_E VII • 9 03/2010/e

BC.3.25/27 P/T REAR AND SIDE CONNECTORS 1/2" BSP- 3 RODS
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 25 = 1/2" BSP rear and side

connectors with CMP
27 = 1/2" BSP rear and side
connectors without CMP
* Adjustment (omit for 27 version)

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
00 No variant
BC.*.25... BC.*.27...
1 Serial No.
Weight BC.3.25: 2,7 Kg

Weight BC.3.27: 2,6 Kg • The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring:
BC.3.30/32 - 3 RODS
BC Module base
7 3 CETOP 3/NG6
** 30 = 3/8" BSP BC.*.30...

connectors in parallel
32 = 3/8" BSP
connectors in series
00 No variant
1 Serial No. BC.*.32...
Weight Kg. 1,4
BC.3.40 - 3 RODS
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
40 Blanking
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,7 Kg
File: BC3001_E VII • 10 02/2000/e

ASSEMBLED MODULAR COMPONENT BASES - 3 RODS
Rods code L Composition

BC.3.41/2 M80.20.0010 146 BC.3.25/27 + 2 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/3 M80.20.0011 196 BC.3.25/27 + 3 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/4 M80.20.0012 246 BC.3.25/27 + 4 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/5 M80.20.0013 296 BC.3.25/27 + 5 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/6 M80.20.0014 346 BC.3.25/27 + 6 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/7 M80.20.0015 396 BC.3.25/27 + 7 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
BC.3.41/8 M80.20.0016 446 BC.3.25/27 + 8 BC.3.30/32 + BC.3.40
Nuts code Q26.56.0514
Pieces 3
7
• For series connection the last block high up should be connected in parallel (BC.3.30)
• Single components should be ordered separately
• The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring: see cartridge valve type CMP.10...
BC.3.41/* RODS FOR MODULAR ASSEMBLY

Rod code Pieces L Composition
BC.3.41/2.00.1 3 146 for 2 solenoid valves
File: BC3001_E VII • 11 02/2000/e

BC.3.50 INTERMEDIATE MODULE FOR PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTION
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
50 Intermediate module for pressure

gauge connection at ports A/B/P/T
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1 Kg
BC.3.51 DOWEL BASE PLATE FOR SOLENOID VALVE

CALIBRATED
BC Module base DIAPHRAGMS AVAILABLE
d M8x1x8
3 CETOP 3/NG6 0.6 M89.10.0007
0.7 M89.10.0008
51 Dowel base plate 0.8 M89.10.0009
0.9 M89.10.0012
1 M89.10.0010
00 No variant 1.2 M89.10.0011
1.4 M89.10.0038
1 Serial No. 1.5 M89.10.0035
1.75 M89.10.0042
2 M89.10.0041
Weight: 0,2 Kg 2.5 M89.10.0036
K = plate OR (Q25.95.0001)
7 BC.3.07 BASE PLATE FOR DOUBLE FLOW RATE →A

P→ AND →T
B→
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
07 bases plate
for twin flow rate
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,5 Kg
BC.3.107 BASE PLATE FOR USING 4 WAY VALVE AS 2 WAY ONLY
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
107 base for using

4 way valve as 2 way only
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,5 Kg
File: BC3001_E VII • 12 02/2000/e

BC.3... / BC.06... MODULAR COMPONENTS
BC.3.08 INTERMEDIATE BASE PLATE FOR XQ.3... (P →A)
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
08 Base plate for XQ3 ( P→A)
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,5 Kg
BC.3.09 INTERMEDIATE BASE PLATE FOR XQ.3... (B →P)
BC Module base
3 CETOP 3/NG6
09 Base plate for XQ3 ( B→P)
00 No variant
1 Serial No. Weight: 1,4 Kg
• To take advantage of this base it is necessary

to operate with the pump at connector A of the
multi station base plate
BC.06.XQ3 BASE PLATE FOR PROPORTIONAL VALVE TYPE XQ.3...

7
BC Module base
06 CETOP 3/NG6
XQ3 base plate XQ3
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,4 Kg
BC.06.XQP3 BASE PLATE FOR PROPORTIONAL REGULATOR TYPE XQP.3...
BC Module base
06 CETOP 3/NG06
XQP3 Base for XQP3 proportional regulator
00 No variant
1 Serial No
Weight: 1,4 Kg
File: BC$$001_E VII • 13 01/2000/e

BC.06.25/27 P AND T REAR AND SIDE CONNECTORS 3/8" BSP - 2 RODS
BC Module base
06 CETOP 3/NG6
** 25 = 3/8" BSP rear and side

connectors with CMP
27 = 3/8" BSP rear and side
connectors without CMP
* Adjustment (omit for 27 version)

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
00 No variant
BC.*.25... BC.*.27...
1 Serial No.
Weight BC.3.25 : 3 Kg
Weight BC.3.27 : 2,8 Kg • The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring:
ASSEMBLED MODULAR COMPONENT BASES - 2 RODS
7 BC.06.41/2 M80.20.0001
BC.06.41/3 M80.20.0002
138
187
BC.06.25/27
BC.06.25/27
+
+
2
3
BC.06.30/32
BC.06.30/32
+
+
BC.06.40
BC.06.40
BC.06.41/4 M80.20.0003 236 BC.06.25/27 + 4 BC.06.30/32 + BC.06.40
BC.06.41/5 M80.20.0004 285 BC.06.25/27 + 5 BC.06.30/32 + BC.06.40
BC.06.41/6 M80.20.0005 334 BC.06.25/27 + 6 BC.06.30/32 + BC.06.40
BC.06.41/7 M80.20.0006 382 BC.06.25/27 + 7 BC.06.30/32 + BC.06.40
BC.06.41/8 M80.20.0007 430 BC.06.25/27 + 8 BC.06.30/32 + BC.06.40
Pieces 2
• For series connection the last block high up should be connected in parallel (BC.06.30)
• Single components should be ordered separately
• The minimum permissible setting range depending on the spring: see cartridge valve type CMP.10...
File: BC06001_E VII • 14 01/2000/e

BC.06.30/32 - 2 RODS
BC Module base
06 CETOP 3/NG6
** 30 = 3/8" BSP BC.*.30...

32 = 3/8" BSP
00 No variant
1 Serial No. BC.*.32...
Weight: 1,1 Kg
BC.06.40 - 2 RODS
BC Module base
06 CETOP 3/NG6 - 2 rods
40 Blanking
7
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 0,4 Kg
BC.06.41/* RODS FOR MODULAR ASSEMBLY
Rod code Pieces L Composition

File: BC06001_E VII • 15 01/2000/e

BM.3.**...
BM Multi station subplate (standard versions are supplied in cast iron material)
3 CETOP 3/NG6

70 = Connected in parallel with pressure relief valve and side connectors
52 = Connected in series with pressure relief valve and rear connectors
72 = Connected in series with pressure relief valve and side connectors
* No. of valve seats

2/3/4/5/6/7/8
* Type of adjustment (omit for 60 version)

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw

** 00 = No variant
AL = in aluminium material versions
1 Serial No. • The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring:
7 Type
A B Weight (Kg)
BM.3.60/2 120 108 3,6
BM.3.60/3 170 158 5,1
BM.3.60/4 220 208 6,7
BM.3.60/5 270 258 8.2
BM.3.60/6 320 308 9,7
BM.3.60/7 370 358 11,2
BM.3.60/8 420 408 12,6
File: BM3001_E VII • 16 01/2000/e


BM.3.50/2 141 126 4,6
BM.3.50/3 191 176 6,1
BM.3.50/4 241 226 7,6
BM.3.50/5 291 276 9,1
BM.3.50/6 341 326 10,6
BM.3.50/7 391 376 12,1
BM.3.50/8 441 426 13,6

7
BM.3.70/2 160 148 4,9
BM.3.70/3 210 198 6,4
BM.3.70/4 260 248 7,9
BM.3.70/5 310 298 9,4
BM.3.70/6 360 348 10,9
BM.3.70/7 410 398 12,4
BM.3.70/8 460 448 13,9
File: BM3001_E VII • 17 01/2000/e

BM.3.52 CONNECTED IN SERIES WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

BM.3.52/2 141 126 4,6
BM.3.52/3 191 176 6,3
BM.3.52/4 241 226 7,6
BM.3.52/5 291 276 9,2
BM.3.52/6 341 326 10,7
BM.3.52/7 391 376 12,2
BM.3.52/8 441 426 13,7
7 BM.3.72 CONNECTED IN SERIES WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

BM.3.72/2 160 148 4,9
BM.3.72/3 210 198 6,4
BM.3.72/4 260 248 7,9
BM.3.72/5 310 298 9,4
BM.3.72/6 360 348 10,9
BM.3.72/7 410 398 12,4
BM.3.72/8 460 448 13,9
File: BM3001_E VII • 18 01/2000/e

BS.5.01...
5 CETOP 5/NG10
01 P/T/A/B closed
CETOP 5 SUBPLATES
BS.5.01 / BS.5.0* CH. VII PAGE 19 00 No variant
BS.5.12... / BS.5.13...
BS.5.14... / BS.5.15... 1 Serial No.
CH. VII PAGE 20
BS.5.16... / BS.5.17...
BS.5.3... CH. VII PAGE 21 • Pay attention please, use these
subplate in applications at slow
BS.5.30/31... CH. VII PAGE 22
pressure (P max. 150 bar dy-
BS.VMP.20... / BS.5.29... namic)
CH. VII PAGE 23
BC.5.36/28... CH. VII PAGE 24
BC.5.41/*... / BC.5.40...
CH. VII PAGE 25
BC.5.30/32... / BC.5.50... / BC.5.51...
CH. VII PAGE 26
BC.5.07... / BC.5.107...
BC.5.3A... / BC.10.06...
CH. VII PAGE 27
BM.5.**... / BM.5.50...
CH. VII PAGE 28
BM.5.60... / BM.5.70...
Weight: 0,5 Kg
BM.5.80... CH. VII PAGE 29

Fixing screws
M6x15 UNI 5931
K = plate OR (Q25.95.0002)
7
BS.5.**...
5 CETOP 5/NG10
** 02/03/04/05/06/07/08/09
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,2 Kg
File: BS5001_E VII • 19 02/2010/e

BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
12 1/2" BSP
rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
13 3/4" BSP
rear connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
7 BS.5.14 (SIDE CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
14 1/2" BSP
side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BS.5.15 (SIDE CONNECTORS)
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
15 3/4" BSP
side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
File: BS5001_E VII • 20 02/2010/e

BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
16 1/2" BSP
rear and side connectors
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 2,6 Kg
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
17 3/4" BSP
rear and side connectors
00 No variant 7
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3,9 Kg
Fixing screws
M6x50 UNI 5931
BS.5.3 (REDUCTION PLATE FROM CETOP 5/NG10 TO CETOP 3/NG6)
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
3 CETOP 3/NG6
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,1 Kg
Fixing screws
M6x30 UNI 5931
File: BS5001_E VII • 21 02/2010/e

BS.5.30/31
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
** 30 = Connectors A and B side, P and T rear (all 3/4" BSP) BS.5.30...

31 = Connectors A and B side, P and T rear (all 3/4" BSP)
* M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Setting range
00 No variant
BS.5.31...
1 Serial No.

BS.5.30 (CONNECTORS A AND B SIDE, P AND T REAR)
Weight: 5,5 Kg
Fixing screws
M6x75 UNI 5931
BS.5.31 (CONNECTORS A AND B SIDE, P AND T SIDE AND REAR)
File: BS5001_E VII • 22 02/2010/e

BS.VMP.20 SINGLE STATION SUBPLATE WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE FOR SURFACE MOUNTING (E.G. ON TANK COVER)
BS Single subplate
VMP Max. pressure valve
20 1/2" BSP connectors
* M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
V = Handwheel
* Setting range
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3,1 Kg • The minimum permissible setting pressure depending on the spring:
BS.5.29 SINGLE STATION SUBPLATE WITH MAX. PRESSURE VALVE FOR AD.5.I...
BS Single subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
29 1/2" BSP - P rear connector

1/2" BSP - A and B side connectors
1/2" BSP - T rear connector
7
3/4" BSP - T side connector
Grub screw
* Setting range
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 4,5 Kg
Tightening torque CMP.10...

60 ÷ 70 Nm / 6 ÷ 7 Kgm
M = Manometer connector (1/4" BSP)
File: BS5001_E VII • 23 02/2010/e

BC.5.36/28 P AND T REAR AND SIDE CONNECTORS 3/4" BSP
BC Module base
BC.5.36...
5 CETOP 5/NG10
** 36 = 3/4" BSP (P and T rear and side connectors with pressure relief valve)
28 = 3/4" BSP (P and T rear and side connectors without pressure relief valve)
BC.5.28...
* Type adjustment (omit for 28 version)
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
• The minimum permissible setting pressure valve is the same for all spring:
BC.5.36 P/T REAR AND SIDE CONNECTORS WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Weight: 5,3 Kg
BC.5.28 P/T REAR AND SIDE CONNECTORS WITHOUT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Weight: 3,9 Kg
Fixing screws
M6x50 UNI 5931
File: BC5001_E VII • 24 03/2000/e

ASSEMBLED BASE MODULES - 3 RODS

BC.5.41/2 M80.25.0001 205 BC.5.36/28+ 2 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/3 M80.25.0002 280 BC.5.36/28+ 3 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/4 M80.25.0003 355 BC.5.36/28+ 4 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/5 M80.25.0004 430 BC.5.36/28+ 5 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/6 M80.25.0005 505 BC.5.36/28+ 6 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/7 M80.25.0006 580 BC.5.36/28+ 7 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
BC.5.41/8 M80.25.0007 655 BC.5.36/28+ 8 BC.5.30/32 + BC.5.40
Pieces 3
• Single components should be ordered separately (see pages VII•24,26,27)

7
• The minimum permissible setting pressure is the same for all spring: see cartridge valve type CMP.30...
BC.5.41/* RODS FOR MODULAR ASSEMBLIES

Rods code Pieces L Composition
BC.5.41/2.00.1 3 205 for 2 solenoid valve
BC.5.40...
BC Module base
40 Blanking
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1 Kg
File: BC5001_E VII • 25 03/2000/e

BC.5.30/32
BC Module base
** 30 = 1/2" BSP
connectors in parallel BC.5.30...
31 = 3/4" BSP BC.5.31...
32 = 1/2" BSP
** 00 = No variant
AI = A and B rear connector
AS = A and B upper connectors BC.5.32...
1 Serial No.
Weight: 3 Kg
BC.5.50 INTERMEDIATE MODULE FOR PRESSURE GAUGE
BC Module base
5 CETOP 5/NG10
7
50 Intermediate module for pressure
gauge connection at ports A/B/P/T
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 2,3 Kg
K = plate OR (Q25.95.0002)
BC.5.51 DOWEL PLATE FOR SOLENOID VALVE

CALIBRATED
BC Module base DIAPHRAGMS AVAILABLE
d M8x1x8
5 CETOP 5/NG10 0.6 M89.10.0007
0.7 M89.10.0008
51 Subplate for solenoid valve 0.8 M89.10.0009
0.9 M89.10.0012
1 M89.10.0010
00 No variant 1.2 M89.10.0011
1.4 M89.10.0038
1 Serial No. 1.5 M89.10.0035
1.75 M89.10.0042
2 M89.10.0041
2.5 M89.10.0036
Weight: 0,5 Kg
K = plate OR (Q25.95.0002)
File: BC5001_E VII • 26 03/2000/e

BC.5.07 BASE FOR DOUBLE FLOW RATE →A

P→ E →T
B→
BC Module base
5 CETOP 5/NG10
07 Base for double flow rate
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,2 Kg
BC.5.107 BASE FOR USE WITH 2 WAY VALVE
BC Module base
5 CETOP 5/NG10
107 Base for use

with 2 way valve
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
Weight: 1,2 Kg 7
BC.5.3A REDUCTION BASE FROM BC.5... TO BC.3...
BC Module base
3A CETOP 3/NG6 - 3 rods
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
BC.10.06 REDUCTION BASE FROM BC.5... TO BC.06...
BC Module base
00 No variant
1 Serial No.
File: BC5001_E VII • 27 03/2000/e

BM.5... MULTI STATION SUBPLATES
BM.5.**...
BM Multi station subplate (standard versions are supplied in cast iron material)
5 CETOP 5/NG10

70 = Connected in parallel with pressure relief valve and 3/4" BSP P/T connectors and 1/2" BSP side A/B
80 = Connected in parallel with pressure relief valve and 1" BSP P/T connectors and 3/4" BSP side A/B
* No. of valves seats (for BM.5.80... max 6))

2/3/4/5/6/7/8
* Type of adjustment (omit for 60 version)

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
** 00 = No variant
AL = in aluminium material (only for BM560 and BM570 versions)
1 Serial No.
• The minimum permissible setting pressure is the same for all spring:
7 Type
BM.5.50/2
A
216
B
200
Weight (Kg)
8,5
BM.5.50/3 291 275 11,3
BM.5.50/4 366 350 14
BM.5.50/5 441 425 16,8
BM.5.50/6 516 500 19,5
BM.5.50/7 591 575 22,3
BM.5.50/8 666 650 25
File: BM5001_E VII • 28 01/2000/e

BM.5... MULTI STATION SUBPLATES

BM.5.60/2 175 159 10
BM.5.60/3 250 234 14,2
BM.5.60/4 325 309 18,4
BM.5.60/5 400 384 22,6
BM.5.60/6 475 459 26,8
BM.5.60/7 550 534 31
BM.5.60/8 625 609 35,2

BM.5.70/2 216 200 12,7
BM.5.70/3 291 275 16,8
BM.5.70/4 366 350 21
BM.5.70/5 441 425 25,2
BM.5.70/6 516 500 29,5
BM.5.70/7
BM.5.70/8
591
666
575
650
33,6
37,8 7

BM.5.80/2 225 205 19,5
BM.5.80/3 300 280 26
BM.5.80/4 375 355 32,5
BM.5.80/5 450 430 39
BM.5.80/6 525 505 45,5
File: BM5001_E VII • 29 01/2000/e

7
File: BM5001_E VII • 30 01/2000/e

TECHNICAL PROPORTIONAL VALVES
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS PROPORTIONAL VALVES
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS XD.3.A... / XD.3.C...
OR SEAL RING CH. VIII PAGE 2
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
PARBAK PARBAK RING CH. VIII PAGE 3
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION XDP.3.A... / XDP.3.C ...
PR REDUCED PRESSURE (BAR) CH. VIII PAGE 4
Q FLOW (L/MIN) D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
QP PUMP FLOW (L/MIN) CH. VIII PAGE 5
SE ELASTIC PIN XDP.5.A... / XDP.5.C...
SF BALL CH. VIII PAGE 6
SR SERIES CONNECTION D19P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
X PILOTING CH. VIII PAGE 7
Y DRAINAGE XDC.3... SERIE 2
Incorrect use of the products described in this CH. VIII PAGE 8
catalogue may cause harm to personnel and PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
for each product in this catalogue may be CH. VIII PAGE 9
subject to variation, and the manufacturer XECV.3...
reserves the right to make constructional CH. VIII PAGE 10
product presented, its data, features and XEPV.3...
AM.3.H...
CH. VIII PAGE 13
8
knowledge) taking into consideration the CH. VIII PAGE 16
intended use of product. AM.5.H...
The user must, in particular, assess the CH. VIII PAGE 17
operating conditions of each product in relation XQ.3...
CH. VIII PAGE 18
specifications in view of the proposed D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the CH. VIII PAGE 19
XQP.3.
event of breakdown, are respected. CH. VIII PAGE 20
D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
CH. VIII PAGE 21
XQP.5.
CH. VIII PAGE 22
D19P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
CH. VIII PAGE 23
XP.3...
CH. VIII PAGE 24
Plant
AM.3.XMP...
Via Natta, 1 (Z.I. Mancasale) CH. VIII PAGE 26
Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 08TA_E VIII • 1 04/2000/e

XD.3.A... / XD.3.C... SOLENOID OPERATING
PROPORTIONAL VALVES CETOP 3
XD.3.A../XD.3.C.. series valves are used for controlling fluid direction and flow rate as a
function of the supply current to the proportional control solenoid.
Any valve Δp variation causes a change in the set flow rate; however the valve itself ensure
a high level internal compensation by limiting the controlled flow rate.
To ensures a constant flow rate and reduce leakage, we recommend to use AM3H2V or
AM3H3V hydrostats.
Performances shown in this catalogue are guaranteed only using 2 or 3 way modular
assembly hydrostats type AM.3.H. ...
The shown flow rates are typical for one line operation ( e.g. from P to B), while higher flow
rates are obtainable by using the valve with our flow rate doubling sub-base type BC.3.07 (see
diagram next page). This type of configuration extends considerably the flow rate limit.
XD.3...
"D15P" PROPORT. SOLENOIDS CH. VIII PAGE 3
REM.S.RA... CH. IX PAGE 4
REM.D.RA... CH. IX PAGE 7
XD.3.A.01.N.. XD.3.A.03.N.. XD.3.C.01.N.. XD.3.C.03.N..
SE.3.AN21.00... CH. IX PAGE 11
AM.3.H... CH. VIII PAGE 16
XD.3.A.01.P.. XD.3.A.03.P.. XD.3.C.01.P.. XD.3.C.03.P..
XD.3.A.01.T.. XD.3.A.03.T.. XD.3.C.01.T.. XD.3.C.03.T..
ORDERING CODE INPUT SIGNAL CURVES - FLOW RATE

XD Proportional valve
XD.3.*.01.N XD.3.*.01.N
(3 l/min P → A/B) (10 l/min P → A/B)
3 CETOP 3/NG6
* A = Single solenoid
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
C = Double solenoid
** Type of spool
01 = 03 =
* Flow path control (see symbols table)
8 N = symmetrical
P = meter in
T = meter out
I (%)
XD.3.*.01.N
(15 l/min P → A/B)
I (%)
XD.3.*.01.N
(18 l/min P → A/B)
* Flow rating
l/min (Δp 5 bar)
1 = 3 l/min
2 = 10 l/min
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
3 = 15 l/min
4 = 18 l/min
* E = 9VDC (2.35 A)
F = 12VDC (1.76 A)
G = 24VDC (0.88 A)
I (%) I (%)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton POWER LIMITS TRANSMITTED
P1 = Rotary emergency P→→A / B →T
P5 = Rotary emergency 180° OR P→ →B / A→→T
2 Serial No.
P (bar)
Q (l/min)
The fluid used is a mineral based oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C.
The tests have been carried out at with a fluid of a 40°C.
File: XD3002_E VIII • 2 08/2010/e

XD.3.A... / XD.3.C... SOLENOID OPERATING PROPORTIONAL VALVES CETOP 3
OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
Max. operating pressure ports T - for dynamic pressure see note (*) 250 bar REM.S.RA.*.*. and REM.D.RA.*.*.
Regulated flow rate 3 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 25 l/min Card type control for single and double sole-
Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED noid
Type of protection IP 65
Flow rate gain See diagrams SE.3.AN.21.00...
Hysteresis with connection P/A/B/T Δp = 5 bar (P/A) ≤7% of max. flow rate EUROCARD type control for single and dou-
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s ble solenoid
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C AM.3.H.2V.P1 and AM.3.H.3V.P1
Max. contamination level class 8 in accordance with Hydrostats 2 or 3 way.
Weight XD.3.A... (single solenoid) 1,5 Kg
Weight XD.3.C... (double solenoid) 1,7 Kg SCHEMA FOR DOUBLE FLOW RATE
Type of voltage 9V 12V 24V
Max. current 2.35A 1.76 A 0.88 A XD.3.A...
Solenoid coil resistance at 25°C (77°F) 2.25 Ohm 4.0 Ohm 16.0 Ohm
(*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles. BC.3.07
• Operating specifications are valid for fluid with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using
the specified ARON electronic control units. Standard base
XD.3.A... OVERALL DIMENSIONS XD.3.C... OVERALL DIMENSIONS
P1 Rotary P5 Rotary
emergency emergency 180°
Support plane
Fixing screws UNI 5931 M5x40 (min. 8.8 material screws are recommended) specification
"D15P" PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
Type of protection (in relation to connector used) IP 66

Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight (coil) 0,354 Kg
Weight (solenoid) 0,608 Kg
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: XD3002_E VIII • 3 08/2010/e

XDP.3.A... / XDP.3.C ...
PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES OPEN LOOP
The open loop valves of series XDP... control the direction and the volume of the flow according
to the feeding current to the proportional solenoid. By using a valve body equipped with
increased passage channels it is possible to reach the highest capacity of its dimensions at a
parity of pressure drops, (40 l/min with Δp of 10 bar).
Each Δp variation on the valve leads to the variation of the capacity which has been set, anyway
the valve guarantees an high inner compensation grade and limits the adjustment capacity.
assembly hydrostats type AM.3.H. ... By using the valve with the base for capacity doubling
type BC.3.07 (see next page) a greater capacity cam be obtained.
XDP.3...
D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS CH. VIII PAGE 5 XDP.3.C.01.N... XDP.3.C.03.N... XDP.3.C.01.P...
SE.3.AN21.00... CH. IX PAGE 11
AM.3.H... CH. VIII PAGE 16 XDP.3.A.01.N... XDP.3.A.03.N... XDP.3.A.01.P...
INPUT SIGNAL CURVES - FLOW RATE

XDP.3.*.01.N XDP.3.*.01.N
(8 l/min P → A/B) (15 l/min P → A/B)
ORDERING CODE
Δp = 10 bar Δp = 10 bar
XDP Open loop proportional
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
directional valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6 With Δp = 5 bar
AM.3.H.3V.P1.08
(Δp »8 bar)
C = Double solenoid
I (%) I (%)
** Type of spool (null position)
XDP.3.*.01.N XDP.3.*.01.N
8 01 = 03 = (25 l/min P → A/B) (40 l/min P → A/B)
* Flow path control

(see hydraulic symbols table)
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
N = symmetrical Δp = 10 bar Δp = 10 bar
P = meter in (only with 01 spool)

* Flow rating Δp = 5 bar Δp = 5 bar
l/min (Δp 10 bar) In order to reduced the un-
1 = 8 l/min loading pressure for rated
2 = 15 l/min flow version at 40 l/min we
advise to use the 3 way type I (%) I (%)
3 = 25 l/min
AM.5.H.3V... hydrostat.
6 = 40 l/min
* Max. current to solenoid
E = 2.35 A
F = 1.76 A POWER LIMITS TRANSMITTED
G = 0.88 A P → A/B → T or P → B/A → T
** 00 = No variant
P1 = Rotary emergency Curve 1
P5 = Rotary emergency 180° 15 l/min
V1 = Viton version
P (bar)
2 Serial No. Curve 2

40 l/min
2
1 version
Q (l/min)
File: XDP3002_E VIII • 4 01/2010/e

XDP.3.A... / XDP.3.C ... PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES OPEN LOOP
Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 350 bar AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL
Max. pressure port T - for dynamic pressure see note (*) 250 bar
Nominal flow 8 / 15 / 25 / 40 l/min REM.S.RA.*.*. and REM.D.RA.*.*.
Duty cycle Continuous 100% ED Electronic card control single and double pro-
Type of protection (depending on the connector used) IP 65 portional solenoid valve.
Flow rate gain See diagram
Power limits curves transmitted See diagram SE.3.AN.21.00...
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s Electronic card format EUROCARD for con-
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C trol and double proportional solenoid valve
Max. contamination level from class 7 at 9 in accordance
with NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75 AM.3.H.2V.P1 / AM.3.H.3V.P1
Weight XDP.3.A... (single solenoid) 1,7 Kg and AM.5.H.3V.P1 (*)
Weight XDP.3.C... (double solenoid) 2,9 Kg
Hydrostats 2 or 3 way
Max. current 2.35A 1.76 A 0.88 A (*) for rated flow XDP3 version at 40 l/min only
Solenoid coil resistance 25°C (77°F) 2.25 Ohm 4.0 Ohm 16.0 Ohm
Hysteresis P / A / B / T
with a pressure compensator AM.3.H.3V... ≤5 % <5% <8%
Response to step Δp = 5 bar (P/A)
0 ÷ 100% 32 ms 40 ms 85 ms
100% ÷ 0 33 ms 33 ms 33 ms CONFIGURATIONFORDOUBLEFLOWRATE
Frequency response -3db (Input signal 50% ±25% Vmax)
22Hz 22Hz 12Hz XDP.3.A...
(*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using the BC.3.07
specified ARON electronic control units. Performance data carried out using the
specified Aron power amplifier SE.3.AN... serie 1 - EUROCARD format - powered Standard subplate
to 24V.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
P1 Rotary emergency
8
P5 Rotary emergency 180°

(min. 8.8 material screws are recommended) specifications

Duty cycle 100% ED
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: XDP3002_E VIII • 5 01/2010/e

XDP.5.A... / XDP.5.C ...
PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES OPEN LOOP
The open loop valves of series XDP control the direction and the volume of the flow according
to the feeding current to the proportional solenoid.
Each Δp variation on the valve leads to the variation of the capacity which has been set,
anyway the valve guarantees an high inner compensation grade and limits the adjustment
capacity.
assembly hydrostats type AM.3.H. ... (see note below in ordering code).
Q5 variant - This variant that consists of a solenoid chamber drainage separated from the T
line and obtained on CETOP RO5 interface allows operation with up to 320 bar max. back
pressure on the T line. To ensure maximum solenoid valve mounting safety and supplemen-
tary drainage, only 12.9 material fixing screws must be used with it.
XDP.5...
XDP.5.C.01.N... XDP.5.C.03.N...
XDP.5.A.01.N... XDP.5.A.03.N...
ORDERING CODE
XDP Open loop proportional
directional valve
XDP.5.*.01.N XDP.5.*.01.N
(60 l/min P → A/B) (100 l/min P → A/B)
5 CETOP 5/NG10
* A = Single solenoid Δp = 10 bar Δp = 10 bar

C = Double solenoid
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
8 N
01 = 03 =
Symmetrical flow path control

(see hydraulic symbols table) I (%) I (%)
* Flow rating (*) Δp 10 bar

2 = 45 l/min POWER LIMITS TRANSMITTED
3 = 60 l/min P → A/B → T or P → B/A → T
5 = 100 l/min
* Max. current to solenoid Curve:

F = 2.5 A 60 l/min
G = 1.25 A
P (bar)
** 00 = No variant
P1 = Rotary emergency
V1 = Viton
Q5 = External drainage
Q (l/min)
1 Serial No.
(*) Guaranteed with 24Volt, 2.5Amps supply.
File: XDP5001_E VIII • 6 08/2008/e

• 6
XDP.5.A... / XDP.5.C ... PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES OPEN LOOP
AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL

REM.S.RA.*.*. and REM.D.RA.*.*.
Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 320 bar Electronic card control single and double pro-
Max. pressure port T - for dynamic pressure see note (*) 250 bar portional solenoid valve.
Max. pressure port T (with external drainage - Q5 variant) 320 bar
Nominal flow 45 / 60 / 100 l/min Δp=10bar)
AM.5.H.2V.P1 / AM.5.H.3V.P1(Δ
Duty cycle Continuous 100% ED Hydrostats 2 or 3 way.
Type of protection (depending on the connector used) IP 65
Flow rate gain See diagram
Power limits curves transmitted See diagram
Max. contamination level from class 7 at 9 in accordance with NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75
Weight XDP.5.A... (single solenoid) 4,97 Kg
Weight XDP.5.C... (double solenoid) 6,55 Kg
Max. current 2.5 A 1.25 A
Solenoid coil resistance 20°C (68°F) 2.85 Ohm 11.4 Ohm
Hysteresis P/A/B/T
with a pressure compensator AM.5.H.3V... <5% <8%
Response to step Δp = 10 bar (P/A)
0 ÷ 100% 56 ms 118 ms
100% ÷ 0 32 ms 32 ms
Frequency response -3db (Input signal 50% ±25% Vmax)
10Hz 7Hz
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using the
specified ARON electronic control units. Performance data carried out using the
specified Aron power amplifier type REM.S.RA... power supplied at 24V.
E = Manual override
P1 = Rotary emergency button
Q5 = External draining hole for XDP5 variante
Q5 only (Screws: material specifications
12.9 must be used)

(12.9 material screws are recommended)
8
Support plane
specifications
"D19P"
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 1,58 Kg
ETD19P - 01/2002/e
File: XDP5001_E VIII • 7 08/2008/e

VIII • 7
XDC.3... PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES
CLOSED LOOP POSITION CONTROL
The valves XDC serie 2 control the direction and the volume of the flow according to the feeding
current to the proportional solenoid. The position transducer type LDVT (inductive position
transducer) monitors the actual position of the spool.
In the electronic card (type SE.AN.21.RS...serie 3) the error between the actual position and
XDC.3...002 the reference signal is used to obtain a greater precision of the spool positioning, reducing also
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID CH. VIII PAGE 9 considerably the hysteresis and the repeatibility error of the valve. For a more accurate flow
control, 2 or 3-way pressure compensators modular plate design are available.
SE.3.AN21.RS...03 CH. IX PAGE 13
AM.3.H... CH. VIII PAGE 16 The shown flow rates are typical for one line operation (e.g. from P to B). By using the valve
AM.5.H... CH. VIII PAGE 17 with the base for capacity doubling type BC.3.07 greater capacity can be obtained.
XDC.3.C.01.N... XDC.3.C.03.N... XDC.3.C.01.P...
XDC.3.A.01.N... XDC.3.A.03.N... XDC.3.A.01.P...
Registered mark for industrial environment with reference to the electromagnetic

compatibility.
European norms: EN50082-2 - general safety norm - industrial environment;
EN50081-1 -emission general norm - residential environment
ORDERING CODE
CONFIGURATION FOR DOUBLE FLOW RATE
XDC Proportional directional valve
with closed loop position control
3 CETOP 3/NG6 XDC.3.A...
* A = Single solenoid BC.3.07

C = Double solenoid
Standard subplate
01 = 03 =
* Flow path control

(see hydraulic symbols table)
N = symmetrical INPUT SIGNAL CURVES - FLOW RATE
8 *
P = meter in (only with 01 spool)
Flow rating
In order to reduced the un-
XDC.3.*.01.N
(8 l/min P →A/B)
XDC.3.*.01.N
(15 l/min P → A/B)
l/min (Δp 10 bar)
loading pressure for rated
1 = 8 l/min
flow version at 40 l/min we
2 = 15 l/min
advise to use the 3 way type Δp = 10 bar Δp = 10 bar
3 = 25 l/min
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
AM.5.H.3V... hydrostat.
6 = 40 l/min
With Δp = 5 bar
F Max. current at solenoid: 1.76 A AM.3.H.3V.P1.08
(Δp »8 bar)
00 No variant
I (%) I (%)
2 Serial No. XDC.3.*.01.N XDC.3.*.01.N
(25 l/min P →A/B) (40 l/min P →A/B)
Notice:
in order to control the valve XDC3...serie 2
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
it need to use the electronic card Δp = 10 bar Δp = 10 bar

SE.AN.21.RS...serie 3, in exclusive way (See
Ch. IX).
Δp = 5 bar Δp = 5 bar
I (%) I (%)
File: XDC3002_E VIII • 8 01/2010/e

XDC.3... PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL VALVES CLOSED LOOP POSITION CONTROL
AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL
OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS OF VALVE WITH TRANSDUCER SE.3.AN.21.RS...serie 3 - Electronic card
Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 350 bar EUROCARD format for control of the propor-
Dynamic pressure port T 210 bar tional valve equipped with transducer
Static pressure port T 210 bar AM.3.H.2V.P1 / AM.3.H.3V.P1
Nominal flow 8 / 15 / 25 / 40 l/min AM.5.H.3V.P1 (*)
Duty cycle Continuous 100% ED
Type of protection (depending on the connectors used) IP 65 Hydrostats 2 or 3 way
Performance curves See diagrams (*) for rated flow XDC3 version at 40 l/min ) only
TRANSDUCER ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Max. contamination level class 7 to 9 in accordance to NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75
Weight XDC.3.A... (single solenoid) 1,94 Kg TRANSDUCER
Weight XDC.3.C... (double solenoid) 2,55 Kg
Max. current 1.76 A
Solenoid coil resistance at 20°C (68°F) 4.55 Ω
Solenoid coil resistance when hot 7.34 Ω
Hysteresis P/A/B/T with pressure compensator AM.3.H.3V... <1% 1 = Supply 18VDC ÷ 36VDC
Transient function with stepped electrical input signals Δp = 5 bar (P/A) 3 = Mass
0 ÷ 100% 65 ms 2 = Output 2V ÷ 10V
100% ÷ 0 75 ms
Repeatibility <0,5%
POSITION TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATION
Frequency response -3db (Input signal ±25% Vmax) 10 Hz Electrical measuring system LVDT
Insulation class wire H Nominal stroke 6 mm
Weight of solenoid 0,6 Kg Electrical connection M12x1
Insulation
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using the (depending on the connector used) IP65
SE3AN21RS... serie 3 ARON electronic control unit powered to 24V. Frequency response 500 Hz
Linearity tolerance ±1%
PROPORTIONAL
SOLENOID
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

SOL_XDC - 01/2000/e
File: XDC3002_E VIII • 9 01/2010/e

XECV.3... CLOSED LOOP PROPORTIONAL VALVE
WITH ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
The proportional directional valves XECV are designed as direct operated components for
subplate mounting. They are actuated by means of proportional solenoids with central thread
and removable coil. The position of the spool is controlled by integrated control electronics and
LVDT linear transducer sensor.
Features:
• Integrated control electronics
• Setup parameters by CAN interface U
S a b
• Current compensation, gain current and ramps setting XECV.3.01.N...

• Monitoring of the valve by real time scope interface
European norms: EN 61000 - ElectroMagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) - industrial environment
XECV.3... U
S a b
AM.3.H... CH. VIII PAGE 16 XECV.3.03.N...


(4 l/min P → A/B) (8 l/min P → A/B)
ORDERING CODE
XECV Position loop proportional valve with
integrated electronics 24Vdc
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** Type of spool
01 = spool with P, A, B
and T ports, closed
03 = spool with P port closed,

and A, B, T ports connected (15 l/min P → A/B) (25 l/min P → A/B)
8 N Symmetrical flow control
* Flow rating at Δp 8bar

0 = 4 l/min
1 = 8 l/min
2 = 15 l/min
3 = 25 l/min
6 = 36 l/min (we advise to use
the hydrostat AM5H3VP108)
S CAN bus communication

S = standard ARON
(36 l/min P → A/B)
* Command Enable
E = with external command Enable
W = without external command Enable
* Type command
V = signal voltage ± 10V
C = signal current 4... 20mA
with
00 No variants
1 Serial No.
File: XECV3_E VIII • 10 01/2010/e

XECV.3... CLOSED LOOP PROPORTIONAL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
STEP RESPONSE (Δp = 8 bar P/A) OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS OF VALVE WITH TRANSDUCER
0 ÷ 100% Installation must keep horizontal
Dynamic pressure port T 210 bar
Static pressure port T 210 bar
Nominal flow 4 / 8 / 15 / 25 / 36 l/min
Performance curves See diagrams
Fluid temperature -20 ÷ 75°C (preferably 40 ÷ 50°C)
Weight 2.76 kg
Nominal supply voltage 24Vdc

Input signal range (see ordering code) ± 10V or 4... 20mA
Supply voltage lower limit 18V
Supply voltage upper limit 36V
100% ÷ 0 Peak power 50W
Max. coil temperature 150 °C
Hysteresis < 0.1%
Response sensitivity < 0.1%
Repeatibility <0,1%
Frequency response -3dB (Input signal: ±25%) 30 Hz
Enable input command 0V = valve not active 24V = valve active
Fault signal output 0V = failure or not working valve 24V = valve OK
Spool position monitor ± 10V
Ambient temperature range -20 ÷ 60°C
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
8

M5x25 (min. 8.8 material
screws are recommended)
Tightening torque 4 ÷ 5 Nm /
0.4 ÷ 0.5 kgm
0.03
1.6
Support plane
specifications

XECV.3... CLOSED LOOP PROPORTIONAL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
X1: Main connector 7 ways (supplied with the valve)
GND A
B F
12
Main CAN bus
connector connector C E
7 ways 5 ways D
Enable - Fault DIN EN 175201-804 - 7 poles female

connector
5 ways Type PIN Description
Main power supply A +24Vdc
B 0V / common supply
0V / common of signal monitor C 0V / common of signal monitor
Input of differential signal command D ± 10V or 4...20mA
E 0V / common
Output of signal monitor F ± 10V (10V = full stroke)
• A positive command value 0 to +10V (or 12 to 20mA) at D and the GND GND
reference potential at E, results in a flow from P to A and B to T. Connection cable recommended: up to 50m cable length type LiYCY 7x1.0
• A negative command value 0 to -10V (or 12 to 4mA) at D and the mm². For outside diameter see plug-in connector sketch. Only connect
reference potential at E, results in a flow from P to B and A to T. screen to PE on the supply side.
X2*: 5 ways M12 connector, CAN communication X3*: 5 ways M12 connector, Enable and Fault digital command
(to be ordered separately) (to be ordered separately)
2 2
1 5 pole 1 5 pole
5 ways connector 5 ways connector
3 connector code: VE0032700 3 connector code: VE0032700
4 5 4 5
IEC 61076-2-101 - 5 poles female IEC 61076-2-101 - 5 poles female

Type PIN Description Type PIN Description
1 CAN_H Digital output signal 1 Connects to +24Vdc
CAN data 2 CAN_L of valve FAULT 2 Signal out:
Aron interface 3 0V = failure of electronic control
4 24V = valve OK
5 GND Input digital command 3 Connects to 0V
* Connection cable recommended: up to 50m cable length type of ENABLE valve 4 Connects to +24V to enable the valve
LiYCY 7x0.75 mm². For outside diameter see plug-in connector 5
sketch. Only connect screen to PE on the supply side.
8
ARON SOFTWARE AND CABLES
ADAPTER FOR PC:

Cable D-SUB to X2 CABLE USB TO D-SUB
CAN connector
ARON
Software
Cable USB
to D-SUB Model: KVASER Leaf light HS
(not supplied, commercial parts)
ARON INTERFACE FOR SETUP PARAMETERS ADAPTER FOR PC: CABLE D-SUB TO CAN CONNECTOR
CAN connector D-Sub connector
(female)
2 1 2 3 4 5
1
3
4 5
6 7 8 9
1 CAN-H 1
2 CAN-L 2 CAN-L
3 3 GND
4 4 The cable and D-Sub
5 GND 5
6 connector are not
Aron Firetune software code: P35150005
7 CAN-H supplied. Assemble
For further informations about Aron Firetune read the manual. 8 the parts as shown in
The software is included with valve supply. 9
the diagram.

XEPV.3... PROPORTIONAL VALVE WITH
ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
The proportional directional valves XEPV are designed as direct operated components for
subplate mounting. They are actuated by means of proportional solenoids with central thread and
removable coil. The solenoids are controlled by integrated control electronics.
Features:
• Integrated control electronics
• Setup parameters by CAN interface
• Current compensation, gain current and ramps setting a b
• Monitoring of the valve by real time scope interface XEPV.3.01.N...
European norms: EN 61000 - ElectroMagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) - industrial environment
XEPV.3... a b
AM.3.H... CH. VIII PAGE 16 XEPV.3.03.N...


(4 l/min P → A/B) (8 l/min P → A/B)
ORDERING CODE
XEPV Current loop proportional valve with
integrated electronics 24Vdc
3 CETOP 3/NG6
** Type of spool
01 = spool with P, A, B
and T ports, closed
03 = spool with P port closed,

and A, B, T ports connected (15 l/min P → A/B) (25 l/min P → A/B)
N Symmetrical flow control

8
* Flow rating at Δp 8 bar
0 = 4 l/min
1 = 8 l/min
2 = 15 l/min
3 = 25 l/min
6 = 36 l/min (we advise to use
the hydrostat AM5H3VP108)
S CAN bus communication

S = standard ARON
(36 l/min P → A/B)
* Command Enable
E = with external command Enable
W = without external command Enable
* Type command
V = signal voltage ± 10V
C = signal current 4... 20mA
with
00 No variants
1 Serial No.
File: XEPV3_E VIII • 13 01/2010/e

XEPV.3... PROPORTIONAL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
STEP RESPONSE (Δp = 8 bar P/A) OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS OF VALVE WITH TRANSDUCER
0 ÷ 100% Installation must keep horizontal
Dynamic pressure port T 210 bar
Static pressure port T 210 bar
Nominal flow 4 / 8 / 15 / 25 / 36 l/min
Performance curves See diagrams
Fluid temperature -20 ÷ 75°C (preferably 40 ÷ 50°C)
Weight 2.45 kg
Nominal supply voltage 24Vdc

Input signal range (see ordering code) ± 10V or 4... 20mA
Supply voltage lower limit 18V
Supply voltage upper limit 36V
100% ÷ 0
Peak power 50W
Max. coil temperature 150 °C
Hysteresis < 5%
Response sensitivity < 0.5%
Repeatibility <0.5%
Enable input command 0V = valve not active 24V = valve active
Fault signal output 0V = failure or not working valve 24V = valve OK
Current monitor ± 10V
Ambient temperature range -20 ÷ 60°C
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C.

M5x25 (min. 8.8 material
screws are recommended)
Tightening torque 4 ÷ 5 Nm /
0.4 ÷ 0.5 kgm
0.03
1.6
Support plane
specifications

XEPV.3... PROPORTIONAL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC ON BOARD
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
X1: Main connector 7 ways (supplied with the valve)
GND A
B F
12
Main CAN bus
C E
connector connector
7 ways 5 ways D
Enable - Fault
DIN EN 175201-804 - 7 poles female
connector Type PIN Description
5 ways
Main power supply A +24Vdc
B 0V / common supply
0V / common of signal monitor C 0V / common of signal monitor
Input of differential signal command D ± 10V or 4...20mA
E 0V / common
Output of signal monitor F ± 10V (10V = max current)
• A positive command value 0 to +10V (or 12 to 20mA) at D and the GND GND
reference potential at E, results in a flow from P to A and B to T. Connection cable recommended: up to 50m cable length type LiYCY 7x1.0
• A negative command value 0 to -10V (or 12 to 4mA) at D and the mm². For outside diameter see plug-in connector sketch. Only connect
reference potential at E, results in a flow from P to B and A to T. screen to PE on the supply side.
X2*: 5 ways M12 connector, CAN communication X3*: 5 ways M12 connector, Enable and Fault digital command
(to be ordered separately) (to be ordered separately)
2 2
1 5 pole 1 5 pole
5 ways connector 5 ways connector
3 connector code: VE0032700 3 connector code: VE0032700
4 5 4 5
IEC 61076-2-101 - 5 poles female IEC 61076-2-101 - 5 poles female

Type PIN Description Type PIN Description
1 CAN_H Digital output signal 1 Connects to +24Vdc
CAN data 2 CAN_L of valve FAULT 2 Signal out:
Aron interface 3 0V = failure of electronic control
4 24V = valve OK
5 GND Input digital command 3 Connects to 0V
* Connection cable recommended: up to 50m cable length type LiYCY of ENABLE valve 4 Connects to +24V to enable the valve
7x0.75 mm². For outside diameter see plug-in connector sketch. 5
Only connect screen to PE on the supply side.
8
ARON SOFTWARE AND CABLES
ADAPTER FOR PC:

Cable D-SUB to X2 CABLE USB TO D-SUB
CAN connector
ARON
Software
Cable USB
to D-SUB Model: KVASER Leaf light HS
(not supplied, commercial parts)
ARON INTERFACE FOR SETUP PARAMETERS ADAPTER FOR PC: CABLE D-SUB TO CAN CONNECTOR
CAN connector D-Sub connector
(female)
2 1 2 3 4 5
1
3
4 5
6 7 8 9
1 CAN-H 1
2 CAN-L 2 CAN-L
3 3 GND
4 4 The cable and D-Sub
5 GND 5
6
connector are not
Aron Firetune software code: P35150005
7 CAN-H supplied. Assemble
For further information about Aron Firetune read the manual. 8 the parts as shown in
The software is included with valve supply. 9 the diagram.

AM.3.H... 2 AND 3 WAY
HYDROSTATS CETOP 3
The 2 or 3 way pressure regulator type Max. flow 25 l/min
AM.3.H ensure the constant set flow Max. operating pressure 350 bar
rate in the presence of varying system Δp adjustment 4 bar
load (pressure) by keeping constant 8 bar
the pressure drop (Δp = Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
4/8 bar) in relation to the flow rate Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
regulation. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
AM.3.H... In order to achieve the direction and Max. contamination level class 8 in accordance
flow rate dual control function, it is with NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75
normally used together with a propor- Weight 1,4 Kg
tional solenoid valve
AM.3.H.2V.P1... AM.3.H.2V.P1...
ORDERING CODE FLOW - LOAD PRESSURE CURVE ΔP - REGULATED FLOW CURVE
AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6
Δp (bar)
Q (%)
H Hydrostat
** 2V = 2 way
3V = 3 way
P1 Function at port P P (bar) Q (l/min)
AM.3.H.3V.P1... AM.3.H.3V.P1...
** Differential pressure (Δp)
FLOW - LOAD PRESSURE CURVE ΔP - PUMP FLOW
04 = Δp 4 bar
08 = Δp 8 bar
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
Δp (bar)
Q (%)
1 Serial No.
8 AM.3.H.2V.P1... P (bar) Qp (l/min)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.3.H.3V.P1...
Proportional valve
XD.3.C...
Hydrostat
AM.3.H.2V...
BASE
Proportional valve
XD.3.C...
Hydrostat
AM.3.H.3V...
BASE Support plane

specification
File: AM3H001_E VIII • 16 00/2000/e

AM.5.H... 2 AND 3 WAY
HYDROSTATS CETOP 5
The 2 or 3 way pressure regulator Max. flow AM.5.H.2V... 65 l/min
type AM.5.H ensures a constant set Max. flow AM.5.H.3V... 70 l/min
flow rate in the presence of varying Max. operating pressure 350 bar
system load (pressure) by keeping Δp adjustment 8 bar
constant the pressure drop (Δp =8 Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
bar) in relation to the flow rate regu- Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
lation. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
AM.5.H... In order to achieve the direction and Max. contamination level class 8 in accordance
flow rate dual control function, it is with NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75
normally used together with a pro- Weight 2,7 Kg
portional solenoid valve.
ORDERING CODE AM.5.H.2V.P1... AM.5.H.2V.P1...

FLOW - LOAD PRESSURE CURVE ΔP - REGULATED FLOW CURVE
AM Modular valve
5 CETOP 5/NG10
Δp (bar)
H Hydrostat
Q (%)
** 2V = 2 way
3V = 3 way
P1 Function at port P
P (bar) Q (l/min)
08 Differential pressure (Δp) AM.5.H.3V.P1... AM.5.H.3V.P1...
Δp 8 bar
FLOW - LOAD PRESSURE CURVE ΔP - PUMP FLOW CURVE
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton Δp (bar)
1 Serial No.
Q (%)
AM.5.H.2V.P1... P (bar) Qp (l/min)

8
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
AM.5.H.3V.P1...
Proportional valve
XD.5.C...
Hydrostat
AM.5.H.2V...
BASE
Proportional valve
XD.5.C...
Hydrostat
AM.5.H.3V...
Support plane
BASE specification
File: AM5H001_E VIII • 17 00/2000/e

XQ.3... PROPORTIONAL FLOW CONTROL
VALVES PRESSURE COMPENSATED CETOP 3
This is a proportional valve where both the flow rate and pressure control flow functions have
been integrated according to the 3 way regulation concept.
The interface UNI ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 standard (ex CETOP R 35 H 4.2-4-03) allows
for direct mounting on modular block or multiple sub-bases, which makes possible many
advantageous and extremely compact application solution as a consequence of their
simplicity of installation.
The 3 way type pressure compensator, inserted into the valve, holds the pressure drop across
the flow rate proportional regulator constant (approx. 8 bar) independently from the controlled
load variations, whereby ensuring proportional between the set flow rate and the electrical
XQ.3... command signal.
"D15P" PROPORT. SOLENOIDS CH. VIII PAGE 19 Additionally, the system maximum safety pressure can be regulated through a manual
REM.S.RA... CH. IX PAGE 4 command. This valve, if mounted on the feed line to the manifold block, can be used to control
SE.3.AN21.00... CH. IX PAGE 11 several circuits which are not operating at the same time.
BC.3.08... / BC.3.09...
BC.06.XQ3... CH. VII PAGE 13 DIAGRAMS
INPUT SIGNAL ΔP - PUMP FLOW RATE
FLOW RATE
ΔP (bar)
Q (l/min)
ORDERING CODE
XQ Proportional flow control valve
3 No. of way
Qp (l/min)
C Pressure compensation I (%)
LOAD PRESSURE CUTOFF PRESSURE (M)

3 CETOP 3/NG6
FLOW RATE Qa = 25 (l/min)*
* Flow rates
F = 5 l/min
G = 10 l/min
Q (l/min)
H = 16 l/min
Q (l/min)
I = 28 l/min
* M = With manual pressure limiter
8 *
S = Without manual pressure limiter
Setting ranges
1 = 8 ÷ 50 bar P (bar) P (bar)
2 = 25 ÷ 170 bar
3 = 50 ÷ 315 bar The fluid used is a mineral based oil (*) Tested with 25 l/min supply
Omit for XQ.3.C.*.S version with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C.
The tests have been carried out at with
* E = With rotary emergency (type P1)
a fluid of a 40°C.
S = Without rotary emergency
* Voltage TABLE 1 - FLOW / PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS

E = 9VDC (2,35 A)
Model Hydraulic Max flow Max flow Max limiter Max load Δp
F = 12VDC (1.76 A) symbol rate in P pressure pressure Control
G = 24VDC (0.88 A) (l/min) (l/min) (bar) (bar) (bar)
XQ.3.C.3.*.M
** 00 = No variant
5 8÷50
L5 = emergency lever
P5 = Rotary emergency180° 10 40 25÷170 250 8
V1 = Viton 16 50÷315
2 Serial No. 28
XQ.3.C.3.*.S
5
10 40 250 8
16
28
File: XQ3002_E VIII • 18 07/2008/e

XQ.3... PROPORTIONAL FLOW CONTROL VALVES PRESSURE COMPENSATED
Max. operat. pressure ports A/B / With P port blocked on subplate 315 bar ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
Max. operating pressure ports T - for dynamic pressure see note (*) 250 bar
Regulated flow rate See diagram page before REM.S.RA.*.*.
Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED Card type control for single solenoid
Type of protection IEC 144 class IP 65 SE.3.AN.21.00...
Flow rate gain See diagrams EUROCARD type control for single solenoid
Hysteresis with connection P/A/B/T Δp = 5 bar (P/A) ≤4% of max. flow rate
Weight version XQ.3.C.*.M... 2,89 Kg
Weight version XQ.3.C.*.S... 2,39 Kg
Type of voltage 9V 12V 24V • Operating specifications are valid for fluid
Max. current 2.35A 1.76 A 0.88 A with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using the
Solenoid coil resistance at 25°C (77°F) 2.25 Ohm 4.0 Ohm 16.0 Ohm specified ARON electronic control units
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
BC.3.09.00.1
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
12
123
82
Ø 40
22,5
70,5
124,5
L5 Emergency lever
8
Rotary emergency
version XQ.3.C.*.*.*.E

(min. 8.8 material screws are recommended ) specification
Tightening torque 4 ÷ 5 Nm / 0.4 ÷ 0.5 Kgm P5 Rotary emergency 180°

Duty cycle 100% ED
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: XQ3002_E VIII • 19 07/2008/e

XQP.3... OPEN LOOP 2/3 WAY PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED FLOW REGULATORS
The open loop proportional flow regulator is 2 and 3 way compensated with priority function.
It is designed to regulate flow in proportion to an applied electrical current (REM or SE3AN
power amplifier). Flow regulation is load independent - B port. Load compensation is achieved
by a spool compensator which holds the pressure drop constant across the proportional spool.
Valves are available in the following ver-
sions (see hydraulic symbol):
- 2 way pressure compensated - 3 way
XQP.3... pressure compensated with priority func-
tion.
- 3 way pressure compensated with priority
REM.S.RA... CH. IX PAGE 4 and venting function.
SE.3.AN.21.00... CH. IX PAGE 11
BC.06.XQP3... CH. VII PAGE 13
• In order to obtain the 2 way pressure
compensated version the cavities P and T
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS have be closed on the subplate.
ORDERING CODE SIMPLIFIED TYPE

XQP Open loop 2/3 way
proportional compensated
flow regulator
3 CETOP 3/NG6 compensated version the cavity T have be
closed on the subplate.
C 2/3 way compensation
with priority function DIAGRAMS
3 3 way version (standard) ΔP - FLOW RATE A →B ΔP - SECONDARY LINE FLOW
For to obtain 2-way version the P line (WITH 5 l/min TO P) (A → P FREE)
must be closed on the subplate
* Nominal flow rates

F = 6 l/min
Δp (bar)
Δp (bar)
G = 12 l/min
H = 22 l/min
I = 32 l/min
L = 40 l/min
* S = without decompression
8 D = with decompression
Q (l/min)
FLOW RATE
Q (l/min)
FLOW RATE
* Max. current to solenoid BACK PRESSURE ON PRIORITY LINE BACK PRESSURE ON SECONDARY LINE
E = 2.35 A
F = 1.76 A
G = 0.88 A
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
P5 = Rotary emergency 180°
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
P (bar) P (bar)
INPUT SIGNAL 2 WAY COMPENSATION 2 WAY COMPENSATION
FLOW (A 270 bar - B VARIABLE) (A VARIABLE - B 30 bar)
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
I (%) P (bar) P (bar)
File: XQP3002_E VIII • 20 01 /2010/e

XQP.3... OPEN LOOP 2/3 WAY PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED FLOW REGULATORS
Max. operat. pressure ports A/B /P see note (*) With T port blocked on subplate 250 bar AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL
Regulated flow rate 6 / 12 / 22 / 32 / 40 l/min
REM.S.RA.*.*...
Decompression drain flow max 0,7 l/min
Electronic card for control single proportional
Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED
solenoid valve
Flow rate gain See diagram "Input signal flow"
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s SE.3.AN.21.00...
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C Electronic card format EUROCARD for con-
Ambient temperature -20°C ÷ 70°C trol single proportional solenoid valve
Max. contamination level from class 7 to 9 in accordance
Weight 1,7 Kg
Max. current 2.33A 1.76 A 0.88 A
Hysteresis with Δp 7 bar ≤5 % <5% <8%
Response to step Δp = 7 bar
0 ÷ 100% 32 ms 40 ms 85 ms
100% ÷ 0 33 ms 33 ms 33 ms
Frequency response -3db (Input signal 50% ± 25% Vmax.)
22Hz 22Hz 12Hz
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using
specified ARON electronic control units.
Performance data are carried out using the specified Aron power amplifier
SE.3.AN... powered to 24V.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
P1 Rotary emergency 8
P5 Rotary emergency 180°


Duty cycle 100% ED
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: XQP3002_E VIII • 21 01/2010/e

XQP.5. OPEN LOOP 2/3 WAY PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED FLOW REGULATORS CETOP 5
The open loop proportional flow regulator is 2 and 3 way compensated with priority function.
It is designed to regulate flow in proportion to an applied electrical current (REM power
amplifier). Flow regulation is load independent - B port. Load compensation is achieved by
a spool compensator which holds the pressure drop constant across the proportional spool.
Valves are available in the following versions (see hydraulic symbol):
- 2 way pressure compensated
- 3 way pressure compensated
with priority function.
XQP.5... - 3 way pressure compensated
"D19P" PROPORT. SOLENOIDS CH. VIII PAGE 23 with priority and venting function.

SYMBOLS compensated version the cavities P and T
HYDRAULIC have be closed on the subplate.
SIMPLIFIED TYPE
ORDERING CODE
XQP Open loop 2/3 way • In order to obtain the 3 way pressure
proportional compensated compensated version the cavities T have
flow regulator be closed on the subplate.
5 CETOP 5/NG10
DIAGRAMS
C 2/3 way compensation ΔP - FLOW RATE A → B ΔP - SECONDARY LINE FLOW
with priority function
(WITH 5 l/min TO P) (A → P FREE)
3 3 way version (standard)
For to obtain 2-way version the P line
must be closed on the subplate
Δp (bar)
Δp (bar)
* Nominal flow rates

E = 45 l/min
F = 75 l/min
G = 105 l/min
8 * S = without decompression
D = with decompression
Q (l/min)
FLOW RATE
Q (l/min)
FLOW RATE
BACK PRESSURE ON PRIORITY LINE BACK PRESSURE ON SECONDARY LINE
* Voltage
F = 12V DC
G = 24V DC
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
1 Serial No.
P (bar) P (bar)
INPUT SIGNAL 2 WAY PRESSURE COMPENSATED 2 WAY PRESSURE COMPENSATED
FLOW (A 270 bar - B VARIABLE) (A VARIABLE - B 30 bar)
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
Q (l/min)
I (%) P (bar) P (bar)

2
The fluid used is a mineral based oil with a viscosity of 46 mm /s at 40°C.
File: XQP5001_E VIII • 22 05/2009/e

XQP.5. OPEN LOOP 2/3 WAY PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED FLOW REGULATORS CETOP 5
Max. operating pressure ports A/B /P (*) 250 bar AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL
Regulated flow rate 75 / 105 l/min
Decompression drain flow max 0,7 l/min REM.S.RA.*.*...
Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED Electronic regulator for control single propor-
Type of protection (in relation to the connector used) IP 65 tional solenoid valve
Flow rate gain See diagram "Input signal flow"
Weight 4,97 Kg
Type of voltage 9V 12V 24V
Max. current 2.33A 2.5 A 1.25 A (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of
Solenoid coil resistance at 20°C (68°F) 2.85 Ohm 11.4 Ohm cycles. T ports closed on the subplate.
Hysteresis with Δp 7 bar ~ 5% <5% <8% Operating specifications are valid for fluids
Response to step Δp = 7 bar (P/A) with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using speci-
0 ÷ 100% ~ 65 ms - fied ARON electronic control units.
100% ÷ 0 ~ 30 ms - Performance data are carried out using the
Frequency response -3db (Input signal 50% ± 25% Vmax.) specified Aron power amplifier type
7Hz - REM.S.RA... power supplied at 24V.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override

Support plane
(12.9 material screws are recommended) specifications
"D19P"
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOIDS
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 1,58 Kg
ETD19P - 01/2002/e
File: XQP5001_E VIII • 23 05/2009/e

XP.3... PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVES CETOP 3/NG6
Proportional maximum pressure valves type XP.3.*.. are used to regulate a hydraulic circuit
pressure by means of a variable electric signal. Their precise implementation allows for high
and constant operational standard up to a maximum 2,5 l/min flow rate. A manually pressure
limit setting version is also available, to protect the system from uncontrolled electrical signals.
• Other valves (e.g. subplate or in-line mounted valves) should be ordered separately.
PRESSURE - SIGNAL PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 1

(tested with Q = 1 l/min)
XP.3...
P (bar)
V.M.P... / V.M.L... / V.M.P.E... CH. II PAGE 6
Q (l/min)
PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 2 PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 3
ORDERING CODE
XP Max. pressure valve
P (bar)
P (bar)
3 CETOP 3/NG6
* 1 = max. 50 bar
2 = max. 140 bar
3 = max. 320 bar
* E = with manual limiter Q (l/min) Q (l/min)

S = without manual limiter
8 * Voltage:
F =12V DC
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
G =24V DC
** 00 =No variant
V1 =Viton
1 Serial No.

File: XP3001_E VIII • 24 03/2000/e

XP.3... PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES CETOP 3
Max. operating pressure (depending on the flow rate) 350 bar ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
Max. flow 2,5 l/min REM.S.RA.*.*.
Max. ambient temperature 50° C Card type control for single solenoid 12V and
Linearity See diagrams 24V
Max. hysteresis <3% of nominal value
Repeatibility error (between 150 and 680 mA) <2%
Resistance at 20°C (24V) 24.6 Ohm
Resistance at 20°C (12V) 7.2 Ohm
Max. resistance (ambient 20°C) (24V) at op. temp. 31 Ohm
Max. resistance (ambient 20°C) (12V) at op. temp. 9 Ohm
Max. current at (24V) 0.68A
Max. current at (12V) 1.25A
Type of protection IEC 144 class IP 65
Max. contamination level class 8 in accordance with NAS 1638 with filter ß10≥75
Fluid temperature -20°C÷75°C
Fluid viscosity 10÷500 mm2/s
Weight 1,4 Kg
• Operating specifications are valid for fluids with 33 mm2/s at 50°C, using specified
ARON electronic control units.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION XP.3... + VMP.E.16... TYPICAL INSTALLATION XP.3... + VMP.E.25...
• WITH MOUNTING ON VMPE USE THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATED ORIFICES (SEE V.M.P.*.E VALVE AQ VARIANT)
VMP.E.16... A = ∅ 1 mm
B = ∅ 0,3 mm
VMP.E.25... A = ∅ 1,2 mm
B = ∅ 0,5 mm
File: XP3001_E VIII • 25 03/2000/e

AM.3.XMP... AMPLIFIER VALVES
FOR PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES

Max. flow 30 l/min
Min. flow 2 l/min
Max. ambient temperature 50° C
Linearity See diagrams
Max. hysteresis <3% of nominal value
Repeatibility error (150 ÷ 680 mA) XP3... <3%
with NAS 1638 with filter ß10³75
AM.3.XMP... Fluid temperature -20°C÷75°C
Fluid viscosity 10÷500 mm2/s
XP.3... CH. VIII PAGE 18 Weight 0,8 Kg
Operating specifications are valid for fluids with
33 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using Aron control units
Modular valve type AM.3.XMP... used together with the pressure proportional pilot type XP.3..
becomes a pressure control valve piloted by proportional command for rates up to
30 lt/min. The possibility of external drainage on A ensures its correct operation even with back
pressure on the discharge side. Other valves types should be ordered separately.
PRESSURE - SIGNAL 1 (Q=15L/MIN) PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 1

ORDERING CODE
AM Modular valve
3 CETOP 3/NG6
P (bar)
P (bar)
XMP maximum proportional
pressure
2 Spring 2 bar (standard)
0 Standard dowels
(∅ 1,2 dia supply ∅ 0,5 dia damper)
Imput signal (%) Q (l/min)
* I = Internal drainage at T PRESSURE - SIGNAL 2 (Q=15L/MIN) PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 2
E = External draining at A
** 00 =No variant
V1 =Viton
8 1 Serial No.
P (bar)
P (bar)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Imput signal (%) Q (l/min)

PRESSURE - SIGNAL 3 (Q=15L/MIN) PRESSURE - FLOW RATE 3
P (bar)
P (bar)
Input signal (%) Q (l/min)
Support plane Fixing screws UNI 593 M5x70

specifications (min. 8.8 material screws are recommended)
File: AM3XMP001_E VIII • 26 02/2000/e

TECHNICAL ELECTRONICS
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS ELECTRONICS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS CEP.S...
OR SEAL RING CH. IX PAGE 2
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) REM.S.RA...
PARBAK PARBAK RING CH. IX PAGE 4
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION REM.D.RA...
PR REDUCED PRESSURE (BAR) CH. IX PAGE 7
Q FLOW (L/MIN) SE.3.AN21...
QP PUMP FLOW (L/MIN) CH. IX PAGE 11
SE ELASTIC PIN SE.3.AN21RS...
SF BALL CH. IX PAGE 13
SR SERIES CONNECTION SE3.LN3...
X PILOTING CH. IX PAGE 15
Y DRAINAGE SE.MNC...
Incorrect use of the products described in this CH. IX PAGE 19
catalogue may cause harm to personnel and SVP...
for each product in this catalogue may be CH. IX PAGE 23
subject to variation, and the manufacturer JC.3.D...
reserves the right to make constructional CH. IX PAGE 27
product presented, its data, features and JC.5.D...
technical specifications must therefore be CH. IX PAGE 29
examined and checked by members of the JC.F.D...
knowledge) taking into consideration the CH. IX PAGE 31
9
Plant

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 09TA_E IX • 1 02/2000/e

CEP.S.. ELECTRONIC AMPLIFIER PLUG VERSION
FOR SINGLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL VALVE.
The electronic amplifier Plug version was designed in compliance whit EN 175301-803 (ex
DIN43650), for direct mounting on the valve solenoid. The CEP.S can used whit proportional
valves XD.*.A..., XDP.*.A..., XP.3..., XQP.*..., CXQ.3.. .
The output stage operates on the pulse width modulation principle (P.W.M.) and is provided
with current feedback in order to obtain a solenoid output current proportional to the reference
input signal.
Gain, minimum current and rise and fall ramp time adjustments are possible through the
corresponding potentiometers fitted on top side of the card, and can be accessed by
slackening the relative screw and opening the cover of the connector. While the output current
to the solenoid can be measured via the Valve Current test points.
CEP.S...
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS CH. IX PAGE 3
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE CH. IX PAGE 3 SETTINGS TOPOGRAPHY
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 3
ORDERING CODE
CEP Electronic amplifier

Plug version
S Single solenoid control
RS Symmetrical ramp
* Max. output current ( Imax )

X = 0.88 Amp ELECTRICAL EN 175301-803 CONNECTIONS
Y = 1.76 Amp
Z = 2.50 Amp
0 Input reference signal 0 ÷ 10V
* PWM frequency
2 = 400 Hz
3 = 150 Hz
00 No variant
1 Serial number
9
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
• registered mark
for industrial environment with
reference to the electromagnetic
compatibility. European norms:
- EN61000-6-2 general
safety norm - industrial
environment
- EN61000-6-4 emission
general norm - residential
environment
• Product in accordance with

R O HS 2002/95/CE Europe
Directive.
File: CEPS001_E - P35160008 IX • 2 01/2008/e

CEP.S.. ELECTRONIC AMPLIFIER PLUG VERSION
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE SIGNAL

Power supply 12VDC o 24VDC
Peak supply 40VDC
Minimum power supply 10.5VDC
Required power 30W
Output current Imax = 0.88Amp
All range values are come from the ordering code Imax = 1.76Amp
Imax = 2.50Amp
External reference potentiometer +10V, Imax =5mA
Input signal reference 0 ÷ 10V
I minimum adjustment 0 ÷ 50% of Imax
Gain adjustment 30% ÷ 100% of Imax
Ramp time adjustment 0 ÷ 10 secondi
Operating Ambient temperature -10C° ÷ +70°C
Current test point 1V = 1Amp
Weight Kg. 0, 250
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
POWER SUPPLY AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The power supply voltage must be rectified and filtered, whit a capacitor 4700 uF minimum. Protect the power supply circuit whit 3 A fuse.
Respect the polarity supply. Use the cabling wire whit 0.75 mm2 or 1.0 mm2 section. In order to facilitate the operation of wires connection,
extracts the card from the enclosure, introduce the wires through the gland-nut, connects the wires to the clips and finally to lodge the card to
the inside of the connector.
To connect correctly the card respecting the electrical connection topography, plug the amplifier on the valve solenoid and turn completely
anticlockwise the trimming Imin, Gain, Ramp, and position the reference potentiometer on zero signal.
MINIMUMU CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

The Iminimum current allows to eliminate the mechanical overlapping of the valve also with the signal reference to 0 volt, if it is necessary to
have the already open valve also with at null signal reference, to set up to 0 volt and turns slowly the Imin trimmer until an actuator movement.
GAIN CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

Turns the reference signal to its maximum setting
(10 volt) and rotate slowly the (GAIN) trimming
until the maximum required speed is obtained.
If the system could be damaged by a to fast OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF BOX AND CONNECTOR
movement solenoid, turns clockwise the trim-
ming Ramp time.
RAMP TIME ADJUSTMENT

The ramp time is the time taken to pass from the
minimum to the maximum current value, and
9
vice versa. It’s adjustable from a minimum of 0s
up to a maximum of 10s (to reach the maximum
current value setted). Turning clockwise the
trimming potentiometer, the ramp time increases.
NOTES
The ramp fall time affects the actuator stop
position. Moving the reference to zero Volt, the
actuator goes on moving till the setted ramp
time is elapsed. Therefore it’s necessary to
adjust it properly.
Incorrect use of the products described in this catalogue may cause harm to personnel and equipment. The technical information given for each product in this catalogue may be subject to
variation, and the manufacturer reserves the right to make constructional modifications without giving prior notice. Each product presented, its data, features and technical specifications must
therefore be examined and checked by members of the user's staff (possessing suitable technical knowledge) taking into consideration the intended use of product. The user must, in particular,
assess the operating conditions of each product in relation to the application that he intends to use it for, analysing the data, features and technical specifications in view of the proposed
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the product, all of the conditions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, also in the event of breakdown, are respected.
Aron spa - Via Natta, 1 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. +39 0522 5058 - Fax +39 0522 505856 - www.aron.it - sales@brevinifluidpower.com
File: CEPS001_E - P35160008 IX • 3 01/2008/e

REM.S.RA... TYPE ELECTRONIC REGULATORS FOR
SINGLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
The electronic control card type REM.S.RA has been designed to drive the “XD.*.A, XDP.3.A,
XP.3, XQ.3, XQP.*. and CXQ.3” series ARON single solenoid proportional valves without
integral position transducer. The control card is enclosed in an “OCTAL” type housing, a typical
relay mounting standard. The output stage operates on the pulse width modulation principle
(P.W.M.) and is provided with current feedback in order to obtain a solenoid output current
proportional to the reference input signal. Output short circuit and supply polarity inversion
protection is provided.
Gain, minimum current and rise and fall ramp time adjustments are possible through the
corresponding front panel trimming potentiometers, while the output current to the solenoid
can be measured via the Valve Current test points, and the ramp operation can be excluded.
REM.S.RA...
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE CH. IX PAGE 5 The product incorporates a serial interface for adjustment of parameters.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 10 Pay attention please: electronic regulators must be used in dampness and water
MOUNTING BASES CH. IX PAGE 10 protected places.
The technical data and user manuals of DJ and JU variant are available by section
ORDERING CODE "Products" on Internet site www.aron.it.
REM Miniaturized electronic
regulator in Octal
type container ADJUSTMENT PANEL
S Single solenoid
Supply 10VDC ÷ 30VDC (green led)
Overload Protection against overload (red led)
RA Asymmetrical ramp Ramp off Ramp off (red led)
Output Output (current at solenoid, yellow led)
* Maximum output I. min. Minimum current adjustment
current I MAX. (JU variant) Gain Gain adjustment
X = 0.88 A (0.80 A) Ramp up Rump up adjustment time
Y = 1.76 A (1.20 A) Ramp down Rump down adjustment time
Z = 2.8 A Valve Current Current test point at solenoid (1V =1A)
* Input reference (V) If any field is missing from the ordering code the standard setting is as follows:
see note (*) below
2 = 0÷ + 2 V - Input ref. = 0÷5V
- Dither 100Hz
5 = 0÷ + 5 V
- Imin. = continuous
0 = 0÷ + 10 V - Imax. = 0.8A
A = 0 ÷ 20 mA
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT AND CONNECTIONS
* Frequency Dither
1 = 100 Hz (standard, JU var.) Sup (2-7) Power supply
2 = 330 Hz (for XP.3) Out (1-4) Output for external potentiometer
Ref(3) Reference
* Minimum initial current SO (5-6) Output at solenoid
9 G = step (normally for

XD.*. and XDP.3 valves)
DR (8)
Pot
CS
PWM
Ramp off (contact closed = exclusion)
External reference potentiometer (2 ÷ 5 KΩ)
Feedback current
Pulse width modulate wave
C = continuous (normally
for XP.3, XQ.3, XQP.*.
and CXQ.3 valves)
** 00 = No variant
DJ = Double gain setpoint
JU = for MHPF and MSPF
electrohydraulics modules
(directional valves HPV)
4 Serial No.
(*) If the input reference is a current signal (mA)

the regulator has to be pre-setted in the factory.
• registered mark for industrial
environment with reference to the
electromagnetic compatibility. European
norms:
- EN61000-6-2 general safety norm -
industrial environment
- EN61000-6-4 emission general norm
- residential environment
SIDE A
• Product in accordance with ROHS 2002/95/
CE Europe Directive.
File: REMS004_E - P35160003 IX • 4 06/2010/e

ELECTRONIC REGULATORS FOR SINGLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
Power supply 10 ÷ 30 VDC

Maximum supply voltage 36 V
Power absorption 40 W
REFERENCE INPUT SIGNAL
Current output
setting by dip switches Imax = 2.8A
Imax = 1.76A
Imax = 0.88A
External potentiometer supply output
short circuit protected +5V 10mA
Reference input signal
setting by dip switches 0 ÷ +2V
0 ÷ +5V
0 ÷ +10V
Note: for the current signal (mA) the regulator
has to be pre-setted in the factory. 0 ÷ 20mA
Polarization current adjustment Imin = 0 ÷ 50% Imax
Current gain adjustment 50% ÷ 100% Imax
Ramp time adjustment 0 ÷ 20 sec
Ambient operating temperature -20 ÷ +70°C
Current test point 1 Volt = 1 Ampere
Weight 0,101 Kg
REM.S.RA... INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Connect the card in the proper way following the previous page diagram but without powering
it or in the way following the next page "Typical connections". Turn completely anticlockwise
(20 turns about) the trimming potentiometers of Minimu Current (Imin) and Ramp Time (Ramp-
up and Ramp-down), and position the reference potentiometer on zero. Before powering the
card, ensure that any unforeseen hydraulic system movement cannot cause material damage
or injury to people. Power now the card; the green LED should light up.
MINIMUM CURRENT OR POLARIZATION CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

Turn slowly the minimum current trimming potentiometer clockwise (Imin) until an actuator
movement can be visually detected. Turn slowly anticlockwise the potentiometer: the
minimum current setting will be adjusted correctly when the actuator movement stops. For the
REM model with minimum initial threshold current, set the reference signal to a Vref. of 150
mV.
MAXIMUM CURRENT GAIN ADJUSTMENT

Turn first the ramp time trimming potentiometers clockwise by at least 10 turns, if the system
9
could be damaged by a too fast solenoid operation (evaluate the application carefully). The
maximum actuator speed can now be adjusted. Turn the reference signal to its maximum
setting and rotate slowly the GAIN trimming potentiometer (GAIN) until the maximum required
speed is obtained. The speed can now be varied by moving the potentiometer.
RAMP TIME ADJUSTMENT (RAMP-UP E RAMP-DOWN)

The ramp time is the time taken to pass from the minimum to the maximum current value, and
vice versa. It’s adjustable from a minimum of 0s up to a maximum of 20s (to reach the
maximum current value setted). Turning clockwise the trimming potentiometer, the ramp time
increases.
NOTES:
- The ramp fall time affects the actuator stop position. Moving the reference to zero Volt, the
actuator goes on moving till the setted ramp time is elapsed. Therefore it’s necessary to adjust
it properly.
- When the overload red LED lights up, it will be necessary to switch off the power to the card,
switching it on again after having eliminated the cause of overload.
File: REMS004_E - P35160003 IX • 5 06/2010/e

ELECTRONIC REGULATORS FOR SINGLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
REM.S.RA... DIP SWITCHES TABLE
For our proportional valves are recommended the following settings: Six miniature switches are mounted internally on one
G XD.3.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35Awith 9V coil of the REM sides. The REM configuration to suit any
G XDP.3.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35Awith 9V coil particular application can be implemented by setting
C XQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35A with 9V coil these switches.
C XQP.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35A with 9V coil PWM frequency (100 to 330 Hz), minimum (continu-
C CXQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35A with 9V coil ous or step) current, reference voltage range and
G XD.3.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coil maximum current (Imax) can thus be adjusted.
G XDP.5.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.5A with 12V coil
C XQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coil
C XQP.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coil
C XP.3 DITHER =330Hz Imax. = 1.25A with 12V coil
C CXQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coil
G XD.3.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coil
G XDP.3.A DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coil 1 2 3 4 5 6
C XQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coil
C XP.3 DITHER =330Hz Imax. = 0.68A with 24V coil
C CXQ.3 DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coil Function DITHER l min Input ref. I.max.
DIP sw 100 330 C G 0÷10 0÷5 0÷2 0÷20 2.8 1.76 0.88
Hz Hz V V V mA A A A
1 OFF ON
2 OFF ON
3 OFF ON OFF ON
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 OFF ON OFF
6 OFF OFF ON
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
9 command signal from

potentiometer supplied by
command signal from
external power source, 0 ÷
REMS card - 0 ÷ 5V 2V, 0 ÷ 5V, 0 ÷ 10V
signal command from PLC,

0 ÷ 2V, 0 ÷ 5V, 0 ÷ 10V, 0 ÷ command signal from circuit
20mA of potentiometers
• The connection between REM and the solenoid must be direct POT = 1000 ÷ 5000 Ω
• The common one of return to proportional solenoid must not' be shared between
other valve connections or electrical equipment worker.
File: REMS004_E - P35160003 IX • 6 06/2010/e

REM.D.RA... TYPE ELECTRONIC REGULATORS
DOUBLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
The electronic control card type REM.D.RA has been designed to drive the ARON double
solenoid proportional valves series “XD.*.C...and XDP.3.C” without integral position trans-
ducer. The control card is enclosed in an “UNDECAL” type housing, a typical relay mounting
standard. The output stage operates on the pulse width modulation principle (P.W.M.) and is
provided with current feedback in order to obtain a solenoid output current proportional to the
reference input signal.
Output short circuit and supply polarity inversion protection is provided. Gain, minimum
current and rise and fall ramp time adjustments are possible through the corresponding front
panel trimming potentiometers, while the output current to the solenoid can be measured via
the Valve Current test points, and the ramps can be excluded.
REM.D.RA... The product incorporates a serial interface for adjustment of parameters.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE CH. IX PAGE 8 Pay attention please: electronic regulators must be used in dampness and water
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 10 protected places.
MOUNTING BASES CH. IX PAGE 10
The technical data and user manuals of DJ and JU variant are available by section
"Products" on Internet site www.aron.it.
ORDERING CODE
ADJUSTMENT PANELL
REM Miniaturized electronic
regulator in Undecal Supply 10Vdc ÷ 30Vdc (green led)
type container Overload Protection against over (red led)
Ramp off Ramp off (red led)
Output Output (current at solenoid A/B, yellow led)
D Double solenoid
I. min. Minimum current adjustment A/B
Gain A/B gain adjustment
RA Asymmetrical ramp Ramp up A/B rump up adjustment time
Ramp down A/B rump down adjustment time
* Maximum output GND Ground
current I MAX. (JU variant) 1V/A Current test point at solenoid
X = 0.88 A (0.80 A)
Y = 1.76 A (1.20 A)
If any field is missing from the ordering code the standard setting is as follows:
Z = 2.8 A - Input ref. = -5 ÷ +5V
- Dither = 100Hz
* Input reference (V) - Imax. = 0.8A
see note (*) below
2 = -2 ÷ +2 V ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT AND CONNECTIONS
5 = -5 ÷ +5 V
Sup (1-11) Power supply
0 ÷ +5 V Out (8-10) Output external potentiometer
0 = -10 ÷ +10 V Ref (9) Reference
A = -20mA ÷ +20mA SO A (5-6) Output at solenoid A
0 ÷ +20mA SO B (5-7) Output at solenoid B
DR (3) Ramp off (contact = exclusion)
* Frequency Dither Pot External reference potentiometer
1 = 100 Hz (standard, JU var.) CS Feedback current
G
2 = 330 Hz
Minimum initial current

PWM Pulse width modulated wave
9
can only be adjusted
in steps
** 00 = No variant
DJ = Duble setpoint gain
JU = for MHPF and MSPF
modules (proportional
valves HPV)
4 Serial No.
(*) If the input reference is a current signal (mA)

the regulator has to be pre-setted in the factory.
• registered mark for industrial

environment with reference to the
electromagnetic compatibility. European
norms: - EN61000-6-2 general safety norm -
industrial environment
- EN61000-6-4 emission general norm
- residential environment
SIDE A SIDE B
• Product in accordance with ROHS 2002/95/
CE Europe Directive.
File: REMD004_E - P35160004 IX • 7 05/2010/e

ELECTRONIC REGULATORS DOUBLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
Power supply 10 ÷ 30 VDC
Maximum supply voltage 36 V
Power absorption 40 W
Current output setting by dip switches Imax = 2.8A
Imax = 1.76A
Imax = 0.88A
External potentiometer supply output (pin n° 10)
short circuit protected +5V I.max.10mA
Signal input reference (pin n° 9) setting by dip switches -2V ÷ +2V
-5V ÷ +5V
-10V ÷ +10V
-20A ÷ +20mA (*)
Signal input reference (pin n° 9) setting by dip switches 0V ÷ +5V
0 ÷ +20mA (*)
(*) Note: for the current signal (mA) the regulator
has to be pre-setted in the factory.
Polarization current adjustment Imin = 0 ÷ 50% Imax

SIGNALS INPUT REFERENCE
Current gain adjustment 50% ÷ 100% Imax The REMD can recive two kinds of command signal inputs,
Ramp time adjustment 0 ÷ 20 sec differential input ( non inverting, inverting voltage –5V ÷ +5V),
Ambient operating temperature -20 ÷ +70°C or positive voltage (0V ÷ +5V).
Current test point 1 Volt = 1 Ampere
Weight Kg 0,120 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT REFERENCE
CURRENT
REM.D.RA... INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

POLARIZATION
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE SIDE A
Connect the card in the proper way followingthe next page "Typical connections"
but without powering it. Turn completely anticlockwise (20 turns about) the
trimming potentiometers of Minimu Current (Imin) and Ramp Time (Ramp-up and
Ramp-down), and position the reference potentiometer on zero. Before powering POLARIZATION
SIDE B
the card, ensure that any unforeseen hydraulic system movement cannot cause
material damage or injury to people. Power now the card; the green LED should
light up
TWO CHANNEL MINIMUM CURRENT (I MIN) ADJUSTMENT (DEAD BAND) For being able to command a proportional valve double
Set the reference signal of approx. Vref +150mV. Than turn clockwise the solenoid with a differential input command voltage in
trimmer until an actuator movement can be visually detected (A channel Output income at contact 9 of REMD is necessary not to connect
LED lights up). Than turn the same trimmer anticlockwise until the movement the contact 10 of REMD.
stops. Repeat the Imin calibration for the other channel B.Set the reference signal
of approx. Vref -150mV (B channel Output LED lights up).
GAIN ADJUSTMENT
POSITIVE INPUT REFERENCE
9 Turn first the ramp time trimming potentiometers (RAMP UP) clockwise by at
least 10 turns, if the system could be damaged by a too fast solenoid operation
(evaluate the application carefully). The maximum actuator speed can now be CURRENT
adjusted. Turn the reference signal to the maximum positive setting value and
rotate slowly the gain trimming potentiometer (GAIN) until the maximum required POLARIZATION
speed is obtained. The speed can now be varied by moving the potentiometer SIDE A
lever. Repeat the above operations for the other channel after turning the
reference signal to the maximum negatif value.
RAMP TIME ADJUSTMENT

The ramp time is the time taken to pass from the minimum to the maximum
current value, and vice versa. It’s adjustable from a minimum of 0s up to a
maximum of 20s (to reach the maximum current value setted) separately for POLARIZATION
channel A and B. Turning clockwise the trimming potentiometer, the ramp time SIDE B
increases.
NOTES For being able to command a proportional valve double

solenoid with a positive command voltage in income at
1) The ramp fall time affects the actuator stop position. Moving the reference
contact 9 of REMD is necessary to connect the contact
potentiometer to zero Volt, the actuator goes on moving till the setted ramp time
10 of REMD a resistive load:
is elapsed. Therefore it’s necessary to adjust it properly.
- potentiometer ( minimum 1000, max 5000 Ohm )
2) When the overload red LED lights up, it will be necessary to switch off the
[with external potentiometer command signal, pin n° 9]
power to the card, switching it on again after having eliminated the cause of
overload. - resistor ( minimum 1000, max 5000 Ohm ) [with external
reference value generator, e.g. by a PLC , pin n° 9].
File: REMD004_E - P35160004 IX • 8 05/2010/e

ELECTRONIC REGULATORS DOUBLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
REM.D.RA... DIP SWITCHE TABLE
Six miniature switches are mounted internally on one of the REM

sides. The REM configuration to suit any particular application can
be implemented by setting these switches. PWM frequency (100
to 330 Hz), reference voltage range and maximum current (Imax)
can thus be adjusted. 1 2 3 4 5 6
For our proportional valves are recommended the following

settings:
G XD.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35A with 9V coils Function DITHER l min Input ref. I.max.
G XDP.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.35A with 9V coils
G XD.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coils DIP sw 100 330 G -10÷10 -5÷5 -2÷2 -20mA 0÷5 0 2.8 1.76 0.88
Hz Hz V V V ÷20mA V ÷20mA A A A
G XDP.5.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 2.5A with 12V coils
G XDP.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.76A with 12V coils 1 OFF ON
G XD.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coils 2 ON
G XDP.5.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 1.25A with 24V coils 3 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
G XDP.3.C DITHER =100Hz Imax. = 0.88A with 24V coils 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF
For the version with reference signal in current it needs to be preset
in-factory. 6 OFF OFF ON
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
command signal from signal command from PLC, 0
potentiometer supplied by ÷ 5V, 0 ÷ 20mA
REMD card
- 0 ÷ 2.5V ÷ 5V
command signal from

external power source, ±2V,
signal command from PLC,
±2V, ±5V, ±10V, ±20mA 9
±5V, ±10V
• The connection between REM and the solenoid must be direct R = 1000 ÷ 5000 Ω
• The common one of return to proportional solenoid must not' be shared POT = 1000 ÷ 5000 Ω
between other valve connections or electrical equipment worker.
File: REMD004_E - P35160004 IX • 9 05/2010/e

REM.S/D.RA... TYPE ELECTRONIC REGULATORS
SINGLE / DOUBLE SOLENOID PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
OVERALL DIMENSION AND MOUNTING BASES ON DIN GUIDES FOR REM.S.RA...

Octal OMRON base
Octal standard base (with mechanical connector)
Ordering code X30.80.0000 Ordering code X30.80.0004
OVERALL DIMENSION AND MOUNTING BASES ON DIN GUIDES FOR REM.D.RA...

Undecal OMRON base
Undecal standard base (with mechanical connector)
Ordering code X30.90.0000 Ordering code X30.90.0004
ARONDG SOFTWARE
AronDG program for the digital adjustment of the parameters

of the REMS and REMD boards.
AronDG program for the digital adjustment of the parameters

of the REMS and REMD boards.
The program is used to store (the settings are cancelled when
the REM board is switched off) the following parameters:
• Minimum current
• Upward current ramp
• Upward current ramp
9 • Downward current ramp
Italian/English version: purchase order code P35150003.
NB: the AronDG software can be used with all the REMS and
REMD boards that have a TTL connector (production
commencement year 2008).
SERIAL CABLE RS232/TTL

REM connecting at computer
with serial cable.
Ordering code VE0110001
File: TREM000_E IX • 10 02/2008/e

SE.3.AN21.00... ELECTRONIC CARDS FORMAT EUROCARD
FOR PROPORTIONAL VALVES CONTROL CETOP 3
The electronic cards type SE.3.AN.21.00... have been planned for controlling double solenoid
proportional valves of the series XD.3...XDP.3…which do not incorporate the position
transducer.The card has a EUROCARD format for being assembled on a connector - type DIN
41612 D 32. The output stage operates on the basis of the Pulse Width Modulation and is
subject to the current feedback so that it is possible to obtain an output solenoid current directly
proportional to the input signal. The regulator is supplied with standard calibration for
proportional valve control. In any case it is possible to optimize the regulations by operating
on the relative trimmers placed on the frontal panel (see picture).
• The connection between the card and the solenoid must be direct • The common one of return
to proportional solenoid must not be shared between other valve connections or electrical
equipment worker.
SE.3.AN21...
INSTRUCTIONS CH. IX PAGE 12
Registered mark with reference to the electromagnetic compatibility.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 12
European norms: EN50082-1 - General safety norm; EN50081-1 -Emission general norm.
ADJUSTMENT PANEL FOR CARD
ORDERING CODE
Fault Disable
SE Electronic card format Power on yellow – 24V DC power supply
EUROCARD DIN 41612
Enable green – card enable
3 NG06 Gain A Solenoid A maximum current regulation
Offset A Solenoid A offset current regulation
AN21 Analogic Gain B Solenoid B maximum current regulation
Offset B Solenoid B offset current regulation
00 Open loop for proportional
control valves type Ramp Up Ramp up regulation
XD3.. and XDP3... Ramp Down Ramp down regulation
without transducer Current A Solenoid A current test point (1V=1A)
Current B Solenoid B current test point (1V=1A)
16 Corrente max. Reference Reference signal test point
al solenoide: 1.76 A
Transducer Disable
Common 0V Common zero
0 No variant
2 Serial No.
File: SE3AN210002_E - P35160005 IX • 11 02/2004/e

SE.3.AN21.00... ELECTRONIC CARDS FORMAT EUROCARD
FOR PROPORTIONAL VALVES CONTROL CETOP 3
Instructions for use
For proportional valves with code B channel: repeat the above procedure for the A channel by operating
on the Imin B trimmer for negative values of the reference signal.
XD.3.A.**.*.*.F.**.2 - XD.3.C.**.*.*.F.**.2
XDP.3.A.**.*.*.F.**.2 - XDP.3.C.**.*.*.F.**.2
Maximum current regulation
A channel: put the reference signal on the max. (positive) value and
Power electric supply turn the gain trimmer (Imax A) slowly, until the max. speed requested is
24 VDC nominal reached. Now the speed can be varied by changing the reference
22÷30 VDC rectified and stabilized (30W max.) signal.
2A fast-acting fuse is fitted for power circuit protection.
B channel: repeat the above procedure for the A channel by operating
on the Imax B trimmer and by putting the reference signal on the max.
Reference voltage negative value.
The card gives 1 stabilized voltage values: +10V 50mA (a10) e
–10V 50mA (c10).
Available inputs Ramp time calibration

± 10V (a12, c12) preseted Connect the ramps. The ramp time is the time which is necessary for
4 ÷ 20mA (a12, c12) SW 1 bank: going from the minimum current value to the max. current value and
select I for current reference signaI. vice versa. The time can be set from a minimum value of 0.1 sec. (ramp
excluded) up to a maximum value of 10 sec. (valve max. opening)
Card enable (Enable) whether downwards or upwards. By turning the trimmers clockwise
the ramp time increases
Usually the card is not enable. For enabling it, apply in c24 a voltage
between 22 and 30VDC. Green led signal.
Ramp exclusion Notes:

Ramps are usually on. In order to disable them apply a16 a voltage The ramp down time influences the lock position of the actuator. By
between 22 ÷ 30VDC. setting to zero the reference signal, the actuator keeps moving until
the ramp time set (in a downward direction) has passed. For this
reason it is necessary to carry out the adjustment carefully and
Calibration procedure properly.
Connect the card according to the scheme (See the preceding page).
Set zero the reference potentiometer. Before applying the voltage,
make sure that the hydraulic system does not move suddenly causing
damages to people or things. Apply the voltage to the card: the green
Solenoid current test point
On the frontal card panel: 1V = 1A
led will start blinking. Enable the card and disconnect the ramps (led
"FAULT" off) and disable the ramps.
Minimum current regulation Command signal test point

A channel: put the reference signal on 3÷5% of the max. value. Turn Enables reading in voltage of referencesignal sent to the card.
the minimum current trimmer clockwise (Imin A) until the actuator Reading is direct, but of opposite sign, with voltage reference while
moves; then turn the trimmer counterclockwise until the actuator current conversation is: 4mA = +10V, 20mA = -10V.
stops.
CD Connector DIN 41612 D32

IC Connector C
IA Connector A
Ordering code:
X30770000
Fixing screws M2.5x13
Weight Kg. 0,25
File: SE3AN210002_E - P35160005 IX • 12 02/2004/e

SE.3.AN21.RS... ELECTRONIC CARDS FORMAT EUROCARD
FOR POSITIONAL TRANSDUCER VALVES CONTROL
The electronic cards type SE.3.AN.21.RS...serie 3 have been planned for controlling single
and double solenoid proportional valves XDC3....serie 2 equipped with position transducer
type LVDT. The card has a EUROCARD format for being assembled on a connector type DIN
41612 D 32. The output stage operates on the basis of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
is subject to the current feedback so that it is possible to obtain an output solenoid current
directly proportional to the input signal. The regulator is supplied with standard calibration for
proportional valve control. The card is equipped with a control module type PI which compares
the reference signal with the position transducer signal: the eventual error is used to optimize
the regulation. It is possible to carry out further regulations by operating on the relative
trimmers placed on the frontal panel (see picture).
• The connection between the card and the solenoid must be direct • The common one of return
SE.3.AN21.RS...03 to proportional solenoid must not be shared between other valve connections or electrical
INSTRUCTIONS CH. IX PAGE 14 equipment worker.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 14 Registered mark with reference to the electromagnetic compatibility.
European norms: EN50082-1 - General safety norm; EN50081-1 -Emission general norm.
ADJUSTMENT PANEL FOR CARD
ORDERING CODE Fault red – transducer fault signal

Power on yellow – 24V DC power supply
SE Electronic card format
Enable green – card enable
EUROCARD DIN 41612
Gain A Solenoid A maximum current regulation
3 NG06 Offset A Solenoid A offset current regulation
Gain B Solenoid B maximum current regulation
AN21 Analogic
Offset B Solenoid B offset current regulation
RS Closed loop valves with Ramp Up Ramp up regulation
positional transducer Ramp Down Ramp down regulation
type XDC.3 .... serie 2 Current A Solenoid A current test point (1V=1A)
Current B Solenoid B current test point (1V=1A)
16 Max. current at Reference Reference signal test point
solenoid: 1.76 A Transducer Transudcer signal measurement point
Common 0V Common zero
0 No variant
3 Serial No.
File: SE3AN21RS03_E - P35160009 IX • 13 00/2006/e

SE.3.AN.21.RS... ELECTRONIC CARDS FORMAT EUROCARD
FOR POSITIONAL TRANSDUCER VALVES CONTROL
Instructions for use
For proportional valves with code B channel: repeat the above procedure for the A channel by operating
XDC.3.C..F.... serie 2 (SE.3.AN21.RS.16...serie 3) on the Imax B trimmer and by putting the reference signal on the max.
negative value.
Power electric supply
24 VDC nominal Ramp time calibration
22÷30 VDC rectified and stabilized (30W max.) Connect the ramps. The ramp time is the time which is necessary for
2A fast-acting fuse is fitted for power circuit protection. going from the minimum current value to the max. current value and
vice versa. The time can be set from a minimum value of 0.1 sec. (ramp
Reference voltage excluded) up to a maximum value of 10 sec. (valve max. opening)
The card gives 2 stabilized voltage values: +10V 50mA (a10) and whether downwards or upwards. By turning the trimmers clockwise
–10V 50mA (c10). the ramp time increases.
Available inputs Notes:
± 10V (a12, c12) preseted The ramp down time influences the lock position of the actuator. By
4 ÷ 20mA (a12, c12) SW 1 bank: setting to zero the reference signal, the actuator keeps moving until
select I for current reference signaI. the ramp time set (in a downward direction) has passed. For this
Card enable (Enable) reason it is necessary to carry out the adjustment carefully and
Usually the card is not enable. For enabling it, apply in c24 a voltage properly.
between 22 and 30VDC. Green led signal. The card block (FAULT) is automatically reset after that the error has
been eliminated.
Ramp exclusion
Ramps are usually on. In order to disable them apply a16 a voltage LVDT connection
between 22 ÷ 30VDC. See the preceding page:
- terminal 1 della LVDT c8 of the card
Calibration procedure - terminal 2 della LVDT a24 of the card
Connect the card according to the scheme (See the preceding page). - terminal 3 della LVDT c22 of the card
Set zero the reference potentiometer. Before applying the voltage, Use screened cable with earth braid.
make sure that the hydraulic system does not move suddenly causing
damages to people or things. Apply the voltage to the card: the green Solenoid current test point
led will start blinking. Enable the card and disconnect the ramps (led On the frontal card panel: 1V = 1A
"FAULT" off) and disable the ramps.
Command signal test point
Minimum current regulation Enables reading in voltage of referencesignal sent to the card.
A channel: put the reference signal on 3÷5% of the max. value. Turn Reading is direct, but of opposite sign, with voltage reference while
the minimum current trimmer clockwise (Imin A) until the actuator current conversation is: 4mA = +10V, 20mA = -10V.
moves; then turn the trimmer counterclockwise until the actuator
stops. Feedback signal test point
B channel: repeat the above procedure for the A channel by operating On the frontal card panel: ± 5V according to the spool position
on the Imin B trimmer for negative values of the reference signal.
Ambient temperature range
0°÷ 50°C
Maximum current regulation
A channel: put the reference signal on the max. (positive) value and Electric connections
turn the gain trimmer (Imax A) slowly, until the max. speed requested is The connections concerning the reference potentiometers must be
reached. Now the speed can be varied by changing the reference carried out with a wire having a section of ≥0.75mm2..
signal. It is advised to use a screened cable with earth braid.
CD Connector DIN 41612 D32

IC Connector C
IA Connector A
Connector ordering code:

X30770000
Fixing screws M2.5x13
Weight Kg. 0,27
File: SE3AN21RS03_E - P35160009 IX • 14 00/2006/e

SE3.LN3 "CATEGORY 3" SAFETY ELECTRONIC CARD
(EN9541) OF MOBILE AERIAL PLATFORMS SETTORE
MOBILE
The category 3 safety electronic card was planned to permit automatic adjustment of the
“boats “ of mobile aerial platforms. Maintenance of the horizontal position is guaranteed
independently from the geometrical configuration of the platform’s articulated arms and of the
variation of inclination of the machine with respect to the base plane, complying to the
normative in force of the control systems bound to EN 954-1 safety.
The card is equipped with :
- two separate outlets (contact 13 and 14) live, 12 or 24V max. 1 Amp for the indication of
exceeding the inclination threshold pre-alarm (the value can be set by the installer between
0 and10°).
- One power outlet (contact 3) managed by safety relays for movement blocking in the case
of fault of the levelling system or for exceeding the maximum allowed inclination (intervention
SE3.LN3...
at 10°, the value can not be modified).
CARD ADJUSTMENT CH. IX PAGE 16 - Two digital inlets (optional) configurable for the use of the card in particular applications.
INSTRUCTIONS CH. IX PAGE 17 All adjustments and calibrations come about using a RS232 serial interface and relevant
FURTHER INFORMATIONS CH. IX PAGE 18 software supplied with the product.
Supply voltage 10 ÷ 36VDC

Max. supply voltage (peak) 40V
PATENT PENDING Maximum current supplied on the PWM outlets 3 Amps
n° MO2003A000296 PWM frequency 4000 Hz
Dither frequency 110 Hz
Offset adjustment field on the vertical -6° ÷ +6°
resolution 0.1°
Dead band 0 ÷ ±3°
ORDERING CODE resolution 0.1°
Minimum current adjustment 0 ÷ 50% Imax.
SE3 Electronic card
Aluminium box (IP67) Current gain adjustment 0 ÷ 100% Imax.
Adjustment intervention signal for
LN3 For levelling system exceeding pre-alarm inclination 0 ÷ ± 10°
with acceleration control resolution 0.1°
Intervention of safety relay for max inclination 10 °
*** 312 = Supply voltage 12VDC
Serial standard communication RS232
324 = Supply voltage 24VDC optional communicationCAN 2.0B
** 16 = 1.76A Maximum current Amp-seal connection 14 contacts

wire section = 1.0mm2
(coil 12V)
08 = 0.88A Maximum current Container protection level IP67
(coil 24V) Ambient operating temperature -30° ÷ +85°C
* Variants: Weight Kg 0,721

0 = No variants
4 Serial No
registered mark with reference to the EU Community Directives, in
accordance with the following norms: 9
- EN 954-1 - Safety-related parts of control systems - Part 1: General
principles for design.
- EN61000-6-2 - Generic immunity standard, industrial environment.
- EN61000-6-3 - Generic emission standard, residential environment.
MINIMUM CONFIGURATION REQUESTED BY THE PC - EN 60255-21-1 / EN 60255-21-2 - Electrical relays - Vibration, shock, bump and
seismic tests.
Pentium or compatible processor - EN61000-4-2 - EN61000-4-2/A1 - Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
CD reader - RS232 serial portal - - EN61000-4-3 - EN61000-4-3/A1 - EN61000-4-3/A2 - Radiated, radio frequency,
Windows 98, service pack 4, 2000, electromagnetic field immunity test.
XP, service pack 1, ME. - EN61000-4-4 - Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test.
- EN61000-4-6/A1 - Conducted disturbances inducted by radio-frequency fields,
immunity test.
- ISO7637-2 Electrical disturbances by conduction and coupling.
• Material supplied with the card

- Connector AMPSEAL flying part, with 14 contacts
- Handbook of use with instructions of maintenance and assembly.
• Separately supplied material
- The software P35150004 for the programming of the card is supplied on Cd-
rom support only upon request (please contact our Sale Offices).
• Material not supplied
- RS232 cable is not supplied.
File: SE3LN3004_E - P35160002 IX • 15 03/2008/e

"CATEGORY 3" SAFETY ELECTRONIC CARD (EN9541) OF MOBILE AERIAL PLATFORMS
SETTORE
CARD ADJUSTMENT MOBILE
Led / colour Function

D5 / green Led on = μP (microprocessor) OK
D9 / green Led on = DSP (Digital Signal Processor) OK
D14 / green Led on = Power supply stage 8V, OK
D20 / green Led on = Power supply stage 3.3V, OK
D25 / green Led on = Power supply stage 5V, OK
D23 / red Led on = Alarm for Side A exceeding maximum inclination
D28 / red Led on = Alarm for Side B exceeding maximum inclination
D34 / red Led on = security relay 1, active card functioning (OK)
D37 / red Led on = PWM outlet side A active
D41 / red Led on = security relay 2, active card functioning (OK)
D45 / red Led on = outlet PWM side B active
D48 / red Led on = Digital inlet 1 enabled MAXIMUM
FUSE
INCLINATION
D49 / red Led on = Digital inlet 2 enabled 5 AMP. ERROR SIGNAL
MAXIMUM
Other faults or malfunctioning are signalled by the flashing of LEDS D5 and D9. INCLINATION
Flashing occurs at pre-established time intervals A series of consecutive flashings ERROR SIGNAL
corresponds to a specific error that identifies an fault.

LED D5 signals the faults detected by the mP (microprocessor).
LED D9 signals faults detected by the DSP (digital signal processor).
MOUNTING SCHEME
RS232
File: SE3LN3004_E - P35160002 IX • 16 03/2008/e

SETTORE
MOBILE
INSTRUCTIONS
• Before proceeding to the calibration, ensure that any unexpected movement of the hydraulic system cannot cause material damage
or injury to people.
• The correct work of the card is guaranteed inserting an external fuse 32V- 5Amp on the supply voltage line.
• The connection between the card and the solenoid must be direct.
• The common one of return to proportional solenoid must not be shared between other valve connections or electrical equipment worker.
• SUPPLY VOLTAGE SETTING N° pin Function Description
The supply voltage can be 12 VDC or 24 1 Power supply +Vbattery 10 ÷ 30 VDC

VDC. Always check that the working voltage 2 GND supply -Vbattery GND
of the reels of the proportional valve is not
higher than the general power supply voltage 3 Status OK - Vbat output relè Live outlet
of the plant. V of battery - max. 6Amps
(live outlet is interrupted for exceeding max inclination ±10° or for breakage of the card)
• OFFSET VERTICAL POSITION 4 Out PWM coil A + Outlet PWM
ADJUSTMENT solenoid's side A max. 3Amps
After having installed the card on the 5 Out PWM coil B + Outlet PWM
platform cage, it is possible to regulate the solenoid's side B max. 3Amps
reference vertical through the “OFFSET“
regulation. The value can be varied around a 6 RX/232 RS232 serial portal reception channel
range ± 6°. Optional CAN/L for Can-bus communication
7 TX/232 RS232 serial portal reception channel
• DEAD BAND ADJUSTMENT Optional CAN/H for Can-bus communication
It corresponds to a value between ± 3°
with respect to the position of the vertical 8 Common PWM coil A Common channel PWM A
where the card results to be indifferent to the 9 Common PWM coil B Common channel PWM B
corrections. The value can be set using the 10 12/24V - Digital input 1 – optional Digital inlet 12/24V
“DEAD BAND“ control. (function optional)
11 12/24V - Digital input 2 – optional Digital inlet 12/24V
• MINIMUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT (function optional)
Minimum current allows to eliminate
opening start delay of the valve caused by the 12 GND RS232 Common serial portal Communication RS232
mechanical covering of the cursor. The value
13 Digital output - 12/24V max. 1Amp Pre-alarm outlet
of separate minimum current for channel A
for exceeding threshold
and B is pre-calibrated in the factory, it can be
max. inclination positive (intervention angle programmable from 0 to +10°)
adjusted using the “I min. A“ and “I min. B“
control. 14 Digital output - 12/24V max. 1Amp Pre-alarm outlet
for exceeding threshold
• CURRENT GAIN ADJUSTMENT max. inclination negative (intervention angle programmable from 0 to -10°)
Current gain allows to increase the
opening section of the functioning valve of the
greatest inclination of the “boat”. Separate CONNECTIONS SCHEME
current gain for the A and B channel is pre-
calibrated in the factory, it can be adjusted
using the “Gain A“ and “Gain B“ control. TILT
SENSOR
TILT
SENSOR
9
• ALARM INTERVENTIONS' ADJUSTMENT FOR
EXCEEDING PRE-ALARM INCLINATION
The card has two separate live outlets
(12/24V, max. 1 Amp) to signal exceeding of
SAFETY RELE
a pre-set inclination value of the boat.

This value (between 0° and 10°) can be
set by the system installer separately for both
channels using the “ALARM A“ and “ALARM PWM
OUTPUT
B“ control. STAGE
The two live outlets are active (voltage
value on the outlets = 12/24V) when the boat
is at an inclination lower than the values
indicated in “ALARM A“ and “ALARM B“.
When inclination exceeds the indicated
values the live outlets are disabled (voltage FUSE MAXIMUM
value on the outlets = 0V). 5 AMP. INCLINATION
ERROR SIGNAL
• CALIBRATION PROCEDURE MAXIMUM

All calibration parameters are set using INCLINATION
the PC. It is necessary to connect the levelling ERROR SIGNAL
board to a PC using a serial connection. Refer

to the instructions contained in the attached
maintenance and installation manual for the EV A (CH A) EV B (CH B)
procedure.
File: SE3LN3004_E - P35160002 IX • 17 03/2008/e

SETTORE
MOBILE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
CORRECT POSITION
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
SPARE PARTS AMPSEAL
Receptacle contacts
COD. 770520-1*
Plug housing 14 pin

COD. 776273-1*
* AMP code
Spare parts kit, connectors and
electrical contacts: V89950000
CONNECTION FOR SECURITY RELAY CONNECTION FOR SECURITY SOLENOID VALVE
FUSE
FUSE
+ BATTERY + BATTERY 5 AMP.
9 - BATTERY 5 AMP. - BATTERY
CONTROL / BLOCK
MOVEMENTS NOT
CONSENTED UNIT
ELETCTRONICAL
GENERAL MACHINE
BLOCK CONTROL / BLOCK
MOVEMENTS NOT
CONSENTED
CCONTROL / BLOCK
• Before proceeding to the • The correct work of the card
MOVEMENTS NOT
calibration, ensure that any is guaranteed inserting an
CONSENTED
unexpected movement of the external fuse 32V- 5Amp on
hydraulic system cannot the supply voltage line.
cause material damage or
injury to people.
Incorrect use of the products described in this catalogue may cause harm to personnel and equipment. The technical information given for each product in this catalogue may be subject to variation, and
the manufacturer reserves the right to make constructional modifications without giving prior notice.Each product presented, its data, features and technical specifications must therefore be examined and
checked by members of the user's staff (possessing suitable technical knowledge) taking into consideration the intended use of product.The user must, in particular, assess the operating conditions of each
product in relation to the application that he intends to use it for, analysing the data, features and technical specifications in view of the proposed applications, and ensuring that, in use in the product, all of
the conditions relating to the safety of personnel and equipment, also in the event of breakdown, are respected.
File: SE3LN3004_E - P35160002 IX • 18 03/2008/e

SE.MNC... NOT SOMULTANEOUS
MOVEMENT ELECTRONIC CARD
The SE.MNC... electronic control card is fitted with one or two proportional outputs with current
feedback for valve control (XQP3, CXQ3 ) and numerous on/off outputs for controlling the
solenoid in directional valves.
The overall functional logic enables simultaneous control of a single proportional output, one
of the 5 on/off directional valves and a dump valve within the hydraulic circuit.
The electronic card is fitted with an electric safety control (operator present signal); the current
outputs are only enabled if the operator present signal is on. The card is compatible with the
JC.5 series joystick.
SE.MNC... CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE CH. IX PAGE 19 POWER SUPPLY AND WIRING
ELECTRICAL FEATURES CH. IX PAGE 20 The card power supply can be protected by means of a 15A fuse. 0.75mm2 or 1mm2 gauge
REFERENCE INPUT SIGNAL CH. IX PAGE 20 electrical wire should be used for the connections.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CH. IX PAGE 20
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS CH. IX PAGE 21 PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CH. IX PAGE 21 The standard version card is fitted with an adjustment trimmer, which can be accessed by
removing the top of the casing. Each PWM output is fitted with trimmers for minimum current
TYPICAL INSTALLATION CH. IX PAGE 22
adjustment (Imin), current gain and ramp up/down.
MINIMUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

Minimum current helps overcome valve overlap and increases the sensitivity of the joystick
ORDERING CODE on the proportional valve opening. Minimum current value can be adjusted to between 0% and
50% of the maximum current. To increase the minimum current value, turn the lmin trimmer
in a clockwise direction.
SE Electronic card
CURRENT GAIN ADJUSTMENT
MNC For not simultaneous
Current gain allows the actuator's maximum speed to be adjusted according to the maximum
moviment value of the analogue signal (10v). Current gain can be adjusted to between 50% and 100%
of the maximum current. To reduce the gain value, turn the min trimmer in an anticlockwise
AL Alluminium box case IP67 direction.
*** Valve adjiustment RAMP TIME ADJUSTMENT

The ramp time is the time taken to pass from the minimum to the maximum current value, and
12F = 12V - 1.76A
vice versa. It’s adjustable from a minimum of 0s up to a maximum of 20s. To increase the ramp
24G = 24V - 0.88A time, turn the trimmer in a clockwise direction.
* Proportional flow regulators

1 = one regulator
2 = two regulators
TOPOGRAPHICAL LAYOUT
0 No variant
1 Serial No.
• registered mark
with reference to the
electromagnetic compatibility.
European norms:
- UNI EN ISO 14982 -
Agricultural and Forestal
Machines.
File: SEMNC001_E - P35160010 IX • 19 01/2006/e

SE.MNC... NOT SIMULTANEOUS MOVEMENT ELECTRONIC CARD
ELECTRICAL FEATURES REFERENCE SIGNAL

Power supply voltage 9 ÷ 30VDC USCITA AMPERE
Max current absorbed 15A
Analogue inputs n°2 0 ÷ 10V
Digital inputs n°10 12V or 24V optoisolated
GAIN ADJIUSTMENT
Proportional outputs n°2 Max 2,5A
with current feedback
On/off outputs n°11 Max 3A
Auxiliary voltage output n°2 10V stabilized
Proportional outputs parameter adjustment
MIN. ADJIUSTMENT
Standard version by trimmer
On request by RS-232
Electrical connections Connector 23pin + Connector 14pin
Operating temperature -40C° ÷ +85°C REFERENCE SIGNAL
(LED) STATUS SIGNAL CONNECTOR 14 PIN

LED STATUS FUNCTION PIN PIN DESCRIPTION
D1 Led on card supplied 1 On/off outputs EV 5A
D2 Led on card supplied 2 On/off outputs EV 5B
D3 Led on Proportional output PROP EV1 active Pin n°4 connector AMP 14 way 3 Proportional output
D4 Led on Proportional output PROP EV2 Not used PROP EV 1
D5 Led on Output IN0 active (forward/canal B) Pin n°10 connector AMP 23 way 4 Proportional output
D6 Led on Output IN1 active (back/canal A) Pin n°11 connector AMP 23 way PROP EV 2 (Not used)
D7 Led on Output IN2 active (Not used) Pin n°12 connector AMP 23 way 5 Back to proportional output
D8 Led on Output IN3 active (Not used) Pin n°13 connector AMP 23 way PROP EV 1
D9 Led on Output IN4 active (switch 1_JC5) Pin n°14 connector AMP 23 way 6 - V power
D10 Led on Output IN5 active (switch 2_JC5) Pin n°15 connector AMP 23 way 7 CAN_L (opzional)
D11 Led on Output IN6 active (switch 3_JC5) Pin n°20 connector AMP 23 way 8 CAN_H (opzional)
D12 Led on Output IN7 active (switch 4_JC5) Pin n°21 connector AMP 23 way 9 Back to proportional output
D13 Led on Output IN8 active (switch 5_JC5) Pin n°22 connector AMP 23 way PROP EV 2 (Not used)
D14 Led on Output IN9 active (operator present) Pin n°23 connector AMP 23 way 10 + V power (supply power circuits)
Protect by using a 15A fuse
11 + V power (supply logical circuits)
12 - V power
13 0V auxiliary voltage output
14 +10V auxiliary voltage output,
max. 100mA
9 CONNECTOR 23 PIN
PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION
1 On/off output EV 1A 14 Signal input (IN4)
2 On/off output EV 1B connected to 1 joystick JC5 switch
3 On/off output EV 2A 15 Signal input (IN5)
4 On/off output EV 2B connected to 2 joystick JC5 switch
5 On/off output EV 3A 16 +10V auxiliary voltage output, max. 100mA
6 On/off output EV 3B 17 0V auxiliary voltage output
7 On/off output EV 4A 18 Input JOY2 Analogue signal 0...+10V
8 On/off output EV 4B (Not used)
9 Output EV pressure relief valve 19 Input JOY1 Analogue signal 0...+10V
10 Signal input (IN0) connected to Y axis joystick JC5 signal
connected to forward joystick JC5 switch 20 Signal input (IN6)
11 Signal input (IN1) connected to 3 joystick JC5 switch
connected to back joystick JC5 switch 21 Signal input (IN7)
(Not used) 22 Signal input (IN8)
(Not used) 23 Signal input (IN9)
connected to operator present joystick JC5 switch
File: SEMNC001_E - P35160010 IX • 20 01/2006/e

FUNCTIONAL LOGIC OF THE ACTIVE OUTPUTS
JOY1 IN0 IN1 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 ATCIVE OUTPUTS
>0.2V H H H PROPEV1 + EV1B + EV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

>0.2V H H H PROPEV1 + EV1A + EV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Note:
>0.2V = The analogue signal on the JOY 1 input is maintained above 0.2V
H = the corresponding digital input leads to a positive battery voltage
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
64
1
157
216 124
N° DESCRIPTION PIECES
1 Box 1
2
2 Seal 1
3 Cover 1
4
5
Screw TCEI M5x14 UNI 5931
Screw TCEI M5x14 UNI 5931
3
2
4 1 9
6 Screw TCEI M5x14 UNI 5931 4
7 SEMNC card 1
7
6
File: SEMNC001_E - P35160010 IX • 21 01/2006/e

TYPICAL CONNECTIONS
• The common return of the proportional

valve must be exclusively connected to the
contact on the card connector; this contact
must not be connected or shared with other
earth connections or with other electronic
devices.
• The common return of the directional

control valves and dump valve must be
connected directly to the negative battery
terminal.
9
VERSION
WITH STACKABLE
VALVES
VERSION
WITH CETOP 3
OR CETOP 5
VALVES
File: SEMNC001_E - P35160010 IX • 22 01/2006/e

SVP... PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER
FOR MOTORS AND PUMPS CONTROL SETTORE
MOBILE
The SVP electronic amplifier with current feedback current is designed to control a pump
with variable flow rate or two pumps for open circuit or two motors.
The amplifier has two proportional outputs with current feedback and a single power output
without current feedback. Each proportional output is controlled by an analogue input; it is
therefore possible to control two proportional outputs independently (independent control for
the proportional outputs, option I in the ordering code).
Through the selection of a switch positioned on the card, it is possible to control both
proportional outputs with only one analogue input (symmetrical control for the proportional
outputs, option S in the ordering code).
The symmetrical control is used for hydrostatic pumps in closed-circuit with two solenoids
SVP... control. In the independent control mode, the two proportional outputs are mutually independent
TECHNICAL DATA CH. IX PAGE 23 and it is possible to control separately two open-circuit pumps with single solenoid control or
CONNECTION SCHEME CH. IX PAGE 24 two motors. The card also has an output for brake release control: this is ON when the output
current of the two proportional channels is at the minimum value. As the output current of one
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES CH. IX PAGE 25 of the channels exceeds an adjustable percentage above the minimum current, the brake
SPARE PARTS CH. IX PAGE 26 output state changes to OFF.
MAIN FEATURES
- External control signal for enabling card operation (it is possible to by-pass
this function).
- Linear and independent output current rise and drop ramps on both proportional
outputs.
ORDERING CODE
- Control of the card is possible via potentiometer, voltage signal (±5V) from an
external source or current signal from an external source (±20mA).
SVP Proportional amplifier - Differential analogue inputs logic.
for motors and pumps control - Adjustment of brake control output current value.
- Adjustment of the control parameters from digital interface panel built in on the
X X = For proportional solenoids card.
0.88 A (24 V DC) (STANDARD) - Two digital outputs (power 0.5A) to signal card failure or anomaly.
Y = For proportional solenoids - Short-circuit protection for the two proportional outputs.
1.76 A (12 V DC) - Protection for input power polarity inversion.
Z = For proportional solenoids - Over voltage protection system.
2.50 A (9 V DC) ADDITIONAL FEATURES
- When ordering it is possible to select the external control signal version
I I = Independent control of the (standard) with separate controls to enable the two proportional outputs (upon
proportional output request).
S = Symmetric control of the - Third analogue input (±5v or ±20mA) for pressure or position transducer (upon
proportional output (STANDARD) request).
- Digital Input (12V or 24V) for encoders or inductive speed sensors (upon
E E = With external card enabling control request).
- CAN-bus data transmission interface (upon request).
(STANDARD)
K = With external enabling control and
proportional output enabling control TECHNICAL DATA
0 = Without enabling control
Voltage supply 10 ÷ 30 VDC
1 1 = With voltage input ±5V

(STANDARD)
Max input current
Max output current for each proportional channel
8A
2.5 A
9
2 = With current input ±20mA
Max output current for brake control output 3A
ST ST= Version with setting panel Analogue external reference signal for proportional control
(STANDARD) ±5V, or ±20mA
CN=Version with CAN interface Resistance of external potentiometer 2KΩ ÷ 10 KΩ
Adjustable current rise time ramp 0 ÷ 20 sec
00 NONE (STANDARD)
Adjustable current drop time ramp 0 ÷ 20 sec
D1 Serie 1 digital model Adjustable min. output current for each proportional channel
0 ÷ 50% of set Max output current
Adjustment of current gain for each proportional channels
50% ÷ 100% of Max current
Connectors and electrical contacts
included in the fourniture. Brake adjustment release 0 ÷ 50% of set Max output current
Connector AMP 29 poles
Connector and contacts included (*)
Operative environment temperature -40°C ÷ +80°C
registered mark with reference to the
Protection degree IP65
EU Community Directives, in accordance With correct connector assembling and wiring (*)
with the following norms:
(*) It is responsibility of the customer the assembling and the wiring of the
EN61000-6-1, EN61000-6-3
connector supplied with the SVP proportional card.
File:SVP00D1_E IX • 23 00/2008/i
SVP... PROPORTIONAL AMPLIFIER FOR MOTORS AND PUMPS CONTROL
SETTORE
MOBILE
CONNECTION SCHEME
CHARACTERISTIC CURRENT OUTPUT CURVES
SYMMETRIC OPERATION OF THE PROPORTIONAL OUTPUTS
9
brake
control
I max selected
In this configuration, the command signal varies between -5V and +5V
with 0V as the central value and the command signal is to be given on
the analogue input Ian 1.
Any command signals sent to analogue input 2 of the board are ignored.
current
In symmetric mode, when the reference signal is between 0V and -5V,

the proportional output PWM 1 (PP1) is off, while the proportional output
AIN-1 voltage reference signal input PWM 2 (PP2) is on. When the reference signal on the other hand is
D.B. = dead band between 0V and +5V, the proportional output PWM 1 (PP1) is on, while
I min = offset minimum current the proportional output PWM 2 (PP2) is off.
Gain = current gain
File:SVP00D1_E IX • 24 00/2008/i
SETTORE
MOBILE
CHARACTERISTIC CURRENT OUTPUT CURVES
INDEPENDENT OPERATION OF THE PROPORTIONAL OUTPUTS
In this mode, the two outputs work independently

and the proportional output PWM 1 (PP1) is
controlled by the signal on the analogue input Ian
1 and the proportional output PWM 2 (PP2) is
controlled by the signal on the analogue input Ian
2.
brake
control
I max selected I max selected

In this mode both proportional
outputs may be on simultaneously.
PWM1 current
PWM2 current
AIN-1 voltage reference signal input AIN-2 voltage reference signal input
D.B. = dead band

I min = offset minimum current
Gain = current gain
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC OF THE BRAKE COMMAND 9

Whatever the operating mode of the proportional
outputs, be it symmetric or independent, the operating
logic of the brake command is always the same. Set
I max selected a current threshold value on the adjustment panel
(SF). When the current on both proportional outputs
PWM1 and PWM2 current
drops below the set threshold (SF), the output of the

brake is on. Whereas for the command output of the
brake to be disabled, all it takes is for the current of
one of the proportional outputs to exceed (SF).
AIN-1 e 2 voltage
input ref.
on/off output
brake ON D.B. = dead band

I min = offset minimum current
Gain = current gain
brake OFF
S.F. = threshold brake release
File:SVP00D1_E IX • 25 00/2008/i
SETTORE
MOBILE
SPARE PARTS AMP SEAL
Single wire seal

CODE 828905-1*
(Pack. 30 pcs.)
Plug cavity sealing

CODE 828906-1*
(Pack. 20 pcs.)
JPT contact
CODE 929937-3 o 929938-3*
(Pack. 30 pcs.)
Silicon facial sealing

CODE 963222-1*
JPT housing connector * AMP code

(plug) 29P Spare parts kit, gaskets, connectors
CODE 963449-2* and electrical contacts: V89960000
File:SVP00D1_E IX • 26 00/2008/i
JC.3.D... HEAVY DUTY SINGLE JOYSTICK BASE
SETTORE
This is a rugged joystick with single MOBILE
axis Y potentiometer and ergonomic
handle. The joystick has a spring return
lever for center position. The panel Electrical features
material for this joystick and thickness Potentiometer resistance 1.4 ÷ 2.2 KΩ
must be strong and rigid. The panel Max. supply voltage VDD = 32V DC
thickness should have a dimension of Max. supply voltage Y pot 0 – 100% VDD
minimum 3.5mm and maximum 6mm. Max. output current 5 mA
The joystick has two directional micro- Directional switches
switches per Y axis. The handle has 3 Maximum supply voltage VCC = 32V DC
pushbuttons and it is possible to have Max. output current 200 mA
the operator present switch too. Resistive load
The IP protection of joystick is referred Mechanical features
to above mounting panel and it can be Mechanical angle ± 20°
max. IP65. N.B. below mounting panel Maximum operating load 390 N
JC3D... the rating is IP40. (Measured 130 mm above the mounting surface)
APPLICATIONS Mechanical Life (Y axis) 7.500.000 cycles
Weight (handle include) 0,900 Kg
The joystick has been designed for
aerial platform, agricultural and forestry Ambient operating temperature -40°C ÷ +80°C
machinery. The use of this product Protection according to DIN IP65
ORDERING CODE with the Aron electronic control unit Shocks Level 20G Type ½ sine 6ms
for non contemporary movements Number of shocks 1350 per axis
JC Heavy duty single Joystick gives the maximum advantage for
hydraulic solutions controlled with a
3 Handle (3 switches) proportional valve. • Registered mark for industrial environment
with reference to the compatibility. European norms:
D Directional switches
- IEC 61000-4-3 “Electromagnetic immunity”
1 Functional operation - EN6550022 “Electromagnetic emissions”
singe axis (Y)
• Product in accordance with ROHS 2002/95/CE
Europe Directive.
A With operator present trigger switch
** 00 = No variants
GD = With silicon rubber protection
on the switches handle
1 Serial number
9
Connectors and electrical contacts included
in the fourniture.
POTENTIOMETER OUTPUT AXIS Y
In order to obtain the Y axis output signal IIn order to obtain the Y axis output signal In order to obtain the Y axis output signal
from the joystick as indicated in the diagram from the joystick as indicated in the diagram from the joystick as indicated in the diagram
over it is necessary to connect the pin 9 over it is necessary to connect the pin 9 of over it is necessary to connect the pin 9 of
and 11 of the AMP 16 way connector at the AMP 16 way connector at 0V, and to the AMP 16 way conector at -VDD, and to
+VDD, and to connect the pin 12 of the connect the pin 11 of the AMP 16 way connect the pin 11 of the AMP 16 way
AMP 16 way connector at 0V. connector at +VDD. connector at +VDD.
File: JC3D001_E - P35160006 IX • 27 03/2008/e

JC.3.D... . HEAVY DUTY SINGLE JOYSTICK BASE
SETTORE
MOBILE
CONNECTOR CONFIGURATION AND PIN ALLOCATION DETAIL
12 WAY HANDLE CONNECTIONS
AMP Pin allocation description
2 Switch 3 - contact N/O
8 Operator present trigger switch
11 Switch track common
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
FROM THE 16 WAY PRIMARY POTENTIOMETER CONNECTIONS

SINGLE POTENTIOMETER PER Y AXIS
1 Y Switch track forward
9 Y Pot track back
10 Y Pot track signal
11 Y Pot track forward
12 Y Pot track centre tap
13 Y Switch track common
14 Y Switch track back
16 Y Switch track centre on
HANDLE ADAPTER PLATE
9 SPARE PARTS AMP 040 SERIES MULTILOCK
Receptacle contacts
P.No. 175062-1* Loose piece
Plug housing 12 position

P.No. 174045-2*
ANALOGUE JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS
Plug housing 16 position double row

P.No. 174046-2*
* AMP code
Spare parts kit, connectors and electrical contacts: V89900000
File: JC3D001_E - P35160006 IX • 28 03/2008/e

JC.5.D... HEAVY DUTY SINGLE JOYSTICK BASE
SETTORE
This is a rugged joystick with MOBILE
potentiometer and ergonomic handle.
The joystick has a spring return lever
for center position. Single axis Y or Electrical features
dual axes XY are available. The panel Potentiometer resistance 1.4 ÷ 2.2 KΩ
material for this joystick and thickness Max. supply voltage VDD = 32V DC
must be strong and rigid. The panel Max. supply voltage X and Y pot 0 – 100% VDD
thickness should have a dimension of Max. output current 5 mA
minimum 3.5mm and maximum 6mm. Directional switches
The joystick has two directional micro- Maximum supply voltage VCC = 32V DC
switches per axis. The handle has 5 Max. output current 200 mA
pushbuttons and it is possible to have Resistive load
the operator present switch too.
Mechanical features
The IP protection of joystick is referred Mechanical angle ± 20°
to above mounting panel and it can be Maximum operating load 390 N
JC5D... max. IP65. N.B. below mounting panel (Measured 130 mm above the mounting surface)
the rating is IP40. Mechanical Life (X and Y axis) 7.500.000 cycles
APPLICATIONS Weight (handle include) 0,900 Kg
The joystick has been designed for Ambient operating temperature -40°C ÷ +80°C
aerial platform, agricultural and forestry Protection according to DIN IP65
ORDERING CODE machinery. The use of this product Shocks Level 20G Type ½ sine 6ms
with the Aron electronic control unit Number of shocks 1350 each axis
for non contemporary movements
JC Heavy duty single Joystick
gives the maximum advantage for
hydraulic solutions controlled with a
5 Handle (5 switches) proportional valve. • Registered mark for industrial environment
with reference to the compatibility. European norms:
D Directional switches
- IEC 61000-4-3 “Electromagnetic immunity”
- EN6550022 “Electromagnetic emissions”
* Functional operation
1 = singe axis (Y) • Product in accordance with ROHS 2002/95/CE
2 = dual axis (XY) Europe Directive.
* A = With operator present trigger switch

B = Without operator present trigger switch
00 No variants
1 Serial number

in the fourniture.
POTENTIOMETER OUTPUT AXIS X,Y

9
In order to obtain the output signal from In order to obtain the output signal from In order to obtain the output signal from
the joystick as indicated in the diagram the joystick as indicated in the diagram the joystick as indicated in the diagram
over it is necessary: over it is necessary: over it is necessary:
- for the X axis output signal, connect the - for the X axis output signal, connect the - for the X axis output signal, connect the
pin 3 and 5 of the AMP 16 way connector pin 3 of the AMP 16 way connector at 0V, pin 3 of the AMP 16 way connector at
at +VDD, and connect the pin 6 of the AMP and connect the pin 5 of the AMP 16 way -VDD, and connect the pin 5 of the AMP 16
16 way connector at 0V. connector at +VDD. way connector at +VDD.
- for the Y axis output signal, connect the - for the Y axis output signal, connect the - for the Y axis output signal, connect the
pin 9 and 11 of the AMP 16 way connector pin 9 of the AMP 16 way connector at 0V, pin 9 of the AMP 16 way conector at -VDD,
at +VDD, and connect the pin 12 of the and connect the pin 11 of the AMP 16 way and connect the pin 11 of the AMP 16 way
AMP 16 way connector at 0V. connector at +VDD. connector at +VDD.
File: JC5D001_E - P35160007 IX • 29 03/2008/e

JC.5.D... . HEAVY DUTY SINGLE JOYSTICK BASE
SETTORE
MOBILE
CONNECTOR CONFIGURATION AND PIN ALLOCATION DETAIL
12 WAY HANDLE CONNECTIONS
11 Switch track common
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
16 WAY PRIMARY POTENTIOMETER CONNECTIONS

Single potentiometer per axis
1 Y Switch track forward
2 X Switch track centre on
3 X Pot track left
4 X Pot track signal
5 X Pot track right
6 X Pot track centre tap
7 X Switch track common
8 X Switch track left
9 Y Pot track back
10 Y Pot track signal
11 Y Pot track forward HANDLE ADAPTER PLATE
12 Y Pot track centre tap
9 13
14
Y
Y
Switch track common
Switch track back
15 X Switch track right
16 Y Switch track centre on
SPARE PARTS AMP 040 SERIES MULTILOCK
Receptacle contacts
P.No. 175062-1* Loose piece
Plug housing 12 position

P.No. 174045-2*
ANALOGUE JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS
Plug housing 16 position double row

P.No. 174046-2*
* AMP code
File: JC5D001_E - P35160007 IX • 30 03/2008/e

JC.F.D... SINGLE-AXIS FINGERTIP JOYSTICK
Developed for applications Electrical features
where ergonomics and system Potentiometer resistance 5 KΩ
integrity are paramount, the JCFD is Max. supply voltage VDD = 32V DC
a compact, low profile joystick that Output signal Y pot 0 – 100% VDD
provides precise fingertip control. Output signal Y pot GG variant 10 - 90% VDD
Designed for use with an electronic Max. output current 2mA
controller, the plastic track generates
analogue and switched reference Directional switches
signals, proportional to the distance Maximum supply voltage VCC = 32V DC
and direction over which the handle Max. output current 2mA
is moved. The analogue output is Resistive load
JC.F.D... configured to provide signals for fault Mechanical features
detection circuits within the controller. Mechanical angle ± 30°
A center tap on the analogue track Maximum operating load 50 N
provides an accurate voltage (Measured 130 mm above the mounting surface)
reference for the center position or a Mechanical Life 5.000.000 cycles
zero point for a bipolar supply voltage. Weight 0,045 Kg
ORDERING CODE Ambient operating temperature -25°C ÷ +70°C
JC Joystick
F Fingertip
• Registered mark for industrial environment
D Directional with reference to the compatibility. European norms:
switches - IEC 61000-4-3 “Electromagnetic immunity”
- EN6550022 “Electromagnetic emissions”
1 Singolo asse
• Product in accordance with ROHS 2002/95/CE
** 00 = No variants Europe Directive.
GG = 10-90% output signal
1 Serial number
9
in the fourniture.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL
In order to obtain the output signal from In order to obtain the output signal from In order to obtain the output signal from
the joystick as indicated in the diagram it the joystick as indicated in the diagram it the joystick as indicated in the diagram it
is necessary: connect the Pin B and Pin D is necessary: connect the Pin B of the is necessary: connect the Pin B of the
of the connector at +VDD, and connect connector at +VDD, and connect the Pin D connector at +VDD, and connect the Pin D
the Pin A at 0V. at 0V. at -VDD.
File: JCFD001_E - P35160011 IX • 31 03/2010/e

JC.F.D... SINGLE-AXIS FINGERTIP JOYSTICK
HANDLE ADAPTER PLATE OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Connections
A Center tap
B Positive voltage supply + VDD
C Output voltage signal
D Negative or zero voltage supply
E Directional switch- handle back
F Directional switch- handle forward
G Common terminal for directional switch
SPARE PARTS ANALOGUE JOYSTICK CONTROLLERS

Contacts
P.No. 76347*
Plug housing
P.No. 65240-007LF*
9 * FCI code
File: JCFD001_E - P35160011 IX • 32 03/2010/e

TECHNICAL SYSTEMS
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010
ABBREVIATIONS LOW / HIGH PRESSURE UNITS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING BA.130...
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) CH. X PAGE 2
PARBAK PARBAK RING BSC.5.69...
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION CH. X PAGE 4
Q FLOW (L/MIN)
SE ELASTIC PIN
SF BALL
SPECIAL SUBPLATE MOUNTINGS
SR SERIES CONNECTION WITH AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION
X PILOTING REGENERATING CIRCUIT
Y DRAINAGE
operating conditions of each product in relation BS5.RGA...
analysing the data, features and technical CH. X PAGE 5
specifications in view of the proposed BS5.RGI...
applications, and ensuring that, in use in the CH. X PAGE 5
AD.5.I.P.2T.1
CH. I PAGE 42
10
Plant

Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 10TA_E X• 1 03/2000/e

BA.130... LOW / HIGH PRESSURE UNITS
The low/high pressure groups are usu- Max. flow 130 l/min
ally employed in hydraulic systems Max. operating pressure 320 bar
fed by dual pumps that form a single Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
pressure circuit. The main feature of Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
this system consists in being able to Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
set a pressure value in correspond- Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
ence of which one of the two pumping with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
sections is changed over to drain. Weight 8 Kg
These groups are fitted with an
adjustable maximum pressure valve
BA.130... to protect the hydraulic system.
BA.10... CH.XI PAGE 2 2 pressure adjustment ranges are
PRESSURE DROPS
CMP.10... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE available for the exclusion valve, which
is fitted with a steel seat, while the 1
BSC.5.69... CH.XI PAGE 4
maximum pressure valve type CMP10
BC.5.30/32... CH.VII PAGE 26 is available with 3 adjustment ranges.
Δp (bar)
BC.5.40... CH.VII PAGE 25
2
CETOP 5/NG10 CH. I PAGE 28 Minimum permissible setting
ADP.5.E... CH. I PAGE 36 pressure depending on the spring:
see cartridge valve type CMP10.
ORDERING CODE The series connection modular small

block (BC.5.32) or the parallel
connection type (BC.5.30) with Q (l/min)
BA Low/high pressure base
blanking plate (BC.5.40) and the
solenoid valve should be ordered Curve 1= P1 → T
130 Capacity l/min separately. 2 = P1 → P
U* Double pump For the subplate mounting ordering
code see "Subplates" chapter; whilst
exclusion valve setting
for the valve ordering code see
2 = 20 ÷ 90 bar "Directional control valves" chapter.
3 = 50 ÷ 190 bar
The CETOP5/NG10 connector blocks MODULE ORDERING CODE
have 3 rods.
C Type of adjustment:
grub screw BA Subplate mounting
* Max. pressure 10 CETOP 5/NG10

valve setting
1 = max. 50 bar ** Type of module:
2 = max. 150 bar 62 = side CETOP interface
3 = max. 320 bar 68 = with upper threaded connectors
00 No variant 00 No variant
1 Serial No. 1 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND HYDRAULIC SYMBOL

Fixing screws M6x100 UNI 5931 Pay attention please, max tightening torque for manometer (M2): 35 Nm / 3,5 Kgm
10
File: BA130001_E X• 2 03/2010/e

OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

SIDE MOUNTING FOR SINGLE SOLENOID VALVE CETOP5/NG10 (CONNECTOR BLOCK BA.10.62)
UPPER MOUNTING FOR SINGLE SOLENOID VALVE CETOP5/NG10
MOUNTING WITH THREADED CONNECTORS (CONNECTOR BLOCK BA.10.68)

10
File: BA130001_E X• 3 03/2010/e


MULTIPLE MOUNTING WITH MODULAR COMPONENT CONNECTOR BLOCKS CONNECTED IN SERIES OR PARALLEL CETOP5/NG10
BSC.5.69... TRANSFORMATION MOUNTING CETOP 5 INTERFACE TO

MODULAR COMPONENT BC.5...
Fixing srcews M6x35 UNI 5931

BSC Modular component Weight 2,1 Kg
subplate
5 CETOP 5/NG10
69 Type of module:
to modular component BC5
10 00
1
No variant
Serial No.
File: BA130001_E X• 4 03/2010/e

BS.5.R*A... SPECIAL SUBPLATE MOUNTINGS WITH
AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION REGENERATING CIRCUIT
These special subplates, with relief Max. pump flow (suggested) 30 l/min
valve, have integrated a regenerative Max. flow with regenerative connected 100 l/min
circuit which disengages automatically Max. operating pressure (relief valve) 350 bar
with increasing load. Max. operating pressure (exclusion) 200 bar
This circuit allows a fast movement of Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
the cylinder with low working pressure Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
followed by an automatic disengage- Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
ment of the regenerative function at Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
the set pressure, consequent a higher with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
hydraulic force is available. Weight BS.5.RGA... version Kg 5,7
Weight BS.5.RIA... version Kg 9,4
Furthermore in the BS.5.RIA version
the automatic reciprocating valve al-
lows a continuous movement of the
cylinder till the stop of the pump.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION VALUES
The reciprocating valve has a prefer- • Cylinder area ratio (α) 1,6 : 1
ential position which allows the cylin- • Pump flow (QP) 30 l/min
der to begin always in the same posi- • Type of oil 46 cSt a 40°
tion at the start of the working cycle (P • Regenerative flow (QR)
BS.5.RGA... / BS.5.RIA...
→ B). 80 l/min (for RGA standard subplate)
AD.5.I... CH. I PAGE 42
75 l/min (for RIA standard subplate)
This systems are particularly useful • Min. exclusion pressure setting 70 bar
for garbage compactors or small • Max exclusion pressure setting 200 bar
presses. • Exclusion pressure drops 6 bar
BS Single subplate mounting BS.5.RGA BS.5.RIA... (WITH AD.5.I.P.2T.1)
5 CETOP 5/NG10
*** RGA = Automatic exclusion

regenerating circuit with
presetting for AD.5.E...
RIA = Automatic exclusion
regenerating circuit with
AD.5.I.P.2T.1 included
U3 Exclusion range
20 ÷ 200 - see note (*)
* Adjustment (relief valve)

M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
* Max relief setting ranges

3 = max. 350 bar (green spring) TYPICAL INSTALLATION FOR BS.5.RGA
10
** 00 = No variant
2 Serial No
(*) These values depend on the hydraulic

circuit configuration: flow, dimensions and
system's frictions.
File: BS5R$A002_E X• 5 02/2002/e

BS.5.RGA... / BS.5.RIA... SPECIAL SUBPLATE MOUNTINGS WITH
AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION REGENERATING CIRCUIT
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
BS.5.RGA...
BS.5.RIA... WITH AD.5.I.P.2T.1
10
File: BS5R$A002_E X• 6 02/2002/e

TECHNICAL STACKABLE VALVES
OFF-HIGHWAY
CATALOGUE MACHINERY
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
ARON 2010
STACKABLE VALVES
ABBREVIATIONS
C STROKE (MM) PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
CH ACROSS FLATS STACKABLE VALVE
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS CDC.3.*.E...
OR SEAL RING CH. XI PAGE 3
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) CD.3.*.E...
PARBAK PARBAK RING CH. XI PAGE 5
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION A09 DC COIL
PR REDUCED PRESSURE (BAR) CH. XI PAGE 8
Q FLOW (L/MIN) D15 DC COIL
CX.3...
QP PUMP FLOW (L/MIN) CH. XI PAGE 8
CH. XI PAGE 11
SE ELASTIC PIN "LF" VARIANT FOR CDC... / CD...
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID D15P
SF BALL CH. XI PAGE 9
CH. XI PAGE 13
SR SERIES CONNECTION STUDS AND FIXING FEET
CXQ.3...
X PILOTING CAP. XI PAGE 10
CH. XI PAGE 14
Y DRAINAGE D15P PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID
Incorrect use of the products described in this CH. XI PAGE 15
STUDS AND FIXING FEET
for each product in this catalogue may be MODULAR CAP. XI PAGE. 10
subject to variation, and the manufacturer STACKABLE VALVE
product presented, its data, features and INLET AND OUTLET MODULE UNITS
examined and checked by members of the FOR STACKABLE VALVES
event of breakdown, are respected. CM.3.P... FI.3...
CH. XI PAGE 16 CAP. XI PAG. 10
CM.3.M... FE02.3...
CH. XI PAGE 17
FE10.3...
CAP. XI PAG. 19
CAP. XI PAG. 20
11
FE10LS.3...
CAP. XI PAG. 21
FE10.P.3...
Plant
CAP. XI PAG. 22
Via Natta, 1 (Z.I. Mancasale) FE.3...
CAP. XI PAG. 23
Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856 FELS.3...
www.aron.it - sales@brevinifluidpower.com CAP. XI PAG. 23
General terms and conditions of sale: FU.3...
see website www.aron.it CAP. XI PAG. 24
File: 11TA_E XI • 1 10/2010/e

CDC.3.*.E...
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE SETTORE
Directional control stackable valve body is available in two different sizes:
MOBILE
G3/8" or 9/16-18UNF (SAE 6).
calibrated length springs which immediately reposition the spool in the neutral position when
the electrical signal is shut off. To improve the valve performance, different springs are used
for each spool.
The solenoids, constructed with a protection class of IP65 in accordance with BS 5490
CDC.3.*.E... standards, are available in direct current form and different voltage. The electrical controls are
INDIVIDUAL VALVE CH. XI PAGE 3 equipped with an emergency manual control inserted in the tube.
STACKABLE VALVES CH. XI PAGE 4 The electrical supply connectors meet DIN 43650 ISO 4400 standards. On request, could be
"A09" DC COILS CH. XI PAGE 8 available the following coil connec-
tion variants: AMP Junior connec- Max. pressure ports P/A/B/T 250 bar
"LF" VARIANTS CH. XI PAGE 9
tions; flying leads connections, with Max flow 30 l/min
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. XI PAGE 10 or without integrated diode; Deutsch Max excitation frequency 3 Hz
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. XI PAGE 25 connections with bidirectional inte- Duty cycle 100% ED
grated diode. Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
The body valve is white zinc plated. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
ORDERING CODE Max contamination level class 10 in accordance
TAB.1 - BODY TYPE
CDC Directional control A Ports G3/8" parallel Weight with one DC solenoid 1,25 Kg
stackable valve B Ports 9/16 - 18UNF parallel Weight with two DC solenoids 1,5 Kg
D* Ports G3/8" series
3 Size E* Ports 9/16 - 18UNF series
G Attachment style, parallel TAB.2 - STANDARD SPOOLS
* Body type (tab. 1) presetting for modular valves
TWO SOLENOIDS,SPRING CENTRED "C" MOUNTING
H* Attachment style, series
E Electrical operator presetting for modular valves Spool Covering Transient position
L Ports G3/8" parallel - LS vers. type
** Spool (tab.2) M Attachment style, parallel-LS vers. 01 +

For series connection presetting for modular valves
(*) For series connection configuration see note below
use spool 04 only 02 -
ordering code
* Mounting (tab.3) 03 +
TAB.4 - A09 - DC VOLTAGE
L 12V 04* -
* Voltage (tab.4) 115Vac/50Hz
M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
** Variants (tab.5) P 110V* ONE SOLENOID, SIDE A "E" MOUNTING
230Vac/50Hz
Z 102V* 240Vac/60Hz Spool Covering Transient position
2 Serial No. X 205V* with rectifier
type
W Without DC coils
01 +
* Special voltage
For series connection • The AMP Junior coil and with the flying 02 -
configuration, a special leads (with or without diode) coils are avail-
individual stackable valve able in 12V or 24V DC voltage only. 03 +
CDC.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2 (A B or G
parallel body type only, with • The Deutsch coil with bidirectional diode
04* -
spool 04 type, 3T variant) must is available in 12V DC voltage only.
always be used as first element. 15 -
For other individual stackable valve TAB.5 - VARIANTS (**)
must use body D E or H connector COD. VARIANT REPLACED CODE 16 +
series type with spool 04 only. S1 No variant 00
SV Viton V1
TAB.3 MOUNTING ES Emergency button E1 ONE SOLENOID, SIDE B "F" MOUNTING
STANDARD
P2(*) Rotary emergency button P1 Spool Covering Transient position
11 C
R5(*)Rotary emergency button 180° P5
PT First elem. for series connec. PT
-
-
Pilot light
Rectifier
X1
R1
type
01 +
E 02 -
LF Emergency control lever LE
LR Emergency control lever 180° LG
F - Pilot light + Rectifier XR 03 +
FL coils with flying leads (250 mm) FL
SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING) 04* -
LD coils with flying leads (130 mm)
G and integrated diode LD
AJ AMP Junior connection AJ 15 -
CX Deutsch connec. bidr.diode CX
H 16 +
(*) P2 and R5 Emergency tightening torque (**) It's suggest to order the variant without connectors. The * SPOOL WITH PRICE INCREASING
max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22 connectors must be order separately. See Ch. XI Page 25
File: CDC3002_E XI • 2 01/2010/e

CDC.3.*.E... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE
SETTORE
MOBILE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
E = Manual override
Only for LS versions

O-Ring 2-008
81,5
E
N°
4f
ori
Ø
6,5
129,5
(*) =
Fittings, max. tightening torque 60 Nm
PRESSURE DROPS
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE
10
1
Connections The diagram at the side shows
2 Spool the pressure drop curves for
type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T P/ T passing spools during normal usage.
3 The fluid used is a mineral oil with
4 01 4 4 4 4 / 9
02 (p*) 7 7 6 6 7 9 a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 C°;
Δp (bar)
5
02 (s*) 7 7 6 6 8 / the tests have been carried out at
6 a fluid temperature of 40 C°.
7 03 4 4 6 6 / 9
04 (p*) 2 2 1 1 5 9
8
04 (s*) 2 2 1 1 3 /
9 15-16 F 6 6 5 10 / 9
15-16 E 6 6 10 5 / 9
(p*) Parallel connections
Q (l/min) Curve No. (s*) Series connections

The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature
11
1 and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature of 50
Spool n° C°. The fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40
2
type curve degrees C. The values in the diagram refer to tests carried out with the
3 oil flow in two directions simultaneously (e.g. from P to A and at the same
01 1
02 1 time B to T).
P (bar)
03 3 In the cases where valves 4/2 and 4/3 are used with the flow in one
04 2 direction only, the limits of use could have variations which may
4 15-16 1(4*) even be negative (See curve No 4 and Spool No 16 used as 2 or 3
ways). The tests were carried out with a counter-pressure of 2 bar
at T port.
Q (l/min)
(4*) = 15 and 16 spools used as 2 or 3 way, follow the curve n°4
File: CDC3002_E XI • 3 01/2010/e

STACKABLE DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVES
SETTORE
MOBILE
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS AND INSTRUCTION OF CONNECTION
PARALLEL CONNECTION
SERIES CONNECTION Special element

CDC.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2
Special closing plug
For series connection configuration, a special individual valve

bank section (CDC.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2) must always be used as first
element (see ordering code)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Tighten the screws to a torque of 10 Nm

95,5
69
46
10
32
Ch./Hex.
11 10
FE02-FE INLET MODULE FE 10 INLET MODULE

LENGTH LENGTH
NO. ELEMENTS C (mm) D C (mm) D
2 192 180 202 190
3 238 226 248 236
4 284 272 294 282
5 330 318 340 328
6 376 364 386 374
File: CDC3002_E XI • 4 01/2010/e

CD.3.*.E... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
STACKABLE VALVE WITH D15 COILS SETTORE
Directional control stackable valve body is available in two different sizes: MOBILE
G3/8" or 9/16-18UNF (SAE 6).
calibrated length springs which immediately reposition the spool in the neutral position when
the electrical signal is shut off. To improve the valve performance, different springs are used
for each spool. The solenoids, constructed with a protection class of IP66 in accordance with
DIN 40050 standards, are available in direct current form and different voltage. The electrical
supply connectors meet DIN 43650 ISO 4400 standards; AMP Junior, AMP Junior and
CD.3.*.E... integrated diode, flying leads, Deutsch DT 04 - 2P coil type, connectors are also available with
INDIVIDUAL VALVE CH. XI PAGE 6 built in rectifiers or pilot lights.
Max. pressure ports P/A/B/T 250 bar
STACKABLE VALVES CH. XI PAGE 7 The body valve is white zinc Max flow 40 l/min
"D15" DC COILS CH. XI PAGE 8 plated. Max excitation frequency 3 Hz
"LF" VARIANTS CH. XI PAGE 9 Duty cycle 100% ED
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. XI PAGE 10
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. XI PAGE 25 Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
ORDERING CODE Weight with one DC solenoid 1,389 Kg
TAB.1 - BODY TYPE Weight with two DC solenoids 1,778 Kg
CD Directional control A Ports G3/8" parallel
stackable valve B Ports 9/16 - 18UNF parallel
TAB.2 - STANDARD SPOOLS
(with D15 coil) D* Ports G3/8" series
E* Ports 9/16 - 18UNF series
T WO SOLENOIDS,SPRING CENTRED "C" MOUNTING
G Attachment style, parallel Spool Covering Transient position

3 Size
presetting for modular valves type
* Body type (tab. 1) H* Attachment style, series 01 +

presetting for modular valves
L Ports G3/8" parallel - LS vers. 02 -
M Attachment style, parallel-LS vers.
presetting for modular valves 03 +
** Spool (tab.2) (*) For series connection configuration see note below
For series connection ordering code
04* -
use spool 04 only
TAB.4 - D15 COIL (DC - 30W)
* Mounting (tab.3) ONE SOLENOID, SIDE A "E" MOUNTING
L 12V 115Vac/50Hz Spool Covering Transient position
* Voltage (tab.4) M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
type
N 48V* 01 +
** Variants (tab.5) Z 102V* 230Vac/50Hz
P 110V* 240Vac/60Hz 02 -
2 Serial No. X 205V* with rectifier
W Without DC coils or connectors 03 +

Voltage codes are not stamped on the plate, their are
For series connection readable on the coils.
configuration, a special 04* -
* Special voltage
individual stackable valve • AMP Junior (with or without diode) and
CD.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2 (A B or G 15 -
Deutsch and with flying leads coils, are
parallel body type only, with available in 12V or 24V DC voltage only.
spool 04 type, 3T variant) must 16 +
• Plastic type coils (RS) are available in
always be used as first element. 12V, 24V, 28V or 110V DC voltage only.
For other individual stackable valve
must use body D E or H connector
series type with spool 04 only. TAB.5 - VARIANTS (**) Spool Covering Transient position
type
CODE VARIANT REPLACED CODE
TAB.3 MOUNTING 01 +
STANDARD
S1 No variant 00
C
SV Viton
-
-
Pilot light
Rectifier
V1
X1
R1
02
03
-
+
11
E ES Emergency button E1
P2(*) Rotary emergency button P1
04* -
R5(*) Rotary emergency b. 180° P5
F 3T First elem. for series connec. PT
AJ AMP Junior connection AJ 15 -
SPECIALS (WITH PRICE INCREASING)
AD AMP Junior and integr. diode AD
SL Coil with flying leads (l75 mm) SL 16 +
G
CZ Coil with Deutsch DT04-2P CZ
RS Palstic type coil BR * SPOOL WITH PRICE INCREASING
H LF Emergency control lever LE
LR Emergency control lever 180°LG
- Pilot light + Rectifier XR (**) It's suggest to order the variant without
(*) P2 and R5 Emergency tightening torque connectors. The connectors must be order
max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22 separately. See Ch. XI Page 25
File: CD3002_E XI • 5 01/2010/e

CD.3... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE WITH D15 COILS
SETTORE
MOBILE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Only for LS versions E = Manual override
O-Ring 2-008
56
Parallel body
version with LS line
A B
LS LS
P P
(*)
T T
PRESSURE DROPS
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE
10 9 8
20
18 7 Connections The diagram at the side shows

Spool the pressure drop curves for
16 6 type P →A P →B A →T B →T P →T P/ T passing spools during normal usage.
14 5
01 6 6 6 6 / 1 The fluid used is a mineral oil with
12
Dp (bar)
4 02 (p*) 5 5 4 4 2 1 a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 C°;

10
02(s*) 5 5 5 5 3 / the tests have been carried out at
8 a fluid temperature of 40 C°..
3 03 6 6 5 5 / 1
6
2 04 (p*) 9 10 8 8 4 1
4
04 (s*) 9 9 8 8 5 /
2 15-16 E 5 7 5 9 / 1
1
0 15-16 F 7 5 9 5 / 1
0 10 20 30 40
Q (l/min)
(p*) Parallel connections
Curve No. (s*) Series connections
11 LIMITS OF USE (MOUNTING C-E-F)

1 The tests have been carried out with solenoids at operating temperature
and a voltage 10% less than rated voltage with a fluid temperature of 50
2 Spool n° C°. The fluid used was a mineral oil with a viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40
type curve degrees C. The values in the diagram refer to tests carried out with the
01 1 oil flow in two directions simultaneously (e.g. from P to A and at the same
02 1 time B to T).
P (bar)
03 1 In the cases where valves 4/2 and 4/3 are used with the flow in one
3 04 2 direction only, the limits of use could have variations which may
15 3 even be negative (See curve No 3 and Spool No 16 used as 2 or 3
16 1(3*) ways). The tests were carried out with a counter-pressure of 2 bar
at T port.
Q (l/min) (3*) = 16 spools used as 2 or 3 way, follow the curve n°3
File: CD3002_E XI • 6 01/2010/e

CD.3... DIRECTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVE WITH D15 COILS
SETTORE
MOBILE
PARALLEL CONNECTION
SERIES CONNECTION Special element

CD.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2
Special closing plug
For series connection configuration, a special individual valve

bank section (CD.3.*.E.04.**.3T.2) must always be used as first
element (see ordering code)
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

98,5
69
46
Ch./Hex. 10
32
7
10
11
D
C

LENGTH LENGTH
2 192 180 202 190
3 238 226 248 236
4 284 272 294 282
5 330 318 340 328
6 376 364 386 374
File: CD3002_E XI • 7 01/2010/e

"A09" DC COILS FOR CDC.3...
VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C DEUTSCH COIL +
AMP JUNIOR BIDIR. DIODE
(CX)
(AJ) DT04 - 2P
12V 123°C 27 5.3
24V 123°C 27 21.3
48V* 123°C 27 85.3
102V* 123°C 27 392
110V* 123°C 27 448
205V* 123°C 27 1577
* SPECIAL VOLTAGES
ETA09 - 04/2001/e
ES MANUAL P2(*) ROTARY R5(*) ROTARY FLYING LEADS (FL)

(*) P2 and R5 Emergency tightening torque max. 6÷9 Nm / 0.6 ÷ 0.9 Kgm with CH n. 22
"D15" DC COILS FOR CD.3...

Supply tolerance ±10% available in 12V or 24V DC voltage
Ambient temperature -54°C ÷ 60°C only.
Duty cycle 100% ED • The pastic type coil (RS variant)
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C PLASTIC COIL ES MANUAL
(RS) EMERGENCY
12V 110°C 30 4.8
24V 110°C 30 18.8
28V* 110°C 30 25.6
48V* 110°C 30 75.2
68,65
56,6
102V* 110°C 30 340

110V* 110°C 30 387
205V* 110°C 30 1375
11 (*) SPECIAL VOLTAGES

ETD15 - 04/2001/e
57,9
FLYING LEADS AMP JUNIOR (AJ) DEUTSCH P2 ROTARY R5 ROTARY

DT04 - 2P
File: TCA09D15_E XI • 8 09/2010/e

"LF" VARIANT - EMERGENCY CONTROL LEVER FOR
STACKABLE VALVES (CDC/CD3)
SETTORE
The emergency control lever for solenoid valves by Aron, represents a MOBILE
develop in terms of safety and flexibility among applied hydraulic components.
Thanks to his flexibility, the component was designed to be inserted between the valve
body and the spool, providing total interchangeability between the different types of solenoid
body valves manufactured by Aron. It is compatible with the standard CETOP 3 and stackable
valves with threaded connections –G3/8" or 9/16-18UNF (SAE 6). The component is available
for both directional control and proportional valves (for the last type of control please consult
our Technical Department)
As an emergency lever applied to solenoid valves, the control can be used as a safety
device in conformity with the industry standards , also playing an useful role in the event of
power cuts. The control can be used in agricultural and mobile fields; the manual action can
be used to carry out periodic maintenance work on mobile components of the vehicle , in
perfectly safe working conditions.
Max operating pressure port T:

dynamic 160 bar
static 210 bar HYDRAULIC SIMBOL
Max operating pressure port P
for series connection configuration 160 bar
• MOUNTING TYPE: C / F / H
• SPOOLS TYPE: 01/02/03*/04/16/17/66
* The spool 03 is allowed only on CD3. Not permitted with CDC3
CODE VALVE DESCRIPTION COIL VOLTAGE
CDC.3... Stackable valve A09 27 W
CD.3... Stackable valve D15 30 W
OVERALL DIMENSION
CDC.3...
VERSION
CD.3...
VERSION
11
Support plane
specifications
File: TLFCDC3_E XI • 9 01/2010/e

STUDS AND FIXING FEET FOR MOUNTING
SETTORE
MOBILE
CDC3... CD3... WITH D15 COIL

WITH A09 COIL CX3... CXQ3... WITH D15P COIL
MOUNTING KIT, N° 4 RODS AND N° 8 STUD NUTS

CODE COMPOSITION LENGTH (mm)
V89B50012 no. 2 elements with FE.02 or FE and FU 1170
V89B50022 no. 2 elements with FE.10 and FU 180
V89B50032 no. 2 elements with FE10P and FU 190
FIXING FEET KIT
CODE COMPOSITION
V89980000 all n. 2 fixing feet
11
File: FI3002_E XI • 10 01/2010/e

CX.3.A... / CX.3.C... SOLENOID OPERATING
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVES SETTORE
CX.3.A../CX.3.C.. series valves are used for controlling fluid direction and flow MOBILE
rate as a function of the supply current to the proportional control solenoid.
The individual valve is available in
two different sizes: G3/8" or 9/16-
18UNF.
The body valve is white zinc plated.
CX.3.A.01.N... CX.3.A.03.N...
Note - All the variants are
considered without Hirschmann
connector. The connectors must
be order separately. See Ch. XI CX.3.C.01.N... CX.3.C.03.N...
Page 25.
CX.3...
INDIVIDUAL VALVE CH. XI PAGE 12
STACKABLE VALVES CH. XI PAGE 13
"D15P" PROPORT. SOLENOIDS CH. XI PAGE 13 Max. operating pressure ports P/A/B 250 bar
SCREWS AND STUDS CH. XI PAGE 10 Max. operating pressure ports T - for dynamic pressure see note (*) 250 bar
Regulated flow rate 3 / 10 / 15 / 20 l/min
REM.S.RA... CH. IX PAGE 4 Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED
REM.D.RA... CH. IX PAGE 7 Type of protection IP 65
CEP.S... CH. IX PAGE 2 Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
STANDRAD CONNECTORS CH. XI PAGE 25 Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
Weight CX.3.A... (single solenoid) 1,389 Kg
Weight CX.3.C... (double solenoid) 1,778 Kg
ORDERING CODE Max. current 2.35A 1.76 A 0.88 A

CX Proportional (*) Pressure dynamic allowed for 2 millions of cycles.
control stackable valve
• Operating specifications are valid for fluid with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using the
3 Size specified ARON electronic control units.
C = Double solenoid ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
REM.S.RA.*.*. and REM.D.RA.*.*.
* Body type: Card type control for single and double solenoid
A = Ports G3/8" parallel
CEP.S...
B = Ports 9/16 - 18UNF parallel Electronic amplifier plug version
G = Presetting for modular valves (parallel)
L = Ports G3/8" parallel (LS version)
** Type of spool
01 = 03 = DIAGRAMS
INPUT SIGNAL POWER LIMITS TRANSMITTED
N Symmetrical flow path control CX.3.*.01.N4 (Δp 100 bar) CX.3.*.01.N4
(see symbols table)
Q (l/min)
* Flow rating l/min

P (bar)
1 = 3 l/min
2 = 10 l/min
3 = 15 l/min
4 = 20 l/min
* Max. current at solenoid:

11
E = 2.35 A - Special coil I (%) Q (l/min)
F = 1.76 A
G = 0.88 A
** S1 = No variant The tests have been carried out at with a fluid of a 40°C.
SV = Viton
ES = Emergency button
R5 = Rotary emergency 180°
2 Serial No.
File: CX3002_E XI • 11 01/2010/e

CX.3... SOLENOID OPERATING PROPORTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVES
SETTORE
MOBILE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Only for LS versions

O-Ring 2-008
56
A B
LS LS
P P
T T
ES MANUAL P2 ROTARY R5 ROTARY

EMERGENCY EMERGENCY EMERGENCY 180°
11
File: CX3002_E XI • 12 01/2010/e

CX.3... SOLENOID OPERATING PROPORTIONAL CONTROL STACKABLE VALVES
SETTORE
MOBILE
PARALLEL CONNECTION
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

LENGTH LENGTH
2 192 180 202 190
3 238 226 248 236
4 284 272 294 282
5 330 318 340 328
6 376 364 386 374
11

Duty cycle 100% ED
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: CX3002_E XI • 13 01/2010/e

CXQ.3... OPEN LOOP PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED STACKABLE FLOW REGULATORS SETTORE
The open loop proportional flow regulator 3 way compensated with priority MOBILE
function is designed to regulate flow in proportion to an applied electrical current
(REM or CEP.S power amplifier).
Flow regulation is independent both from load – POUT port – and pump flow variations. Load
compensation is achieved by a spool compensator, which holds the pressure drop constant
across the proportional spool.
Operating specifications and overall size make
this valve suitable to interlock to module units
and stackable valves in order to combine a
DIAGRAMS
proportional control with directional control typi-
cal of stackable systems. INPUT SIGNAL
The body valve is white zinc plated. FLOW
Note - All the variants are considered without
Hirschmann connectors. The connectors must
be order separately. See Ch. XI Page 25.
Q (l/min)
CXQ.3...
HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS
"D15P" PROPORT. SOLENOIDS CH. XI PAGE 15
REM.S.RA... CH. IX PAG. 4 SIMPLIFIED
CEP.S... CH. IX PAG. 2
STUDS FOR MOUNTING CH. XI PAGE 10
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. XI PAGE 25
I (%)
FLOW RATE BACK PRESSURE
ORDERING CODE 3 WAY WITH SECONDARY LINE ON PRIORITY LINE
CXQ.3.C.T...
CXQ Open loop 3 way
proportional compensated P OUT T
flow regulator for module units
Q (l/min)
and stackable valves
3 Size
C 3 way compensation
* P = 3 way priority function version P IN T P (bar)

T = 3 way version 3 WAY WITH PRIORITY FUNCTION
(with secondary line) CXQ.3.C.P... FLOW RATE BACK PRESSURE
ON SECONDARY LINE
* Nominal flow rates P OUT T
H = 15 l/min
I = 25 l/min
Q (l/min)
D with decompression
E
* Max. current at solenoid
E = 2.35 A - Special coil
F = 1.76 A P IN T
= Blind
G = 0.88 A
P (bar)
** S1 = No variant ΔP - PUMP FLOW
11 (Without connectors)
L7 = emergency lever
P2 = Rotary emergency CXQ.3.C.T...
PIN → T
CXQ.3.C.P...
R5 = Rotary emergency 180°
2 Serial No.
Δp (bar)
Δp (bar)
The fluid used is a mineral based oil with a

viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40°C. The tests have
been carried out at with a fluid of a 40°C. Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
File: CXQ3002_E XI • 14 01/2010/e

CXQ.3... OPEN LOOP PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE
COMPENSATED STACKABLE FLOW REGULATORS SETTORE
MOBILE
OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS AMPLIFIER UNIT AND CONTROL
Max. operating pressure ports Pin / Pout / E / T 250 bar REM.S.RA.*.*...
Regulated flow rate 15 / 25 l/min electronic card for control single proportional
Decompression drain flow max 0,7 l/min solenoid valve
Relative duty cycle Continuous 100% ED
Type of protection (in relation to the connector used) IP 66 CEP.S...
Flow rate gain See diagram "Input signal flow" Electronic amplifier plug version
Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s • Operating specifications are valid for
Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C fluid with 46 mm2/s viscosity at 40°C, using
Ambient temperature -20°C ÷ 70°C the specified ARON electronic control units.
Weight CXQ.3.C.P... version Kg 2,25
Weight CXQ.3.C.T... version Kg 1,75
Max. current at solenoid 2.35A 1.76 A 0.88 A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS CXQ.3.C.T... OVERALL DIMENSIONS CXQ.3.C.P...
L7 LEVER P2 ROTARY R5 ROTARY

EMERGENCY EMERGENCY EMERGENCY 180°
12
123
82
Ø 40
22,5
70,5
124,5
11

Duty cycle 100% ED
ETD15P - 01/2002/e
File: CXQ3002_E XI • 15 01/2010/e

CM.3.P... MODULAR PILOT OPERATED
CHECK STACKABLE VALVES SETTORE
CM.3.P type modular check stackable MOBILE
valves allow one way free flow by
raising a conical shutter, while in the Max. operating pressure 350 bar
opposite direction the fluid can return Minimum opening pressure spring 1 1 bar
by means of a small piston piloted by Minimum opening pressure spring 5 5 bar
the pressure in the other line. Piloting ratio: 1:4
Max. flow 40 l/min
They are available on single A or B Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
lines, and on double A and B lines Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s a 50°C
(see hydraulic symbols). Fluid temperature -20°C ÷ 75°C
The body valve is white zinc plated. with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
CM.3.P...
Weight 1,25 Kg
ORDERING CODE
CM Modular stackable valve PRESSURE DROPS HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

25
3 Size
20
CM.3.P.A
P Piloted check valve 3
15
P(bar)
* Port sizes:
1 = G3/8" 10 2
1
2 = 9/16-18UNF
5
** Control on lines A / B / AB CM.3.P.B

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
* Minimum opening pressure Q (l/min)
1 = 1 bar
Curves: 1 = Piloted side flow
5 = 5 bar 2 = 1 bar
3 = 5 bar
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton CM.3.P.AB
1 Serial No.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING
11

File: CM3P001_E XI • 16 02/2010/e

CM.3.M... MODULAR MAX. PRESSURE
STACKABLE VALVES SETTORE
CM.3.M type pressure relief valves MOBILE
are available with a pressure range of
1 ÷ 320 bar. Max. operating pressure 320 bar
Adjustment is by means of a grub Setting ranges:
screw. spring 0 max. 15 bar
Single on A or B lines, and double on spring 3 max. 150 bar
AB lines versions are available, with spring 3 max. 320 bar
drainage to T. Max. flow 40 l/min
All versions can accept three types of Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
springs with calibrated ranges as Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
shown in the specifications. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
CM.3.M... Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
CMP.10... BFP CARTRIDGE CATALOGUE The cartridge, which is the same for all Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
versions, is the direct acting type with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
CMP10. Weight CM.3.M.A/B... 1,66 Kg
The body valve is white zinc plated. Weight CM.3.M.AB... 1,68 Kg
spring, see minimum pressure set-
ting curve.
ORDERING CODE PRESSURE - FLOW RATE HYDRAULIC SYMBOLS

360
3
CM Modular stackable valve 320
280
3 Size 240
P(bar)
200
M Maximum pressure valve 160 2
120
* Port sizes:
80
1 = G3/8" 1 CM.3.M.A
40
2 = 9/16-18UNF 0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Q (l/min)
** Adjustment on the lines:
A / B / AB
MINIMUM SETTING
PRESSURE
Grub screw
100
* Setting ranges at port A 3

80
0 = max. 15 bar (neutral spring)
CM.3.M.B
60
P(bar)

40
2
* Setting ranges at port B 1
20
as that at port A) 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
0 = max.15 bar (neutral spring) Q (l/min)
2 = max. 150 bar (yellow spring) Curves n° 1 - 2 - 3 = setting ranges
CM.3.M.AB
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
11
2 Serial No.
File: CM3M002_E XI • 17 03/2010/e

CM.3.M... MODULAR MAX. PRESSURE STACKABLE VALVES
SETTORE
MOBILE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS

MOUNTING
11
File: CM3M002_E XI • 18 03/2010/e

FE02.3... INLET MODULE UNITS
WITH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (UP TO 15 l/min) SETTORE
Module units FE10.3... provide pres- MOBILE
sure relief valve with adjustable pres-
sure setting ranges. Max. operating pressure 250 bar
Manual adjustment is available by a Setting ranges: spring 1 30 bar
grub screw. Maximum flow is 15 l/min. spring 2 90 bar
spring 3 180 bar
The threaded ports (P and T) are spring 4 250 bar
available in two different sizes: G3/8" Max. flow 15 l/min
FE02.3... or 9/16-18UNF. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
Weight 0,6 Kg
ORDERING CODE
FE02 Inlet module unit (up to 15 l/min)
with pressure relief valve PRESSURE - FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
3 Size 4
4
* Port sizes: 3
1 = G3/8" 1
2
2 = 9/16-18UNF
P (bar)
P (bar)
2
1
C Adjustment:
Grub screw
* Setting ranges Q (l/min) Q (l/min)

** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
11
File: FE023002_E XI • 19 01/2010/e

FE10.3... INLET MODULE UNITS
Module units FE10.3... provide pres- MOBILE
sure setting ranges.
Manual adjustment is available by a Setting ranges: spring 1 max. 50 bar
grub screw or plastic knob. Maximum spring 2 max. 150 bar
flow is 30 l/min. spring 3 max. 320 bar
Max. flow 40 l/min
The threaded ports (P and T) are
FE10.3... available in two different sizes: G3/8"
or 9/16-18UNF.
Weight 0,4 Kg
ORDERING CODE
FE10 Inlet module unit (up to 40 l/min)
with pressure relief valve PRESSURE - FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESSURE
3
3 Size 3
* Port sizes:
1 = G3/8"
P (bar)
2 = 9/16-18UNF
P (bar)
2
2
1
* Adjustment: 1
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
* Setting ranges
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
11
Type of adjustment
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
File: FE103002_E XI • 20 01/2010/e

FE10LS.3... INLET LS LINE MODULE UNITS WITH
Module units FE10LS.3... provide pres- MOBILE
sure setting ranges. Max. operating pressure 320 bar
Setting ranges: spring 1 max. 50 bar
Manual adjustment is available by a
grub screw or plastic knob. Maximum
flow is 30 l/min.
Max. flow 40 l/min
Available with threaded ports (P and Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
FE10LS.3... T) sizes G3/8" and LS size G1/4". Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
Weight 0,4 Kg
ORDERING CODE
FE10LS Inlet module unit (up to 40 l/min)

with pressure relief valve and LS line OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND HYDRAULIC SYMBOL
3 Size
70 58 max.
* Port sizes:
26,5 11,5
1 = G3/8"
* Adjustment:
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw C
70
43
29
* Setting ranges
14
11

N°4 Ø 6,5
10,5 49
** 00 = No variant 5,5 59
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
M
40

28
20 62,5 max.
35
N°2 OR 2037/2-012 90Sh
P (bar)
2
14
1
29
Q (l/min)
11
11,5
3 OR 2018/2-008
P
P (bar)
1 Type of adjustment
T
M = Plastic knob
C = Grub screw
Q (l/min)
File: FE10LS3002_E XI • 21 01/2010/i

FE10.P... INLET MODULE UNITS WITH PRESSURE RELIEF
VALVE AND ELECTRICAL VENTING VALVE (UP TO 30 l/min) SETTORE
Module units FE10.3... provide a
MOBILE
pressure relief valve with adjustable
pressure setting ranges and an
electrical venting valve.
Max. flow 30 l/min
The pressure relief valve's manual Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
adjustment is available by a grub screw Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
or plastic knob. Maximum flow is Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
30l/min. Ambient temperature -25°C ÷ 60°C
FE10.P... Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
The threaded ports (P and T) are with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75
STANDARD CONNECTORS CH. XI PAGE 25 available in two different sizes: G3/8" Weight 1,1 Kg
or 9/16-18UNF.
Setting ranges for pressure relief valve:
Note - All the variants are spring 1 max. 50 bar
considered without Hirschmann spring 2 max. 150 bar
connector. The connectors must spring 3 max. 320 bar
ORDERING CODE be order separately. See Ch. XI
Features for electrical venting valve:
Page 25.
FE10 Inlet module unit (up to 30 l/min) Max. excitation frequency 2 Hz
Duty cycle 100% ED
with pressure relief valve
Type of protection (connector used depending) IP65
P Electric venting valve

DIAGRAMS FOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
3 Size
PRESSURE - FLOW RATE MINIMUM SETTING PRESS.
* Port sizes: 3
1 = G3/8" 3
2 = 9/16-18UNF
* Adjustment:
P (bar)
P (bar)
M = Plastic knob 2
2
C = Grub screw
1
1
* Setting ranges
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
* Voltage for the electric DIAGRAMS FOR

venting valve (Tab. 1) TAB.1 - 18W (22W) COIL
ELECTRICAL VENTING VALVE
DC VOLTAGE
** S1 = No variant L 12V PRESSURE DROPS
115Vac/50Hz
SV = Viton M 24V 120Vac/60Hz
AJ = AMP Junionr connection N 48V with rectifier
CZ = Coil with Deutsch DT04-2P 2 21.6V RAC

Z 102V RAC 230Vac/50Hz
240Vac/60Hz
X 205V RAC with rectifier
2 Serial No. W Without coils
Δp (bar)
38
26,5
Q (l/min)
11
60
54
C
43
LIMITS OF USE
N°4
Ø 6,5
14
11
49
18W - 67 59
22W - 59 70
= 58 max.
=
P (bar)
M The tests were carried out with

the solenoids at operating
57
temperature, with a supply

voltage 10% below nominal
Type of adjustment value and with a 40°C fluid
62,5 max. temperature. The fluid used is
M = Plastic knob a mineral oil with a viscosity of Q (l/min)
C = Grub screw
46 mm2/s at 40°C.
File: FE10P3002_E XI • 22 01/2010/e

FE.3... INLET MODULE UNITS
NO PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SETTORE
Module units FE.3... no pressure MOBILE
relief valve.
The threaded ports (P and T) are Max. operating pressure 250 bar
available in two different sizes: G3/8“ Max. flow 40 l/min
or 9/16-18UNF. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
FE.3... Max. contamination level class 10 in accordance
Weight 0,3 Kg
ORDERING CODE
FE Inlet module unit
no pressure relief valve
3 Size
* Port sizes:
1 = G3/8"
2 = 9/16-18UNF
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
2 Serial No.
FELS.3... INLET MODULE UNITS WITH LS LINE

SETTORE
NO PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
MOBILE
70
35
Module units FE.3... no pressure relief valve.

Available with threaded ports (P and T) sizes
G3/8" and LS size G1/4".
70
43
FELS.3...
32

Max. flow 40 l/min
14
11
Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN

49
51524 59
N°4 Ø 6,5
CODICE DI ORDINAZIONE Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s

FELS Inlet module unit
11
no pressure relief valve with Max. contamination level class 10 in
40
LS line accordance with NAS 1638 with filter ß25≥75

28
Weight 0,3 Kg
3 Size 35
* Port sizes:
14
1 = G3/8" P
OR 2037/2-012
29
90Sh
** 00 = No variant
V1 = Viton
11,5
T
2 Serial No. OR 2018/2-008
File: F$3002_E XI • 23 01/2010/e

FU.3... OUTLET MODULE UNITS
SETTORE
MOBILE
The threaded port (T) is available in Max. operating pressure 250 bar
two different sizes: G3/8" or 9/16- Max. flow 40 l/min
18UNF. Hydraulic fluids Mineral oils DIN 51524
Outlet modules without ports and for Fluid viscosity 10 ÷ 500 mm2/s
parallel style only are availble. Fluid temperature -25°C ÷ 75°C
Weight 0,2 Kg
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
OREDERING CODE
FU.3.*...VERSION FU.3... VERSION
FU Otulet module unit
3 Size
* Port size:
1 = G3/8"
2 = 9/16-18UNF
For outlet module without
ports is not required
(only for parallel style)
00 No variant
2 Serial No.
11
File: F$3002_E XI • 24 01/2010/e

CONNECTORS
SETTORE
MOBILE
CONNECTORS FOR CONTROL VALVES IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIN 43650 / ISO 4400
Protection Cable
Connector Type Code
4.5 28.5 29.5 level gland
Black color PG09 V86 05 0002
M3
Grey color PG09 V86 05 0004

Standard IP65
Black color PG11 V86 05 0006
42
Grey color PG11 V86 05 0008

12 VAC/VDC PG09 V86 10 0018
24 VAC/VDC PG09 V86 10 0012
Ø 6÷8 mm (PG09) Lens cover with pilot light (*) IP65
Ø 8÷10 mm (PG11) 115 VAC/VDC PG09 V86 10 0020
230 VAC/VDC PG09 V86 10 0022
Screw tightening torque: 60Ncm
Protection Cable
Connector Type Code
4.5 34.5 29.5 level gland
With rectifier (*) Black color PG09 V86 20 0002
M3
Inlet voltage 12÷230 VAC IP65

Outlet voltage 9÷205 VDC Grey color PG09 V86 20 0004
42
12 VAC PG09 V86 25 0018

Lens cover with pilot light 24 VAC PG09 V86 25 0019
and rectifier (*)
IP65 48 VAC PG09 V86 25 0020
Inlet voltage 12÷230 VAC
Ø 6÷8 mm (PG09) Outlet voltage 9÷205 VDC 115 VAC PG09 V86 25 0021
230 VAC PG09 V86 25 0022
4.5 32 29.5 Protection Cable

Connector Type Code
level gland
M3
Black color — V86 28 0001

With protection level IP67 IP67
Grey color — V86 28 0002
62
Ø 4÷7 mm
(*) Don’t use for proportional versions
ELECTRICAL FEATURES OF CONNECTORS
Ø 6÷8 mm (PG09)
Ø 8÷10 mm (PG11) Description IP65 IP67
AC rated voltage Max. 250 V Max. 250 V
IP65
DC rated voltage
Pin conctat rated flow
Pin conctat max. flow
Max. 300 V
10A
16A
Max. 300 V
10A
16A
11
Cable gland
Seal
Max. section cable 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm²
Cable gland PG09 - M16x1,5 Ø cable 6 ÷ 8 mm Ø cable 4 ÷ 7 mm
Cable gland PG11 - G 1/2” - M20x1,5 Ø cable 8 ÷ 10 mm —
Seal
Guarnizione 19 Ø 4÷7 mm Protection level IP65 EN60529 IP67 EN60529
Insulation class VDE 0110-1/89 VDE 0110-1/89
Operating temperature -40°C ÷ 90 C° -20°C ÷ 80 C°
IP67 The degrees of protection indicate is guaranteed only if the connectors were properly mounted with his original seals.
Cable gland
Seal
File: F$3002_E XI • 25 01/2010/e

SETTORE
MOBILE
11
File: F$3002_E XI • 26 01/2010/e

TECHNICAL STANDARD COILS
CATALOGUE
ARON 2010 DC AND AC STANDARD COILS
ABBREVIATIONS "UL RECOGNIZED" TYPE COILS
C STROKE (MM)
CH ACROSS FLATS
F FORCE (N)
NG KNOB TURNS
OR SEAL RING A09 DC COIL
P LOAD PRESSURE (BAR) CH. XII PAGE 2
PARBAK PARBAK RING 20W DC COIL (OFF-HIGHWAY MACHINERY)
PL PARALLEL CONNECTION CH. XII PAGE 3
PR REDUCED PRESSURE (BAR) D15 DC COIL
Q FLOW (L/MIN) CH. XII PAGE 4
QP PUMP FLOW (L/MIN) PLASTIC TYPE D15 DC COIL (BR VARIANT)
SE ELASTIC PIN CH. XII PAGE 5
SF BALL 40W COIL
SR SERIES CONNECTION CH. XII PAGE 5
X PILOTING B14 AC SOLENOID
Y DRAINAGE CH. XII PAGE 6
Incorrect use of the products described in this A16 DC COIL
catalogue may cause harm to personnel and CH. XII PAGE 7
for each product in this catalogue may be D19 DC SOLENOID
subject to variation, and the manufacturer CH. XII PAGE 8
reserves the right to make constructional K16 AC SOLENOID
product presented, its data, features and CH. XII PAGE 9
technical specifications must therefore be 22W DC COIL (FOR CARTRIDGE VALVE)
examined and checked by members of the CH. XII PAGE 10
knowledge) taking into consideration the 30W DC COIL (FOR CARTRIDGE VALVES)
intended use of product. CH. XII PAGE 11
The user must, in particular, assess the "UL RECOGNIZED" COILS
operating conditions of each product in relation CH. XII PAGE 12
Plant 12
Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
File: 12TA_E XII • 1 01/2009/e

A09 DC COILS
Type of protection
(in relation to connector used) IP 65
Number of cycle 18.000/h AD.2.E CH. I PAGE 4
Supply tolerance ±10% ADC.3... CH. I PAGE 5
Ambient temperature -30°C ÷ 60°C CDL.04... CH. I PAGE 61
Duty cycle 100% ED
C3V.03... BFP CARTRIDGE CAT.
Weight 0,215 Kg CDC.3... CH. V PAGE 2
VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C DEUTSCH COIL +
AMP JUNIOR BIDIR. DIODE
(CX)
(AJ) DT04 - 2P
12V 123°C 27 5.3
24V 123°C 27 21.3
48V* 123°C 27 85.3
102V* 123°C 27 392
110V* 123°C 27 448
205V* 123°C 27 1577
* SPECIAL VOLTAGES
ETA09 - 04/2001/e
E1 MANUAL P1(*) ROTARY P5(*) ROTARY FLYING LEADS (FL)

SPARE PARTS
A09 DC - 27W COIL CONNECTIONS
HIRSCHMANN AMP FLYING LEADS FLYING LEADS DEUTSCH +
VOLTAGE (STANDARD) JUNIOR + DIODE (130) (250) BIDIR. DIODE
(00) (AJ) (LD) (FL) (CX)
12 V (L) M14310001 M14320001 M14330001 M14070011 M14340001
24 V (M) M14310002 M14320002 M14330002 M14070012 _
48V* (N) M14310003
102V* (Z) M14310008
110V* (P) M14310005
205V* (X) M14310009
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES ETA09-CODE - 00/2007/e
COMPLETE KIT AD2E CDL04 ADC3 CDC3
E = SEE A09 COIL TABLE COMPLETE SOLENOID'S TUBE V85990008 V85990007

A / B / C / D / F / G = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE CODES TABLE)
P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY V89990016 V89990017
P5 ROTARY EMERGENCY 180° - V15050098
E1 MANUAL EMERGENCY M19050003
CODE A B C D E F G MOUNTING
12 SPARE PARTS
O RING RING NUT COIL TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD
M74490001
AVAILABLE
C-E-F
AD2E M37050036 M74490002 G-H-I-L
Q25831023 Q25830096 M83060003 M74490003 D-M
SEE TABLE
Q25860013
A09
CDL04 M74490004 -
M74460001 C-E-F
ADC3 / CDC3 Q25830024 Q25860023 M37050031 M83060004 M74460002 G-H
C3V03 Q25861025 Q25860024 M83060002 M74480001 -
File: TCOILCODE_E XII • 2 07/2010/e

"20W" DC COILS FOR OFF-HIGHWAY MACHINERY
Type of protection MOUNTING COMPATIBILITY

CRD.03... CH. V PAGE 34
Supply tolerance ±10% C3V.05... CH. V PAGE 42
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,212 Kg

12V - 20 7.2
ET20W - 01/2004/e
AMP JUNIOR DEUTSCH + DIODE BIDIR.

DT04 - 2P
SPARE PARTS
20W DC COIL CONNECTIONS
AMP DEUTSCH +
VOLTAGE JUNIOR BIDIR. DIODE
(A) (D)
12V (L) M14321001 M14341001
ET20W-CODE - 00/2007/e
E = SEE 20W COIL TABLE

12
CODE A B C D E F G
SPARE PARTS O RING RING NUT COIL TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD
CRD03 M37050031 M83060007 M74480003

20W
SEE
Q25861010 Q25860023 Q25830022

C3V05 M37050036 M83060006 M74480002

"D15" DC COILS FOR CETOP 3
(in relation to the connector used) IP 66 CETOP 3 CH. I PAGE 8
Number of cycles 18.000/h AD3.E... CH. I PAGE 11
AD3.V... CH. I PAGE 13
Duty cycle 100% ED ADL.06... CH. I PAGE 64
Insulation class wire H A.66... CH. IV PAGE 19
Weight 0,354 Kg CD.3... CH. XI PAGE 5
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C PLASTIC COIL E1 MANUAL
(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (W) (OHM) ±10% (BR) EMERGENCY
12V 110°C 30 4.8
24V 110°C 30 18.8
28V* 110°C 30 25.6
68,65
48V* 110°C 30 75.2
56,6
102V* 110°C 30 340
110V* 110°C 30 387
205V* 110°C 30 1375
57,9
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGES
ETD15 - 04/2001/e SEE THE FOLLOWING PAGE
FLYING LEADS AMP JUNIOR (AJ) DEUTSCH P1 ROTARY P5 ROTARY

DT04 - 2P
SPARE PARTS
D15 DC - 30W COIL CONNECTIONS
HIRSCHMANN AMP AMP JUNIOR FLYING LEADS
DEUTSCH
VOLTAGE (STANDARD) JUNIOR + DIODE (175)
(00) (AJ) (AD) (SL) (CZ)
12V (L) M14450002 M14460002 M14470002 M14480002 M14490002
24V (M) M14450004 M14460004 M14470004 M14480004 -
28V* (V) M14450005
48V* (N) M14450006
102V* (Z) M14450018
110V* (P) M14450008
205V* (X) M14450019
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES ETD15-CODE - 00/2007/e
COMPLETE AD3E CD3 ADL06 AD3V A66
KIT
E = SEE D15 COIL TABLE
A / B / C / D / F / G = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE CODES TABLE) COMPLETE V85990003
SOLENOID'S TUBE
P1 ROTARY V89990010 -
EMERGENCY
P5 ROTARY V15050097 -
EMERGENCY 180°
E1 MANUAL M19050004
12
EMERGENCY
SPARE PARTS
O RING RING NUT COIL TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD AVAILABLE
AD3E M74470001 C-E-F-M

SEE TABLE
CD3
M74470002 G-H-I-L
D15
AD3V Q25830024 Q25860033 Q25830185 M37050030 M83130001

ADL06 M74470003 D
A66 M74470004 -

PLASTIC COIL (BR VARIANT FOR "D15" COIL)
Type of protection (in relation to the connector) IP 66 MOUNTING COMPATIBILITY
Supply tolerance ±10% CETOP 3 CH. I PAGE 8
Ambient temperature -54°C ÷ 60°C AD3.E... CH. I PAGE 11
Duty cycle 100% ED ADL.06... CH. I PAGE 64
Weight 0,2 Kg

12V 110°C 30 4.8
24V 110°C 30 18.8
28V * 110°C 30 25.6
110V * 110°C 30 387
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGES ETD15BR - 00/2006/e
SPARE PARTS
CODE SPARE PARTS PLASTIC COIL
D15 PLASTIC COIL (DC / 30W) FOR BR VARIANT
B/C/D/E/F/G
HIRSCHMANN
(BR VARIANT)
VOLTAGE B O RING (TUBE) Q25830024
(STANDARD)
C RING NUT M37050030
12V (L) M14630002
D O RING (RING NUT) Q25830185
68,65
56,6
24V (M) M14630004
E O RING (COIL) Q25830028
28V* (V) M14630005 F TUBE M83130001
G HEX. PUSCH ROD 57,9
110V* (P) M14630008
(MOUNTING C-E-F) M74470001
(MOUNTING G-H-I) M74470002
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES • SEE BELOW FOR EXPLODED VIEW DRAWING
ETD15BR-CODE - 00/2007/e (MOUNTING D) M74470003
• SEE "D15" COIL STANDARD FOR BOTH EMERGENCY
MANUAL E1 AND ROTARY P1.
"40W" DC COIL (FOR CDL.06...)

Type of protection (in relation to the connector) IP 66
Number of cycles 18.000/h MOUNTING COMPATIBILITY
Supply tolerance ±10% CDL.06... CH. I PAGE 63
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,354 Kg
E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
12V 135°C 40 3.6
24V 135°C 40 14.4
ET40W - 00/2004/e
DEUTSCH
(CZ)
DT04 - 2P
COMPLETE CDL06
KIT
P1 ROTARY
SPARE PARTS EMERGENCY V89990010
E1 MANUAL
EMERGENCY M19050004
40W DC COIL CONNECTIONS CODE SPARE PARTS

B/C/D/E/F/G FOR CDL06
VOLTAGE
12V (L)
HIRSCHMANN
(STANDARD)
M14600001
B O RING (TUBE)
C RING NUT
Q25830024
M37050030
12
24V (M) M14600002 D O RING (RING NUT ) Q25830185
DEUTSCH E O RING (COIL) Q25860033

(CZ) F TUBE M83130001
12V (L) M14610001 G HEX. PUSCH ROD M74470003
A = SEE 40W COIL TABLE
B/C/D/E/F/G = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE TABLE) 24V (M) M14610002 ET40W-CODE - 00/2007/e

"B14" AC SOLENOIDS FOR CETOP 3
(in relation to the connector used) IP 65 CETOP 3 * CH. I PAGE 8
AD3.E... * CH. I PAGE 11
Ambient temperature -30°C ÷ 60°C (*) serial No. 3 (AC voltage)
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,436 Kg
E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
81,1
80,8
85,5 112
Voltage Max. winding temperature Resistance at 20°C

(V) (Ambient temperature 25°C) (OHM) ±10%
24V/50Hz - 24V/60Hz 100°C - 96°C 1.7

48V/50Hz - 48V/60Hz — —
115V/50Hz - 120V/60Hz 133°C - 101C° 32.5
230V/50Hz - 240V/60Hz 120°C - 103C° 134
SPARE PARTS
B B14 AC COIL CONNECTION
A VOLTAGE
HIRSCHMANN
(STANDARD)
24V/50-60HZ (A) M14640003
48V/50-60HZ (B) M14640007
F
C 115V/50HZ
120V/60HZ (J) M14640006
E
230V/50HZ
240V/60HZ (Y) M14640001
COMPLETE KIT CODE

D TUBE KIT V85990011
B = SEE B14 COIL TABLE
A / C / D / E / F = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE CODES TABLE) ROTARY EMERGENCY P1 V89990021
MANUAL EMERGENCY E1 M19050001
12
CODE A B C D E F M OUNTING
SPARE PARTS O RING C OIL O RING RING NUT TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD A VAILABLE
AD3E* Q25830024 Q25860036 M37050041 M831100001 M74520001 C-E-F-M

B14
SEE
M74520002 G-H-I-L
M74520003 D
(*) serial No. 3 (AC voltage)

"A16" DC COILS FOR CETOP 5
CETOP 5 CH. I PAGE 28
Supply tolerance ±10% AD5.E... CH. I PAGE 31
Ambient temperature -30°C ÷ 60°C CDL.10... CH. I PAGE 65
Duty cycle 100% ED ADL.10.6... CH. I PAGE 66
A.88... CH. IV PAGE 33
Weight 0,9 Kg

12V 106°C 45 3.2
24V 113°C 45 12,4
48V* - 45 -
102V* - 45 -
110V* 118°C 45 268
205V* - 45 -
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGE ETA16 - 03/2002/e
E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
SPARE PARTS
A16 DC/45W COIL CONNECTION
HIRSCHMANN
VOLTAGE (STANDARD)
12V (L) M14220002
24V (M) M14220004
48V* (N) M14220006
102V* (Z) M14220013
110V* (P) M14220008
205V* (X) M14220014
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES
E = SEE A16 COIL TABLE ETA16-CODE - 00/2007/e

COMPLETE KIT AD5E CDL10 ADL10 A88
P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY V89990011 -
E1 MANUAL EMERGENCY M19050002 -
12
SPARE PARTS O RING RING NUT COIL TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD AVAILABLE
M74440002 C-E-F-M
AD5E M74440003 G-H-I-L
A16
SEE
ADL/CDL10 Q25830026 Q25860040 Q25860040 M37050033 M83160001

M74440004 D
A88 M74440006 -

"D19" DC SOLENOIDS

(in relation to the connector used) IP 66 ADP.5.E... CH. I PAGE 36
Supply tolerance ±10% ADP.5.V... CH. I PAGE 39
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 1,63 Kg

12V 105°C 42 3.43

24V 105°C 42 13.71
48V* 105°C 42 55
102V* 105°C 42 248
110V* 105°C 42 288
205V* 105°C 42 1000
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGE ETD19 - 03/2000/e
P1 ROTARY
EMERGENCY
SPARE PARTS
D19 DC/42W COIL CONNECTION
HIRSCHMANN
VOLTAGE (STANDARD)
12V (L) M14270001
24V (M) M14270002
48V* (N) M14270003
102V* (Z) M14270007
110V* (P) M14270005
205V* (X) M14270008
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES ETD19-CODE - 00/2007/e
A = SEE D19 COIL TABLE
B / C / D / E / F / G = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE CODES TABLE)
CODE SPARE PARTS ADP5E
12
FOR
B/C/D/E/F/G AND ADP5V
COMPLETE ADP5E ADP5V B O RING (TUBE) Q25830101
KIT
C RING NUT M37050022
P1 ROTARY
D O RING (RING NUT) Q25830035
EMERGENCY V89990012
E O RING (COIL) Q25860035
F TUBE M83170002
G HEX. PUSCH ROD M74380002

"K16" AC SOLENOIDS FOR CETOP 5
CETOP 5 CH. I PAGE 28
Supply tolerance +10% / -10% AD5.E... CH. I PAGE 31
Duty cycle 100% ED
Max. pressure static 210 bar
Weight 0,8 Kg
E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
VOLTAGE MAX. WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER IN RUSH CURRENT RESISTANCE AT 20°C
(V) (AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 25°C) (VA) ALLO SPUNTO (VA) (OHM) ±10%
24V/50HZ 134°C 124 454 0.56
24V/60HZ* 115°C 103.5 440 0.55
48V/50HZ* 134°C 113 453 2.10
115V/50HZ - 120V/60HZ 121°C - 138°C - - 10.8
230V/50HZ - 240V/60HZ 121°C - 138°C - - 43.0
240V/50HZ* 134°C 120 456 47.39
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGE ETK16 - 01/2000/e
SPARE PARTS
K16 AC COIL CONNECTION
HIRSCHMANN
VOLTAGE (STANDARD)
24V/50HZ (A) M14300010
24V/60HZ* (F) M14300012
COMPLETE AD5E
48V/50HZ* (B) M14300014
KIT
115V/50HZ
120V/60HZ (J) M14300029
P1 ROTARY V89990002
230V/50HZ EMERGENCY
240V/60HZ (Y) M14300027
240V/50HZ* (E) M14300025 E1 MANUAL M19050002

EMERGENCY
(*)SPECIAL VOLTAGES ETK16-CODE - 00/2007/e
E = SEE K16 COIL TABLE

A / B / C / D / F / G = SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE CODES TABLE) 12
CODE A B C D E F G M OUNTING
SPARE PARTS O RING RING NUT COIL TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD AVAILABLE
M74210000 C-E-F
K16
SEE
AD5E Q25830026 Q25860026 Q25830187 M37050005 M83300000 M74160000 G-H-I-L

M74700000 D

"22W" DC COILS
Type of protection (in relation to the connector) IP 65 MOUNTING COMPATIBILITY
Number of cycles 18.000/h CRP/CRD BFP CARTRIDGE CAT.
C2V.02... BFP CARTRIDGE CAT.
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,2 Kg

12V 116°C 22 6.3
24V 115°C 22 25.6
48V* 114°C 22 102
102V* - 22 467.85
205V* - 22 1954
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGE ET22W - 02/2000/e
P3 ROTARY EMERGENCY AMP JUNIOR (AJ)
60,7
47,7
38,5
SPARE PARTS
22W DC COIL CONNECTIONS
VOLTAGE STANDARD AMP JUNIOR (AJ)
12V (L) M14040001 M14730001
24V (M) M14040002 M14730002
48V* (N) M14040003 —
102V* (Z) M14040006 —
205V* (X) M14040007 —
(*) SPECIAL VOLTAGES ET20W-CODE - 01/2008/e
COMPLETE
A = SEE 22W COIL TABLE KIT CRP02NA CRD01/02 CRP02NC C2V02 C3V02
B+B1 / C+C1 / D / E / F / G / H P3 ROTARY V89990014 V89990005 -
SINGLE SPARE PARTS (SEE TABLE) EMERGENCY
B B1 C + C1 D E+F G H
CODE PARBAK O RING
SPARE PARTS O RING RING NUT TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD VALVE
CRP/CRD VALVE SEAT (R. NUT/COIL) (+ O RING TUBE) SEAT
CRP02NC...E R83100B83 M86150006
CRP02NC...S Q25780026 Q25830015 R83100B82 M86150004 M70150003
CRP02NA...E R83100B84 M86150004
CRD01...A Q25780026 Q25830015 Q25860055 M37050026 M70150004

M74440000
CRD01...B Q25780030 Q25830021 M70150005
R83100B85
CRD02...A Q25780026 Q25830015 M70150004
M74440001
CRD02...B Q25780030 Q25830021 M70150005
12 CODE
B
PARBAK
B1
O RING
C + C1 D E F G H
VALVE
SPARE PARTS O RING RING NUT O RING TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD
C2V/C3V02 VALVE SEAT (R. NUT/COIL) (TUBE) SEAT
C2V02NC... M50070002
Q25780026 Q25830015 M70400002
C2V02NA... M50070003
Q25860055 M37050026 Q25861010 M83040005
_ Q25880036
C3V02... M50070001 M70400001
Q25880045

"30W" DC COILS
(in relation to the connector used) IP 65 CRD.04... BFP CARTRIDGE CAT.
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,2 Kg

12V 108°C 30 4.7
24V 108°C 30 18.8
IT30W - 02/1999/i
E1 MANUAL P1 ROTARY
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
FLUSSO FORZA AZIONAMENTO

2 →1 10N
1 →2 10+ (2,5 X P) N
P = PRESSIONE DI UTILIZZO (BAR)
SPARE PARTS
30W DC COIL COMPLETE KIT CDL04
12V 24V
P1 ROTARY EMERGENCY V89990007
M14100010 M14100011
(L) (M)
E1 MANUAL EMERGENCY M19050001
ET20W-CODE - 00/2007/e
A = SEE 30W COIL TABLE

B+B1+B2 / C / D / E+E1 / F / G / H = SINGLE SPARE
PARTS (SEE TABLE)
B
PARBAK
B1
O RING
B2
O RING
C
O RING
D E
O RING
E1
O RING
F G
VALVE
H 12
VALVE SEAT (TUBO) RING NUT
(COIL) (RING NUT) TUBE HEX. PUSCH ROD
SEAT
VERS. B VERS. A
Q25830015
Q25780026 M70150004
Q25831017 Q25861010 M37050004 Q25830026 Q25830183 R83200997 M74360000
Q25780030 Q25830021 M70150005

UL RECOGNIZED COMPONENT MARK COILS
UL RECOGNIZED The UL Recognized Component Mark may be used on

COMPONENT MARK component parts that are part of a larger product or
system. The UL Mark is the most widely recognised
22 W COIL and accepted evidence of product's compliance with
Canadian and USA safety requirements.
UL CATEGORY CODE (CCN) UL category code number (CCN) is assigned in order

to identify wich product categories are covered by UL's
- U.S.A. YSY12 Certification. Our category covers valve parts, such as
- Canada YSY18 solenoid operators, coil assemblies, coil enclosures,
valve assemblies and similar items intended to be
used as parts of electrically operated valves as indicated
in the individual Recognitions.
27 W COIL
ARON UL FILE NUMBER Visiting the UL web site (www.ul.com), linking
certifications and writing the correct Aron UL File
MH45162 Number you can find our Certification.
The UL File Number is an alphanumeric designation

assigned to any Company upon successful completion
of a product evaluation or company certification.
"22 W" DC COILS "27W" DC COILS

IDENTIFICATION MARK IDENTIFICATION MARK
2
4 2
3 4
5 3
5
6 1 6 1
1 Recognized Component Mark 1 Recognized Component Mark
2 Type Coil code, voltage and connector type 2 Type Coil code, voltage and connector type
M.14.04.0021 12 VDC (Hirschmann) M.14.31.0011 12 VDC (Hirschmann)
M.14.04.0022 24 VDC (Hirschmann) M.14.31.0012 24 VDC (Hirschmann)
M.14.04.0031 12 VDC (With flying leads) M.14.07.0021 12 VDC (With flying leads)
M.14.04.0032 24 VDC (With flying leads) M.14.07.0022 24 VDC (With flying leads)
3 21W@+ 50°C Power at +50°C (ambient temperature) 3 22W@+ 50°C Power at +50°C (ambient temperature)
for 12 and 24V coils for 12V coils
27W@+ 50°C Power at +50°C (ambient temperature)
27W@- 25°C Power at -25°C (ambient temperature)
for 24V coils
for 12 and 24V coils
32W@- 25°C Power at -25°C (ambient temperature)
for 12 and 24V coils
4 ED 100% Duty cycle 4 ED 100% Duty cycle
5 Tamb Ambient operating temperature 5 Tamb Ambient operating temperature
12 6
-25°C ÷ +50°C
Class H Insulation class wire 6

-25°C ÷ +50°C
Class H Insulation class wire
The is the accredited Unit to release the UL Mark, the most valued
product safety symbol.
File: TUL22W27W_E XII • 12 02/2010/e

"22W" DC COILS - UL RECOGNIZED
Type of protection
Supply tolerance -15% / +10%
Power at +50°C (ambient temperature) for 12 and 24V coils 21W
Power at -25°C (ambient temperature) for 12 and 24V coils 27W
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,215 Kg
HIRSCHMANN
(UR) VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C
12V 116°C 22 6.30
24V 116°C 22 25.60
ETUL22W - 00/2007/e
VARIANT AND VOLTAGE CODES (WICH HAVE TO PUT IN THE ORDERING CODE VALVE)
"22W" MOUNTING CRP, CRD, C2V02 and C3V02
COMPATIBILITY see Ch. V "Cartridge valves"
VARIANT CODE UR = Hirschmann connection

FLYING LEADS UZ = Solenoid with flying leads (500 mm)
(UZ)
VOLTAGE CODE L = 12 VDC
M = 24 VDC
Voltage code is always stamped over on the coil
"27W" DC COILS - UL RECOGNIZED

Supply tolerance -15% / +10%
Power at +50°C (ambient temperature) for 12V coil 22W
Power at +50°C (ambient temperature) for 24V coil 27W
Power at -25°C (ambient temperature) for 12 and 24V coils 32W
Duty cycle 100% ED
Weight 0,215 Kg
HIRSCHMANN
(UR) VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C
12V 123°C 27 5.30
24V 123°C 27 21.30
ET27WUL - 00/2007/e
VARIANT AND VOLTAGE CODES (WICH HAVE TO PUT IN THE ORDERING CODE VALVE)
"27W" MOUNTING
COMPATIBILITY
AD2E... ADC3E.. and CDL04... see Ch. I "Directional control"
C3V03... see Ch. V "Cartridge valves"
CDC3... see Ch. XI "Stackable valves"
12
VARIANT CODE UR = Hirschmann connection
UZ = Solenoid with flying leads (250 mm)
FLYING LEADS Other variants relate to a special design
(UZ)
VOLTAGE CODE L = 12 VDC
M = 24 VDC
Voltage code is always stamped over on the coil
File: TUL22W27W_E XII • 13 02/2010/e

12
File: TUL22W27W_E XII • 14 02/2010/e

Plant ARON
Via Natta, 1
42124 Reggio Emilia - Italy
Tel. +39 0522 5058
Fax +39 0522 505856
www.aron.it
AR TEC GEN E0 1110 COD. P35030200
Brevini Fluid Power S.p.A.
Via Moscova, 6
42124 Reggio Emilia - Italy
Tel. +39 0522 270711

Fax +39 0522 270660
www.brevinifluidpower.com
info@brevinifluidpower.com

Aron-E P35030200

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aron-E P35030200

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL CATALOGUE

File: 00TA_E Index • I 01/2010/e

A CH. I PAGE 5 CH. IV PAGE 9

CH. IV PAGE 19 CH. I PAGE 48 CH. IV PAGE 9

CH. IV PAGE 33 CH. I PAGE 52 CH. IV PAGE 13

CH. I PAGE 4 CH. I PAGE 57 CH. IV PAGE 15

CH. I PAGE 17 CH. I PAGE 64 CH. VIII PAGE 26

CH. I PAGE 11 CH. I PAGE 66 CH. IV PAGE 26

File: 00TA_E Index • II 13/2010/e

CH. VII PAGE 15 CH. VII PAGE 25 CH. VII PAGE 8

CH. VII PAGE 15 CH. VII PAGE 26 CH. VII PAGE 8

CH. VII PAGE 13 CH. VII PAGE 26 CH. VII PAGE 8

CH. VII PAGE 13 CH. VII PAGE 5 CH. VII PAGE 8

CH. VII PAGE 27 CH. VII PAGE 6 CH. VII PAGE 3

CH. VII PAGE 4 CH. VII PAGE 5 CH. VII PAGE 9

CH. VII PAGE 4 CH. VII PAGE 6 CH. VII PAGE 9

CH. VII PAGE 4 CH. VII PAGE 16 CH. VII PAGE 19

CH. VII PAGE 12 CH. VII PAGE 17 CH. VII PAGE 20

CH. VII PAGE 13 CH. VII PAGE 18 CH. VII PAGE 20

CH. VII PAGE 13 CH. VII PAGE 16 CH. VII PAGE 20

CH. VII PAGE 12 CH. VII PAGE 17 CH. VII PAGE 20

CH. VII PAGE 10 CH. VII PAGE 18 CH. VII PAGE 21

CH. VII PAGE 10 CH. VII PAGE 28 CH. VII PAGE 21

CH. VII PAGE 10 CH. VII PAGE 28 CH. VII PAGE 23

CH. VII PAGE 11 CH. VII PAGE 29 CH. VII PAGE 21

CH. VII PAGE 12 CH. VII PAGE 29 CH. VII PAGE 22

CH. VII PAGE 12 CH. VII PAGE 29 CH. X PAGE 5

CH. VII PAGE 27 CH. VII PAGE 2 CH. X PAGE 5

CH. VII PAGE 27 CH. VII PAGE 2 CH. VII PAGE 9

CH. VII PAGE 26 CH. VII PAGE 2 CH. II PAGE 11

CH. VII PAGE 24 CH. VII PAGE 3 CH. VII PAGE 23

CH. VII PAGE 27 CH. VII PAGE 3 CH. II PAGE 11

CH. VII PAGE 25 CH. VII PAGE 7 CH. II PAGE 11

File: 00TA_E Index • III 13/2010/e

CH. X PAGE 4 CH. V PAGE 11 CH. V PAGE 10

CH. I PAGE 51 CH. I PAGE 19 CH. V PAGE 6

File: 00TA_E Index • IV 13/2010/e

CH. VIII PAGE 18

CETOP 2 CH. IV PAGE 6

V.M.L / V.S.L / V.U.L...

CH. VIII PAGE 2

File: 00TA_E Index • V 13/2010/e

The user must, in particular, assess the

General terms and conditions of sale:

AD.3.I... CH. I PAGE 41

CETOP 3/NG06 CETOP 5/NG10

File: 01TA_E I• 1 09/2000/e

** Spool (tables next page)

* Mounting (table 1 next page)

* Voltage (table 2 next page)

** Variants (table 3 next page)

File: AD2E003_E I• 2 15/2010/e

TAB. 1 MOUNTING TAB.3 - VARIANTS STANDARD SPOOLS

C No variant 00 Spool Covering Transient position

• Mounting type D is only for 02 -

LIMITS OF USE (MOUNTING C-E-F)

(6*) = 16 spool used as 2 or 3 way, 66 +

File: AD2E003_E I• 3 15/2010/e

1 Max excitation frequency

Screws with material specifications

VOLTAGE MAX WINDING TEMPERATURE RATED POWER RESISTANCE AT 20°C

DEUTSCH COIL WITH FLYING LEADS (FL) E1 MANUAL P1(*) ROTARY

File: AD2E003_E I• 4 15/2010/e

E1 MANUAL P1() ROTARY P5() ROTARY FLYING LEADS (FL)